GEBRL
AV Amplifier
OWNER’S MANUAL
English
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front panel
A
B
C
MAIN ZONE
ON/OFF
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
ON
OFF
VOLUME
INPUT
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
PROGRAM
MENU
SPEAKERS
ZONE
AUDIO SELECT
A
B
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE 3
CONTROLS
MULTI
ZONE
REC OUT/
ZONE 2
TONE CONTROL
ZONE 2
S VIDEO
ZONE 4
L
PUSH ENTER
SILENT CINEMA
PHONES
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
OPTICAL
HDMI IN
USB
YPAO
OPTIMIZER
MIC
VIDEO AUX
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
PROGRAM
MENU
SPEAKERS
ZONE
CONTROLS
A
B
AUDIO SELECT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE 3
MULTI
ZONE
REC OUT/
ZONE 2
TONE CONTROL
ZONE 2
ZONE 4
PUSH ENTER
SILENT CINEMA
HDMI IN
USB
S VIDEO
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
OPTICAL
YPAO
OPTIMIZER
MIC
PHONES
VIDEO AUX
K
L
M
2 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote control
1
Backlight mode
D
E
The remote control is equipped with
the motion sensor and the remote
control lights up the backlight
corresponding to the motions or
operation. If you do not want to
lights up the backlight when this unit
detects motions, change the backlight
mode (see page 104).
POWER POWER
STANDBY
POWER
2
3
TV
AV
MD
MULTI
V-AUX
DVD
PHONO
CD
TAPE
BD
CD-R
VCR
HD DVD
CBL
SAT
DTV
DVR
Simplified remote control
This products is supplied with the
simplified remote control. Refer to
“Simplified remote control” on
page 110.
NET
USB
TUNER
DOCK
AMP
TV
4
5
F
Optional component control
SOURCE
area button (
)
G
H
SELECT
MACRO
MODE
SETUP
ID
You can control the desired
component without changing the
input source of this unit (see
page 102).
ZONE
6
SYSTEM MEMORY
1
2
3
4
7
8
I
J
LEVEL
TITLE
BAND
SRCH MODE VOLUME
MENU
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A-E
9
0
RETURN
MEMORY
DISPLAY
MUTE
K
L
Q
PC/MCX
REC
A
NET RADIO
USB
CLASSICAL 1 CLASSICAL 2 LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
1
2
3
4
MOVIE
STEREO
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
5
6
7
8
CLASSICAL 1 CLASSICAL 2 LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
4
THX
9
STRAIGHT
0
1
2
3
MOVIE
STEREO
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
B
C
5
6
7
8
M
N
THX
9
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT EXTD SUR.
0
R
10
ENT
PARTY
SLEEP
HDMI OUT
MUTE
AUDIO SEL
AUDIO
O
P
TV VOL
TV CH
TV
3D DSP
INPUT
3 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Limited Guarantee for European Economic Area (EEA) and Switzerland
Thank you for having chosen a Yamaha product. In the unlikely event that your Yamaha product needs guarantee service, please contact the dealer from whom it was purchased. If
you experience any difficulty, please contact Yamaha representative office in your country. You can find full details on our website (http://www.yamaha-hifi.com/ or
http://www.yamaha-uk.com/ for U.K. resident).
The product is guaranteed to be free from defects in workmanship or materials for a period of two years from the date of the original purchase. Yamaha undertakes, subject to the
conditions listed below, to have the faulty product or any part(s) repaired, or replaced at Yamaha’s discretion, without any charge for parts or labour. Yamaha reserves the right to
replace a product with that of a similar kind and/or value and condition, where a model has been discontinued or is considered uneconomic to repair.
Conditions
1. The original invoice or sales receipt (showing date of purchase, product code and dealer’s name) MUST accompany the defective product, along with a statement detailing the
fault. In the absence of this clear proof of purchase, Yamaha reserves the right to refuse to provide free of charge service and the product may be returned at the customer’s
expense.
2. The product MUST have been purchased from an AUTHORISED Yamaha dealer within the European Economic Area (EEA) or Switzerland.
3. The product must not have been the subject of any modifications or alterations, unless authorised in writing by Yamaha.
4. The following are excluded from this guarantee:
a. Periodic maintenance and repair or replacement of parts due to normal wear and tear.
b. Damage resulting from:
(1) Repairs performed by the customer himself or by an unauthorised third party.
(2) Inadequate packaging or mishandling, when the product is in transit from the customer. Please note that it is the customer’s responsibility to ensure the product is
adequately packaged when returning the product for repair.
(3) Misuse, including but not limited to (a) failure to use the product for its normal purpose or in accordance with Yamaha’s instructions on the proper use, maintenance and
storage, and (b) installation or use of the product in a manner inconsistent with the technical or safety standards in force in the country where it is used.
(4) Accidents, lightning, water, fire, improper ventilation, battery leakage or any cause beyond Yamaha’s control.
(5) Defects of the system into which this product is incorporated and/or incompatibility with third party products.
(6) Use of a product imported into the EEA and/or Switzerland, not by Yamaha, where that product does not conform to the technical or safety standards of the country of use
and/or to the standard specification of a product sold by Yamaha in the EEA and/or Switzerland.
(7) Non AV (Audio Visual) related products.
(Products subject to “Yamaha AV Guarantee Statement” are defined in our website at http://www.yamaha-hifi.com/ or
http://www.yamaha-uk.com/ for U.K. resident.)
5. Where the guarantee differs between the country of purchase and the country of use of the product, the guarantee of the country of use shall apply.
6. Yamaha may not be held responsible for any losses or damages, whether direct, consequential or otherwise, save for the repair or replacement of the product.
7. Please backup any custom settings or data, as Yamaha may not be held responsible for any alteration or loss to such settings or data.
8. This guarantee does not affect the consumer’s statutory rights under applicable national laws in force or the consumer’s rights against the dealer arising from their sales/purchase
contract.
4 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
Caution: Read this before operating your unit.
1
2
To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep
it in a safe place for future reference.
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,
DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place –
away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or
cold. Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the
left and right, and 20 cm on the back of this unit.
Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or
transformers to avoid humming sounds.
Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot,
and do not locate this unit in an environment with high humidity (i.e. a
room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which
may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal
injury.
Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto this unit
and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the
top of this unit, do not place:
As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet, it is not
disconnected from the AC power source even if you turn off this
3
4
B
unit by MASTER ON/OFF. In this state, this unit is designed to
consume a very small quantity of power.
■ For U.K. customers
If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the plug
supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and an appropriate
3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the instructions described
below.
5
–
–
–
Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration
on the surface of this unit.
Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this
unit, and/or personal injury.
Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause
electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit.
Note
The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a plug with
bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live socket outlet.
■ Special Instructions for U.K. Model
6
Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order
not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it
may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are
complete.
Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing
damage.
Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.
IMPORTANT
THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE:
7
8
9
Blue: NEUTRAL
Brown: LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not
correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your
plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal
which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which
is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked
with the letter L or coloured RED.
Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the
three pin plug.
10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet, grasp the
plug; do not pull the cable.
11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the
finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a
higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to
this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha will not be held responsible for
any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than
specified.
13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and outdoor
antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit during a lightning
storm.
14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified Yamaha
service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never
be opened for any reasons.
15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation),
disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet.
16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power plug can be
reached easily.
This symbol mark is according to the EU directive
2002/96/EC.
This symbol mark means that electrical and
electronic equipment, at their end-of-life, should
be disposed of separately from your household
waste.
Please act according to your local rules and do not
dispose of your old products with your normal
household waste.
errors before concluding that this unit is faulty.
18 Before moving this unit, press BMASTER ON/OFF to release it
outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit, the main room, Zone 2,
Zone 3, and Zone 4 and then disconnect the AC power plug from the AC
wall outlet.
19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for
your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC wall outlet.
Voltages are as follows:
.................................................. 110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
20 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire
or like.
21 Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can cause
hearing loss.
5En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Introduction
Internal Source Operation
Notices..........................................................................................8
Features......................................................................................10
Getting started...........................................................................11
Quick start guide.......................................................................13
Using iPod™..............................................................................64
Controlling iPod™........................................................................ 64
Remote control operation ......................................................... 64
Controlling iPod in the simple remote mode............................ 64
Controlling iPod in the menu browse mode............................. 64
The functions of the play information display.......................... 65
Using Network/USB features ...................................................66
Navigating the network and USB menus...................................... 66
Remote control operation ......................................................... 67
Using a PC server or Yamaha MCX-2000 ................................... 68
Installing Windows Media Player 11 on your PC.................... 68
Registering this unit on the Yamaha MCX-2000 ..................... 68
Using the Internet Radio............................................................... 69
Storing your favorite Internet Radio stations
Preparation
Connections ...............................................................................20
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room
(YPAO) ..................................................................................42
Before starting the automatic setup ...............................................42
Using the quick automatic setup....................................................43
Using the basic automatic setup ....................................................44
Reviewing the result of the automatic setup .............................45
Using advanced automatic setup ...................................................46
with bookmarks.................................................................... 69
Using a USB storage device or a USB portable audio player ...... 69
Using shortcut buttons .................................................................. 70
Assigning the items to the numeric button (1-8)...................... 70
Select an item by using numeric buttons (1-8)......................... 70
Basic Operation
Playback.....................................................................................50
Basic procedure .............................................................................50
Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component...............................50
Selecting the HDMI OUT jack......................................................51
Selecting the front speaker set.......................................................51
Using the Zone B feature...........................................................51
Using your headphones .................................................................51
Playing video sources in the background of an audio source........51
Selecting audio input jacks
(AUDIO SELECT)....................................................................52
Muting the audio output ................................................................52
Using the sleep timer .....................................................................52
Canceling the sleep timer ..........................................................52
Operating this unit
Advanced Operation
Advanced sound configurations ..............................................72
Selecting decoders ........................................................................ 72
Selecting decoders for 2-channel sources
(surround decode mode)....................................................... 72
Decoder descriptions ................................................................ 72
Selecting decoders used with sound field programs................. 72
Selecting decoders for multi-channel sources .......................... 72
Playing back sources with the THX Surround modes .................. 73
For 2-channel sources............................................................... 73
For multi-channel sources ........................................................ 73
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu.....................................74
GUI menu overview...................................................................... 76
Stereo/Surround (Stereo/Surround menu) .................................... 77
Input Select ................................................................................... 81
Manual Setup (Basic).................................................................... 83
Manual Setup (Volume)................................................................ 86
Manual Setup (Sound) .................................................................. 86
Manual Setup (Video)................................................................... 89
Manual Setup (Multi Zone) .......................................................... 91
Manual Setup (Network) .............................................................. 92
Manual Setup (Option) ................................................................. 93
Signal Info. (Input signal information)......................................... 95
Language....................................................................................... 95
Saving and recalling the system settings
(System Memory)..................................................................96
Saving the current system settings................................................ 96
Saving by the SYSTEM MEMORY buttons............................ 96
Saving by the GUI menu operation.......................................... 96
Renaming the stored settings.................................................... 97
Saved parameters for the main zone......................................... 98
Saved parameters for Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4 ..................... 98
Loading the stored system settings ............................................... 98
Loading by the SYSTEM MEMORY buttons ......................... 98
Loading by the GUI menu operation........................................ 98
Using examples............................................................................. 99
Example 1: Switching the settings
by using the graphical user interface (GUI) menu ....................53
Items in GUI menu....................................................................53
Basic controls in the GUI menu ................................................53
Basic operation of the GUI menu
by using the front panel controls...........................................53
Sound field programs ...............................................................54
Selecting sound field programs .....................................................54
Sound field program descriptions..................................................54
For audio music sources............................................................55
For various sources....................................................................57
For visual sources of music.......................................................57
For parties..................................................................................58
For game programs....................................................................58
For movie sources .....................................................................58
Stereo playback .........................................................................59
For compression artifacts
(Compressed Music Enhancer mode) ...................................59
Surround decoder mode.............................................................59
THX Surround mode.................................................................59
Using sound field programs without surround speakers
(Virtual CINEMA DSP)........................................................60
Enjoying multi-channel sources and sound field programs with
headphones (SILENT CINEMA)..........................................60
Using CINEMA DSP HD³ mode...................................................60
Enjoying unprocessed input sources..............................................60
Deactivating the “STRAIGHT” mode ......................................60
Using audio features .................................................................61
Enjoying pure hi-fi sound..............................................................61
Adjusting the tonal quality ............................................................61
Adjusting the speaker level............................................................61
Recording...................................................................................62
of this unit according to the using situations........................ 99
Example 2: Switching the setting of this unit according
to the environment of the listening room ........................... 100
Controlling this unit by using the Web browser
(Web Control Center).........................................................101
6 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Remote control features......................................................... 102
Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components........................102
Controlling this unit ................................................................102
Controlling a TV .....................................................................102
Controlling other components.................................................103
Selecting a component to be controlled ..................................103
Controlling optional components (Option mode) ...................103
Customizing the remote control ..................................................104
Setting the backlight mode of the remote control (LIGHT)........104
Setting remote control codes (P-SET).........................................104
Programming codes from other remote controls (LEARN)........105
Changing source names in the display window (RNAME) ........106
Macro programming features ......................................................107
Recalling programmed macro-operations...............................107
Default macro functions..........................................................108
Programming macro operations (MACRO)............................108
Clearing configurations ...............................................................109
Clearing function sets (CLEAR).............................................109
Clearing a learned function (ERASE).....................................109
Simplified remote control............................................................110
Setting the controlling zone of the simplified remote control ..........110
Replacing the battery in the simplified remote control...........110
Using multi-zone configuration............................................. 111
Step1: Planning the multi-zone system .......................................111
Step2: Connecting the speakers, external amplifiers,
and/or other components.........................................................112
Using the internal amplifier of this unit ..................................112
Using external amplifiers ........................................................113
Using the ZONE DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack..............113
Connecting Zone video monitor..............................................114
Video signal up-conversion
to the zone component video signals ..................................114
Using REMOTE IN/OUT and TRIGGER OUT jacks
for Zone 2, Zone 3, and Zone 4 ..........................................115
Step3: Setting the zone parameter...............................................116
Assigning the zone speakers ...................................................116
Controlling Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4........................................116
Basic operation........................................................................116
Selecting the input source Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4 ............117
Adjusting the volume level of Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4...........117
Setting the sleep timer for Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4 ............117
Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4 ...........118
Using the Zone OSD ...............................................................118
Using the party mode ..................................................................118
Advanced setup....................................................................... 119
Using the advanced setup menu ..................................................119
Additional Information
Troubleshooting...................................................................... 122
Glossary................................................................................... 128
Parametric equalizer information......................................... 135
Block diagrams ....................................................................... 136
Specifications........................................................................... 138
Index ........................................................................................ 140
List of remote control codes................................................... 144
B
3
MASTER ON/OFF” or “ DVD” (example) indicates the name of
“
the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to the cover
pages at the top of this manual for the information about each position of
the parts.
7 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notices
About this manual
• yindicates a tip for your operation.
• Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the
front panel or the ones on the remote control. In case the button
names differ between the front panel and the remote control, the
button name on the remote control is given in parentheses.
• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications
are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case
of differences between the manual and product, the product has
priority.
MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and
Thomson.
This amplifier supports network connections.
• This unit is equipped with GUI language switching capability. In this
manual, the illustrations of the GUI are examples when you set the
GUI language to English.
“HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo, and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface”
are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
A
3
• “ MAIN ZONE ON/OFF” or “ DVD” (example) indicates the
name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to
the cover pages at the top of this manual for the information about
each position of the parts.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
• The symbol “☞” with page number(s) indicates the corresponding
reference page(s).
Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows Internet Explorer, Windows Media
Audio, Windows Media Connect, and Windows Media Player are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
The PlaysForSure logo, Windows Media and the Windows logo are
trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
Content providers are using the digital rights management technology for
Windows Media contained in this device (WM-DRM) to protect the
integrity of their content (Secure Content) so that their intellectual property,
including copyright, in such content is not misappropriated.
This device uses WM-DRM software to play Secure Content (WM-DRM
Software).
If the security of the WM-DRM Software in this device has been
compromised, owners of Secure Content (Secure Content Owners) may
request that Microsoft revoke the WM-DRM Software’s right to acquire new
licenses to copy, display and/or play Secure Content. Revocation does not
alter the WM-DRM Software’s ability to play unprotected content. A list of
revoked WM-DRM Software is sent to your device whenever you download
a license for Secure Content from the Internet or from a PC. Microsoft may,
in conjunction with such license, also download revocation list onto your
device on behalf of Secure Content Owners.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent No’s:
5,451,942;5,956,674;5,974,380;5,978,762;6,226,616;6,487,535 & other
U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a registered
trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master
Audio are trademark of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.
THX, the THX logo and Ultra2 Plus are trademarks of THX Ltd. which may
be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved. All other trademarks
are the property of their respective owners.
TM
iPod
“iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
8 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Getting started ..................................................................................... 11
Opening and closing the front panel door ............................................................................... 12
Step 3: Turn on the power and start playback ......................................................................... 17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Features
Built-in 11-channel power amplifier
◆ Minimum RMS output power
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω)
Front: 140 W + 140 W
◆ NETWORK port to connect a PC and Yamaha MCX-2000 or access the
Internet Radio via LAN
◆ DHCP automatic or manual network configuration
Center: 140 W
◆ USB ports to connect a USB storage device, USB Hard disc drive, or a
Surround: 140 W + 140 W
Surround back: 140 W + 140 W
Front presence: 50 W + 50 W
Rear presence: 50 W + 50 W
USB portable audio player
Web control feature
◆ Web control capability of this unit by using a Web browser
◆ Proprietary Yamaha technology for the creation of sound fields
◆ CINEMA DSP HD³ mode for creating intensive and accurate
◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode to improve the sound quality of
compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) to that of a high-quality
Automatic speaker setup features
◆ Advanced YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) for
◆ Specialized parametric equalizer for the standing wave reduction
◆ Multiple point measurement feature for multiple listening positions
◆ Speaker angle measurement feature for the optimized CINEMA DSP
Digital audio decoders
◆ Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus decoder
◆ DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio decoder
◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder
Other features
◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter
◆ GUI (graphical user interface) menus that allow you to optimize this unit
◆ GUI display menu language switching capability (English, Japanese,
◆ 6 or 8-channel additional input jacks for discrete multi-channel input
◆ Analog video interlace/progressive conversion from 480i (NTSC)/576i
(PAL) to 480p/576p
◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS 96/24 decoder
◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder
◆ DTS NEO:6 decoder
◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well
as multi-channel digital audio based on HDMI version 1.3a
◆ Automatic audio and video synchronization (lip sync) information
capability
◆ Component video input/output capability includes (4 COMPONENT
◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes, learning, macro and
◆ Deep Color (30/36 bit) and xvYCC color video signal transmission
capability
◆ High refresh rate and high resolution video signals capability
◆ High definition digital audio format signals capability
◆ Analog video to HDMI digital video up-conversion (composite video ↔
S-video ↔ component video → HDMI digital video) capability for
monitor out
◆ DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the
YDS-10, sold separately), which supports iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod
nano, and iPod mini
◆ Zone switching capability between the main zone and Zone 2/Zone 3/
◆ Zone 2 video output (composite and component) and displaying OSD
◆ System Memory capability for saving and recalling multiple system
10 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
Supplied accessories
Check that you received all of the following parts.
Remote control
Simplified remote control
Batteries (4)
(AAA, LR03)
Microphone base
POWER POWER
STANDBY
POWER
POWER
STANDBY
TV
AV
MD
MULTI
V-AUX
DVD
PHONO
CD
FRONT
TAPE
DIRECTION
BD
CD-R
VCR
HD DVD
SYSTEM MEMORY
1
2
3
4
CBL
SAT
DTV
DVR
NET
USB
TUNER
DOCK
INPUT
AMP
TV
INT SOURCE
PRESET
VOLUME
SOURCE
SELECT
MACRO
MODE
SETUP
ID
ZONE
SYSTEM MEMORY
1
2
3
4
LEVEL
TITLE
BAND
SRCH MODE VOLUME
MENU
PRESET/CH
MUTE
ENTER
A-E
RETURN
MEMORY
DISPLAY
MUTE
PC/MCX
REC
NET RADIO
USB
CLASSICAL
1
CLASSICAL
2
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
1
2
3
4
Optimizer microphone
MOVIE
5
STEREO
6
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
7
Power cable
(Two for Asia model)
8
THX
9
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT EXTD SUR.
0
10
ENT
PARTY
SLEEP
HDMI OUT
MUTE
AUDIO SEL
AUDIO
TV VOL
TV CH
TV
3D DSP
INPUT
Note
The form of the supplied accessories varies depending on the models.
Notes
■ Installing batteries in the remote control
• Change all of the batteries if you notice the operation range of the remote
control decreases.
• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.
1
3
• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese
batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of
batteries may have the same shape and color.
• We strongly recommend that you use alkaline batteries.
• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching
the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean
the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries.
• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose of them
correctly in accordance with your local regulations.
2
• If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if
exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the
memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new
batteries, set up the remote control code and program any acquired
functions that may have been cleared.
1
2
Take off the battery compartment cover.
Insert the four supplied batteries (AAA, LR03)
according to the polarity markings
(+ and –) on the inside of the battery compartment.
3
Snap the battery compartment cover back into place.
11 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
Notes
Using the remote control
• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.
• Do not drop the remote control.
• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of
conditions:
The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray.
Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control
sensor on this unit during operation.
– places of high humidity, such as near a bath
– places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove
– places of extremely low temperatures
– dusty places
Remote control sensor
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
ON
ON/OFF
OFF
Backlight mode
INPUT
II
T
PROGRAM
VOLUME
D
N/
T
/
I
The remote control is equipped with the motion sensor and the
remote control lights up the backlight corresponding to the
motions or operation. If you do not want to lights up the
backlight when this unit detects motions, change the backlight
Z
4
T
II
I I
Approximately
6 m (20 ft)
30
30
Opening and closing the front panel door
When you want to use the controls behind the front panel door, open
the door by gently pressing on the lower part of the panel. Keep the
door closed when not using these controls.
6LIGHT
Lights up the remote control buttons and the display window (4).
Display window (4)
[1] [2]
ZONE 4
[3]
[4]
To open, press gently on the lower part of the panel.
[1] ID1/ID2 indicator
Indicates the currently selected remote control ID (see
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(Asia and General models only)
[2] Transmit indicator
Appears while the remote control is sending infrared signals.
[3] Zone indicators
Indicates the currently controlling zone (see page 116).
Caution
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must
be set for your local voltage BEFORE plugging the power cable
into the AC wall outlet. Improper setting of the VOLTAGE
SELECTOR may cause damage to this unit and create a
potential fire hazard.
[4] Information display
Shows the name of the selected input source that you can
control.
Infrared window (1)
Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component
you want to operate.
Rotate the VOLTAGE SELECTOR clockwise or counterclockwise
to the correct position using a straight slot screwdriver.
Voltages are as follows:
Operation mode selector (F)
The function of some buttons depends on the operation mode
selector position.
...................... AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz
VOLTAGE
SELECTOR
AMP
Operates the amplifier function of this unit.
230-
Voltage indication
240V
SOURCE
Operates the component selected with an input selector button
TV
Operates the TV (see page 102).
12 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Quick start guide
The following steps describe the easiest way to enjoy Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD movie playback in your home theater.
See pages 21 to 24 for details of the speaker placement.
Right front
presence
Front right
Right
subwoofer
Left front
presence
Surround
right
Center
Right rear
presence
Front left
Left
subwoofer
Surround
back right
Surround
back left
Surround left
Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD player
Left rear
presence
Preparation: Check the items
In these steps, you need the following supplied accessory.
Step 1: Set up your speakers
❏ Power cable
The following items are not included in the package of this unit.
❏ Speakers
❏ Front speaker ................................................... x 2
❏ Center speaker ................................................ x 1
❏ Surround speaker ............................................ x 4
❏ Front presence speaker .................................. x 2
❏ Rear presence speaker ................................... x 2
Select magnetically shielded speakers. The minimum
required speakers are two front speakers. The priority of the
requirement of other speakers is as follows:
Step 2: Connect your Blu-ray Disc/
HD DVD player and other
components
1. Two surround speakers
2. One center speaker
3. One (or two) surround back speaker(s)
4. Two front presence speakers
5. Two rear presence speakers
Step 3: Turn on the power and start
playback
❏ Active subwoofers ............................................... x 2
Select active subwoofers equipped with an RCA input jack.
❏ Speaker cable ..................................................... x 11
❏ Subwoofer cables ................................................ x 2
Select monaural RCA cables.
❏ HDMI cables ......................................................... x 2
Select HDMI cables shorter than 5 meters (16 feet) with the
HDMI logo printed on it.
Enjoy Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD
playback!
❏ Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD player ................................ x 1
Select Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD player equipped with an
HDMI output jack.
❏ Video monitor........................................................ x 1
Select a TV monitor, video monitor or projector equipped
with an HDMI input jack.
13 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Quick start guide
Step 1: Set up your speakers
Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this unit.
1 Make sure that this unit and the subwoofers are unplugged from the AC wall
outlets.
1
2
3
4
2 Twist the exposed wires of the speaker cables together to prevent short circuits.
3 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other.
4 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch any metal part of this unit.
Right rear
presence speaker
Right front
presence speaker
Loosen
Insert
Tighten
Surround right
speaker
Surround back
right speaker
Front right
speaker
Center speaker
For other speaker configurations
If you want to connect less than 11 speakers and 2 subwoofers, connect the speakers as follows.
Front
Front
Rear
Rear
Front
right
Surround Surround Surround Surround
Subwoofer Subwoofer
Front left
Center
presence presence presence presence
left
right
back left back right
left
right
left
ꢀ
right
ꢀ
left
ꢀ
right
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
11.2/11.1
9.2/9.1
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
7.2/7.1
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
6.2/6.1
5.2/5.1
3.2/3.1
2.2/2.1
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
14 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Quick start guide
Left rear
Left front
presence speaker presence speaker
0
0
Left subwoofer
Right subwoofer
Subwoofer
cable
Subwoofer cable
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel
(R), “+” (red line) and “–” (white line) properly.
Note
Check the impedance of the speaker you are connecting. If
the impedance of your speaker is 6-ohm, change the setting of
Surround left
speaker
Surround back
left speaker
Front left speaker
15 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Quick start guide
Step 2: Connect your Blu-ray Disc/HD
DVD player and other
3
Connect the supplied power cable to AC IN on this
unit and then plug the power cable and other
components into the AC wall outlet.
components
y
This unit is equipped with AC OUTLET(S) that provide(s) power to
HDMI OUT 1
BD/HD DVD HDMI IN 1
HDMI
IN1
OUT
1
BD/HD DVD
AC IN
To the AC wall outlet
AC IN
General connection information
Make sure that this unit and the Blu-ray Disc/HD
DVD player are unplugged from the AC wall
outlets.
•
General information on jacks and cable plugs
General information on HDMI
•
•
Speaker impedance setting
1
Connect an HDMI cable to the HDMI output jack on
your Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD player and the BD/HD DVD
HDMI IN 1 jack of this unit.
For further connections
•
•
Using other kinds of speaker combinations
Connecting a video monitor via various ways of connection
AV amplifier
Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD player
•
•
•
Connecting a Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD player via various ways
Connecting a DVD player via various ways of connection
Connecting a DVD recorder or a digital video recorder
BD/HD DVD
HDMI IN 1 jack
HDMI output jack
HDMI cable
•
•
Connecting a set-top box
Connecting a CD player, an MD recorder, or a turntable
Connecting a DVD player via multi-channel analog audio
2
Connect an HDMI cable to the HDMI OUT 1 jack on
this unit and the HDMI input jack on your video
monitor.
•
•
Connecting an external amplifier
AV amplifier
connection
Video monitor
•
•
•
•
•
•
Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock
Using the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
Using the TRIGGER OUT jacks
Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel
Connecting this unit to your network
Connecting a USB device
HDMI input
jack
HDMI OUT 1 jack
HDMI cable
16 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Quick start guide
■ After using this unit...
Step 3: Turn on the power and start
playback
A
Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF to set this unit to the
standby mode.
Check the type of the connected speakers.
If the speakers are 6-ohm speakers, set “SPEAKER IMP.” to
1
Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit.
B
Press MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON
position on the front panel.
2
This unit is set to the standby mode and consumes a small amount
of power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote
A
control. To turn on this unit from the standby mode, press MAIN
E
ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel (or POWER on the remote
Automatic setup feature
To optimize the speaker settings for your listening room, use the
Note
■ Are you enjoying playback?
If there are some troubles with playback, check the settings as
follows.
After this unit is turned on, it takes approximately 20 seconds until this
unit produces sounds, and while “Please wait” appears in the front
panel display, this unit does not accepts the front panel operations and
stores the remote control operations. This unit performs the stored
remote control operations after “Please wait” disappears.
No sound is output.
Are the speakers connected correctly?
 Check the speaker connection.
D
Rotate the INPUT selector to set the input source
3
Are Your Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD player connected correctly?
 Check the connection of the Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD player.
Are the front speakers selected correctly?
 Press GSPEAKERS A or GSPEAKERS B.
Is volume setting correct?
 Adjust the volume level.
Does the Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD player play back correctly?
 Check the setting of the Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD player.
to “BD/HD DVD”.
y
The recommended sound field program is set for each input source
(BD/HD DVD, etc.). You can also use various sound field programs
and other sound modes for playback. Refer to the following pages for
details:
No picture.
Is the video monitor connected correctly?
4
5
Start playback of the desired Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD
source on your player.
 Check the connection of the video monitor.
If the video monitor is connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack of
this unit, is the “HDMI OUT SEL” setting correct?
 Set the operation mode selector to FAMP and then press
CHDMI OUT repeatedly to set “HDMI OUT SEL” to
“OUT 1”.
E
Rotate VOLUME to adjust the volume.
Is Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD player connected correctly?
 Check the connection of the video monitor.
Is the input source setting of the video monitor correct?
 Check the setting of the input source of the video monitor.
Any other troubles?
troubles.
17 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Quick start guide
What do you want to do with this unit?
Using various input sources
Manually adjusting various parameters of
this unit
•
•
•
•
•
Basic operations of this unit
•
•
Setting the language of the GUI menu
Using your iPod with this unit
Assigning the input/output jacks on this unit
Enjoying the contents stored on your PC
Enjoying Internet radio programs and Podcasts
Using USB devices with this unit
•
•
•
Setting the parameters for each input source
Setting the parameters related to the volume level
Using various sound features
Adjusting the tonal quality of each channel manually by using
•
•
•
•
Using various sound field programs
the parametric equalizer
•
•
•
Adjusting the audio and video synchronization
Muting the selected speaker channel
Setting the parameters related to the video signals
Adjusting the tonal quality of the speakers
Customizing the sound field programs
Additional features
•
•
•
•
Setting the basic speaker configuration
Setting the network parameters
•
•
Setting the remote control
Displaying the current input source signal information in the
Setting the parameters of the multi-zone feature
Protecting the various settings
GUI
•
Saving and recalling the system settings of this unit
(System Memory)
Adjusting the advanced parameters
•
•
•
Controlling this unit using a Web browser
Using headphones
•
Setting the speaker impedance of the connected speakers
Setting the video format of the connected video monitor
Using this unit in multiple rooms simultaneously
(multi-zone configuration)
•
•
Setting the language of the GUI menu
•
Automatically turning off this unit
•
Setting the parameters of this unit to default values
18 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation
Connections ......................................................................................... 20
Connecting speakers .......................................................................................................... 23
Using subwoofers .............................................................................................................. 25
Connecting the speaker cable ............................................................................................ 27
Connecting a TV monitor or projector .............................................................................. 30
Connecting other components ........................................................................................... 31
Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel .............................................................. 38
Setting the speaker impedance and language .................................................................... 39
Turning this unit on and off ............................................................................................... 39
Front panel display ............................................................................................................ 40
Before starting the automatic setup ................................................................................... 42
Using the basic automatic setup ........................................................................................ 44
Using advanced automatic setup ....................................................................................... 46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Connections
Rear panel
1
2
3
4
5
6
NETWORK
USB
HDMI
IN1
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
IN2
IN3
CBL/SAT
IN4
OUT
VIDEO IN
1
OUT
2
DVD
DVD
DVR
RS-232C
COMPONENT VIDEO
BD/
HD DVD
A
VIDEBOD/OHDUT
ZONE OUT
S VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
DOCK
DIGITAL OUT
Y
P
B
P
R
MONITOR
OUT
+
+
DVD
DTV
CBL/SAT
DVR
VCR
DVR
VCR
5
Y
P
B
PR
1
1
2
3
3
4
5
5
4
R
L
REAR
REAR
PRESENCE
/ZONE
PRESENCE
/ZONE
ZONE
COAXIAL
CD-R
DVD
B
FRONT
FRONT
VIDEO
2
CBL/SAT
C
PRESENCE
/ZONE
PRESENCE
/ZONE
AUDIO IN
CBL/SAT
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN
MD/TAPE CD
MD/TAPE
DVD
DVD
DTV
DVR
VCR
DVR
CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD-R
TUNER
PHONO
4
4
5
VCR
L
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
3
4
5
6
L
DVR
D
R
SURROUND
(SINGLE)
SURROUND
R
L
1
2
CBL/SAT
DVR
FRONT (6CH)
CENTER
(FRONT)
(SINGLE)
L
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
REMOTE
R
R
OPTICAL
CD
IN
1
(REAR)
FRONT
FRONT
/ZONE
B
SB (8CH)
MULTI CH INPUT
SURROUND SUBWOOFER ZONE
2
ZONE
ZONE OUT
3
ZONE
4
FRONT
SURROUND
CENTER
SUR. BACK
FRONT
/ZONE
B
GND
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
PRESENCE
AC OUTLET
EXTRA SP
EXTRA SP
OUT
BD/
HD DVD
FRONT
A
FRONT
A
IN
2
AC IN
DVD
7
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
P
B
PR
OUT
1
CENTER
DTV
MONITOR
OUT
8
COAXIAL
DIGITAL IN
2
7
8
9
0
A
B
C
1
2 RS-232C terminal
This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation. Consult
your dealer for details.
Name
Page
1
3
Speaker terminals
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
Video component jacks
Zone video out jacks
DOCK terminal
28 – 33
28 – 33
114
4
5
6
7
USB port
37
NETWORK port
HDMI jacks
TRIGGER OUT jack
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
36
8
9
0
COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks
AC OUTLET(S)
30
38
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(Asia and General models only)
A
MULTI CH INPUT jacks
ZONE OUT jacks
PRE OUT jacks
35
B
C
AC IN
38
Audio component jacks
Digital audio jacks
ZONE DIGITAL OUT jack
31
20 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Placing speakers
The speaker layout below shows the speaker setting we recommend. You can use it to enjoy the CINEMA DSP and multi-channel audio
sources.
■ 11.2/11.1 -channel speaker layout
11.2/11.1-channel speaker layout is highly recommended for playback the sound of high definition audio formats (Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD
Master Audio, etc.) as well as the conventional audio sources with sound field programs. See page 23 for connection information.
FPL
FPR
C
FPR
FR
FL
FR
30˚
FPL
FL
SL
SL
SR
SR
60˚
RSW
RPL
80˚
SBL
SBR
RPL
RPR
SR
30 cm (12 in) or more
RPR
C
Speaker indications
FL/FR: Front left/right
C: Center
SBR
LSW
SL/SR: Surround left/right
SBL/SBR: Surround back left/right
FPL/FPR: Front presence left/right
RPL/RPR: Rear presence left/right
LSW/RSW: Left/right subwoofer
SL
SBL
Front left and right speakers
The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from the ideal listening position.
The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same.
Center speaker
The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can
do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system.
Surround left and right speakers
The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds.
Surround back left and right speakers
The surround back speakers supplement the surround speakers and provide more realistic front-to-back transitions.
Front and rear presence left and right speakers
See page 26 for details.
Left and right subwoofers
See page 25 for details.
Using di-pole speakers
FL
FR
C
It is recommended that you use di-pole speakers for surround left
and right channels for the accurate playback with the THX
surround modes. When you use di-pole speakers, place the
surround and surround back speakers as below. Set the distance
between surround back speakers rather narrow compared with the
conventional speaker layout.
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
: Di-pole speaker
: Direction of the di-pole speaker phase
21 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
■ 7.2/7.1 (or 6.2/6.1) -channel speaker layout
See page 23 for connection information.
■ 5.2/5.1 -channel speaker layout
See page 23 for connection information.
FR
FR
RSW
RSW
FL
SR
FL
C
C
SR
SL
LSW
LSW
SBR
SL
SBL
Speaker indications
Speaker indications
C
C
FL
FR
FL
FR
FL/FR: Front left/right
C: Center
FL/FR: Front left/right
C: Center
30˚
30˚
SL/SR: Surround left/right
SBL/SBR: Surround back
left/right
SL/SR: Surround left/right
LSW/RSW: Left/right subwoofer
SL
SL
SR
SR
SL
SL
SR
SR
60˚
60˚
80˚
80˚
LSW/RSW: Left/right subwoofer
SBL
SBR
30 cm (12 in) or more
Front left and right speakers
Center speaker
Front left and right speakers
Center speaker
Surround left and right speakers
The functions and settings of each speaker are the same as those for
the 11.2/11.1-channel speaker layout (see page 21).
Subwoofer
The functions and settings of each speaker are the same as those for
the 11.2/11.1-channel speaker layout (see page 21).
Surround back left and right speakers
Surround left and right speakers
The surround back speakers supplement the surround speakers and
provide more realistic front-to-back transitions.
Connect the surround speakers to the SURROUND speaker
terminals even if you place the surround speakers behind the
listening position. For the smooth and unbroken sound field behind
the listening position, place the surround left and right speakers
farther back compared with the placement in the 11.2/11.1-channel
speaker layout. The surround back channel signals are directed to
the surround left and right speakers when “Surround Back” is set to
If you use a single surround back speaker, connect the single
surround back speaker to the SUR.BACK/BI-AMP (SINGLE)
speaker terminal and place the speaker behind the listening position.
The surround back left and right channel signals are mixed down
and output at the single surround back speaker when you set
“Surround Back” to “Small x1” or “Large x1” (see page 84).
Subwoofer
Subwoofer
See page 25 for details.
y
surround back speakers.
For other speaker combinations
You can enjoy multi-channel sources with sound field programs by using a speaker combination other than the speaker combinations
shown above.
Use the automatic setup feature (see page 42) or set the “Speaker Set” parameters in “Manual Setup” (see page 84) to output the surround
sounds at the connected speakers.
22 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Connecting speakers
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red line) and “–” (white line) properly. If the connections are faulty, this unit
cannot reproduce the input sources accurately.
Caution
•
•
Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is turned off (see page 39).
Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/
or speakers.
•
•
Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speaker still creates interference with the monitor, place the speakers away from the
monitor.
If you are to use 6-ohm speakers, be sure to set “SPEAKER IMP.” to “6ΩMIN” before using this unit (see page 39).
Notes
• A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge.
Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red line) terminals on this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–” (white line)
terminals.
• You can use the REAR ZONE/PRESENCE, FRONT ZONE/PRESENCE, and/or EXTRA SP speaker terminals for the Zone 2, Zone 3, and/or Zone 4
speakers (see page 116). You can also use all speaker terminals on this unit for the Zone 2, Zone 3, and/or Zone 4 speakers (see page 120).
■ For the 11.2/11.1 (or 9.2/9.1) -channel speaker setting
Right front
presence
speaker
Right rear
presence
speaker
Left rear
presence
speaker
Left front
presence
speaker
FRONT B speakers
NETWORK
USB
HDMI
IN1
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
IN2
IN3
IN4
OUT
VIDEO IN
1
OUT
2
DVD
DVD
CBL/SAT
ZONE OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
PB
DVR
RS-232C
COMPONENT VIDEO
BD/
HD DVD
A
VIDEBODO/HDUT
S VIDEO
VIDEO
DOCK
DIGITAL OUT
Y
PB
PR
MONITOR
OUT
+
+
DVD
DTV
CBL/SAT
DVR
VCR
DVR
VCR
5
Y
PR
1
1
2
3
3
4
5
5
4
R
L
REAR
REAR
PRESENCE
/ZONE
PRESENCE
/ZONE
ZONE
COAXIAL
CD-R
DVD
B
FRONT
FRONT
VIDEO
2
OPTICAL
MD/TAPE
CBL/SAT
C
PRESENCE
/ZONE
PRESENCE
/ZONE
AUDIO IN
CBL/SAT
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN
MD/TAPE CD
DVD
DTV
DVR
VCR
DVR
CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD-R
TUNER
PHONO
4
4
5
VCR
L
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
3
4
5
6
L
DVR
D
DVD
R
SURROUND
(SINGLE)
SURROUND
R
L
1
2
CBL/SAT
DVR
FRONT (6CH)
CENTER
(FRONT)
(SINGLE)
SUR. BACK
AC IN
+12v
15mA MAX.
L
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
REMOTE
R
R
OPTICAL
CD
IN
1
(REAR)
FRONT
REAR
FRONT
/ZONE
B
SB (8CH)
SURROUND SUBWOOFER ZONE
MULTI CH INPUT
AC OUTLET
2
ZONE
ZONE OUT
3
ZONE
4
FRONT
SURROUND
CENTER
FRONT
/ZONE
B
GND
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
PRESENCE
PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
EXTRA SP
OUT
BD/
HD DVD
FRONT
A
FRONT
A
IN
2
DVD
7
COMPONENT VIDEO
PB PR
Y
OUT
1
CENTER
DTV
MONITOR
OUT
8
COAXIAL
DIGITAL IN
2
Center speaker
Surround right Surround back
speaker right speaker
Front right
speaker
Front left
speaker
Surround back
left speaker
Surround left
speaker
23 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
■ For the 7.2/7.1 (or 6.2/6.1) -channel speaker setting
FRONT B speakers
+
+
TRIGGER
L
OUT
DVR
D
DVD
CBL/SAT
DVR
R
SURROUND
(SINGLE)
SURROUND
2
3
4
5
6
7
R
L
1
2
FRONT (6CH)
CENTER
(FRONT)
(SINGLE)
SUR. BACK
AC IN
+12v
15mA MAX.
L
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
REMOTE
R
R
OPTICAL
CD
IN
1
(REAR)
FRONT
REAR
FRONT
/ZONE
B
SB (8CH)
MULTI CH INPUT
SURROUND SUBWOOFER ZONE
2
ZONE
ZONE OUT
3
ZONE
4
FRONT
SURROUND
CENTER
FRONT
/ZONE
B
GND
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
PRESENCE
PRESENCE
AC OUTLET
EXTRA SP
EXTRA SP
OUT
BD/
HD DVD
FRONT
A
FRONT
A
IN
2
DVD
COMPONENT VIDEO
PB PR
Y
OUT
1
CENTER
DTV
MONITOR
OUT
8
COAXIAL
DIGITAL IN
2
Center speaker
Surround right
speaker
Surround back
right speaker
Front right
speaker
Front left
speaker
Surround back
left speaker *
Surround left
speaker
* If you use a single surround back speaker, connect the speaker to the SUR.BACK/BI-AMP (SINGLE) speaker terminal.
■ For the 5.2/5.1 -channel speaker setting
FRONT B speakers
+
+
L
OUT
DVR
D
DVD
CBL/SAT
DVR
R
SURROUND
(SINGLE)
SURROUND
2
3
4
5
6
7
R
L
1
2
FRONT (6CH)
CENTER
(FRONT)
(SINGLE)
SUR. BACK
AC IN
+12v
15mA MAX.
L
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
REMOTE
R
R
OPTICAL
CD
IN
1
(REAR)
FRONT
REAR
FRONT
/ZONE
B
SB (8CH)
MULTI CH INPUT
SURROUND SUBWOOFER ZONE
2
ZONE
ZONE OUT
3
ZONE
4
FRONT
SURROUND
CENTER
FRONT
/ZONE
B
GND
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
PRESENCE
PRESENCE
AC OUTLET
EXTRA SP
EXTRA SP
OUT
BD/
HD DVD
FRONT
A
FRONT
A
IN
2
DVD
COMPONENT VIDEO
PB PR
Y
OUT
1
CENTER
DTV
MONITOR
OUT
8
COAXIAL
DIGITAL IN
2
Center speaker
Surround right
speaker
Front right
speaker
Front left
speaker
Surround left
speaker
24 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Using subwoofers
The use of subwoofers with built-in amplifiers, such as the Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only for
reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for reproducing the high fidelity sound of the LFE (low-frequency effect)
channel included in digital audio signals. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections.
You can use one or two subwoofers and select various positions of the subwoofers.
■ Configuration 1:
Front left and right
Set “Configuration” in “Subwoofer” to
■ Configuration 2:
Front and rear
Set “Configuration” in “Subwoofer” to
“Front & Rear” (see page 85).
■ Configuration 3:
A single subwoofer
Set “Configuration” in “Subwoofer” to
C
C
C
FL
FR
FL
FR
FL
FR
LSW
RSW
FSW
SW
SL
SR
SL
SR
SL
SR
RSW
SBR
SBL
SBR
SBL
SBL
SBR
Speaker indications
Speaker indications
Speaker indications
FL/FR: Front left/right
C: Center
FL/FR: Front left/right
C: Center
FL/FR: Front left/right
C: Center
SL/SR: Surround left/right
SL/SR: Surround left/right
SL/SR: Surround left/right
SBL/SBR: Surround back left/right
LSW/RSW: Left/right subwoofer
SBL/SBR: Surround back left/right
FSW/RSW: Front/rear subwoofer
SBL/SBR: Surround back left/right
SW: Subwoofer
■ Connecting subwoofers
Left (or front) subwoofer
y
If you connect a single subwoofer, connect the subwoofer to the left
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jacks.
DVD
R
SURROUND
2
CBL/SAT
(FRONT)
(SINGLE)
SUR. BACK
AC IN
3
4
5
6
7
(SINGLE)
L
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
DVR
R
OPTICAL
CD
(REAR)
FRONT
REAR
CENTER
FRONT
/ZONE
B
GND
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
PRESENCE
PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
BD/
HD DVD
FRONT
A
DVD
DTV
8
COAXIAL
DIGITAL IN
Right (or rear) subwoofer
25 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Using presence speakers
The presence speakers supplement the sound from the front and surround back speakers with extra ambient effects produced by the sound
field programs (see page 54). Presence speakers function more effectively when the CINEMA DSP HD³ mode is active (see page 60). You
Note
If “Front Presence” is set to “None”, the rear presence speakers also do not function and you cannot activate the CINEMA DSP HD³ mode.
Front presence speakers
0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft)
0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft)
Speaker indications
FL: Front left
FR: Front right
C: Center
FPL
FPR
FPL: Front presence left
FPR: Front presence right
1.8 m
(6 ft) or
higher
1.8 m
(6 ft) or
higher
FL
FR
C
*
Rear presence speakers
RPR
Speaker indications
RPL
SL: Surround left
SR: Surround right
1.8 m
(6 ft) or
higher
1.8 m
(6 ft) or
higher
SBL: Surround back left
SBR: Surround back right
RPL: Rear presence left
RPR: Rear presence right
SR
SL
SBR
SBL
*
* Place the rear presence left and right speakers so that the distance between the rear presence left and right speakers is same as the distance between front
presence left and right speakers.
26 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
■ Connecting the banana plug
Connecting the speaker cable
(China and General models only)
Tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug
connector into the end of the corresponding terminal.
1
Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) of insulation
from the end of each speaker cable and then twist the
exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short
circuits.
banana plug
10 mm (0.4 in)
Red line: positive (+)
White line: negative (–)
2
Loosen the knob.
■ Using bi-amplification connections
Caution
Remove the shorting bars or bridges of your speakers to separate
the LPF (low pass filter) and HPF (high pass filter) crossovers.
This unit allows you to make bi-amplification connections to one
speaker system. Check if your speakers support bi-amplification.
To make the bi-amplification connections, use the FRONT A and
SUR.BACK/BI-AMP terminals as shown below. To activate the bi-
amplification connections, set “BI-AMP” to “ON” in “Advanced
Red line: positive (+)
White line: negative (–)
3
Insert one bare wire into the hole on the side of each
terminal.
This unit
L
+
+
R
(SINGLE)
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
4
Tighten the knob to secure the wire.
B
B
FRONT B/
ZONE
FRONT B/
ZONE
EXTRA SP
EXTRA SP
FRONT B/
A
A
FRONT
A
FRONT
A
Right
Left
Front speakers
Note
When you make the conventional connection, make sure that the shorting
bars are put into the terminals of the speakers appropriately. Refer to the
instruction manuals of the speakers for details.
27 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Information on jacks and cable plugs
Video jacks and cable plugs
Audio jacks and cable plugs
COMPONENT VIDEO
PB PR
DIGITAL
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
OPTICAL
AUDIO
VIDEO
S VIDEO
Y
L
R
(White)
(Red)
(Orange)
(Yellow)
(Green) (Blue) (Red)
S
O
V
PB
PR
Y
L
R
C
Optical digital
audio cable plug
Left and right analog
audio cable plugs
Coaxial digital
audio cable plug
Composite video
cable plug
Component video
cable plugs
S-video cable
plug
■ Audio jacks
■ Video jacks
This unit has three types of audio jacks. Connection depends on the
This unit has three types of video jacks. Connect the video input
jacks on this unit to the video output jacks of the input source
components to switch the audio and video sources simultaneously.
Connection depends on the availability of input jacks on your video
monitor.
availability of audio jacks on your other components.
AUDIO jacks
For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left and right
analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white
plugs to the left jacks.
VIDEO jacks
For conventional composite video signals transmitted via composite
video cables.
DIGITAL COAXIAL jacks
For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital audio cables.
S VIDEO jacks
DIGITAL OPTICAL jacks
For S-video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and
chrominance (C) video signals transmitted on separate wires of S-
video cables.
For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital audio cables.
Note
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS
bitstreams. When you connect components to both the COAXIAL and
OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the signals input at the COAXIAL jack.
All digital input jacks are compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital signals.
For component video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and
chrominance (PB, PR) video signals transmitted on separate wires of
component video cables.
y
This unit is equipped with the video conversion function. See pages 29 and
89 for details.
Information on HDMI™
for the HDMI connection.
• When you set “Standby Through” in “Manual Setup” to “On”, this unit
allows the HDMI signals input at an HDMI IN jack to pass through this
■ HDMI jack and cable plug
This unit has five HDMI input jacks and two HDMI output jacks for
digital audio and video signal input/output.
HDMI
Notes
• Do not disconnect or connect the cable or turn off the power of the HDMI
components connected to the HDMI OUT jacks on this unit while data is
being transferred. Doing so may disrupt playback or cause noise.
• The HDMI OUT jacks output the audio signals input at the HDMI input
• If you turn off the power of the video monitor connected to the HDMI
OUT jacks via a DVI connection, this unit may fail to establish the
connection to the component.
• The analog video signals input at the composite video, S-video and
component video jacks can be digitally up-converted to be output at the
HDMI OUT jacks. Set “Conversion” to “On” in “Manual Setup” (see
page 89) to activate this feature.
HDMI cable plug
y
• We recommend that you use a commercially available HDMI cable shorter
than 5 meters (16 feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it.
• Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack ↔ DVI-D jack) to connect this unit to
other DVI components.
• This unit is equipped with two HDMI OUT jacks, however cannot output
the video signals to the both HDMI OUT jacks simultaneously. You can
28 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Audio and video signal flow
■ Audio signal flow
■ Video signal flow
Input
Output
Input
Output
HDMI
HDMI
DIGITAL AUDIO
(COAXIAL)
COMPONENT
VIDEO
DIGITAL AUDIO
(OPTICAL)
S VIDEO
AUDIO
VIDEO
Through
Notes
• 2-channel as well as multi-channel PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS signals
input at the HDMI input jacks can be output at the HDMI OUT jacks only
when “Support Audio” is set to “Other” (see page 94).
y
• The following types of audio signals can be only input at HDMI input
You can deinterlace and convert the resolution of the video signals by using
jacks:
– DSD
– Dolby TrueHD
– Dolby Digital Plus
– DTS-HD Master Audio
– DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
Notes
• When the analog video signals are input at the COMPONENT VIDEO, S
VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, the priority order of the input signals is as
follows:
1. COMPONENT VIDEO
2. S VIDEO
3. VIDEO
• This unit is equipped with the two COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR
OUT jacks and HDMI OUT jacks. The COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT 1 and 2 outputs the same video signals and you can use
both COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks simultaneously.
• Digital video signals input at the HDMI input jacks cannot be output from
analog video output jacks.
• The analog component video signals (with 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) of
resolution only) are converted to the S-video or composite video signals
and output at the VIDEO or S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks.
• The GUI signal is not output at the DVR OUT and
VCR OUT jacks and is not recorded.
29 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Connecting a TV monitor or projector
Connect your TV (or projector) to one of the HDMI OUT jacks, the
COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks, the S VIDEO
MONITOR OUT jack or the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this
unit.
Notes
• This unit is equipped with two HDMI OUT jacks, however cannot output
the video signals to the both HDMI OUT jacks simultaneously. You can
select the active HDMI OUT jack. Set the operation mode selector to
FAMP and then press CHDMI OUT repeatedly.
• If you connect a video monitor or projector to one of the HDMI OUT jack,
connect the component to the HDMI OUT 1 jack.
Make sure that this unit and other components
are unplugged from the AC wall outlets.
• Some video monitors connected to this unit via a DVI connection fail to
recognize the HDMI audio/video signals being input if they are in the
standby mode. In this case, the HDMI indicator flashes irregularly.
• The GUI menu is not overlaid on the input video image depending on the
input video signal format and the setting of the parameters in “Wall Paper”
(see page 91). In this case, the GUI menu appears with the wall paper or
gray background.
• If the connected video monitor is compatible with the automatic audio and
video synchronization feature (automatic lip sync feature), this unit adjusts
monitor to the HDMI OUT jacks on this unit to use the feature.
y
You can select to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on another
HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jacks on the rear panel of
this unit. Use the “Support Audio” parameter in “Option” to select the
Component video in
Projector
HDMI in
Y
PB
PR
NETWORK
USB
HDMI
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
OUT
VIDEO IN
1
OUT
2
DVD
DVD
CBL/SAT
ZONE OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
PB
DVR
RS-232C
COMPONENT VIDEO
BD/
HD DVD
A
VIDEBOD/OHDUT
S VIDEO
VIDEO
DOCK
DIGITAL OUT
Y
PB
PR
MONITOR
OUT
+
+
DVD
DTV
CBL/SAT
DVR
VCR
DVR
VCR
5
Y
PR
1
2
3
3
4
5
5
4
R
L
REAR
REAR
PRESENCE
/ZONE
PRESENCE
/ZONE
ZONE
COAXIAL
CD-R
DVD
B
FRONT
FRONT
VIDEO
2
OPTICAL
MD/TAPE
CBL/SAT
C
PRESENCE
/ZONE
PRESENCE
/ZONE
AUDIO IN
CBL/SAT
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN
MD/TAPE CD
DVD
DTV
DVR
VCR
DVR
CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD-R
TUNER
PHONO
1
4
4
5
VCR
L
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
3
4
5
6
L
DVR
D
DVD
R
SURROUND
(SINGLE)
SURROUND
R
L
1
2
CBL/SAT
DVR
FRONT (6CH)
CENTER
(FRONT)
(SINGLE)
SUR. BACK
AC IN
+12v
15mA MAX.
L
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
REMOTE
R
R
OPTICAL
CD
IN
1
(REAR)
FRONT
REAR
FRONT
/ZONE
B
SB (8CH)
SURROUND SUBWOOFER ZONE
MULTI CH INPUT
AC OUTLET
2
ZONE
ZONE OUT
3
ZONE
4
FRONT
SURROUND
CENTER
FRONT
/ZONE
B
GND
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
PRESENCE
PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
EXTRA SP
OUT
BD/
HD DVD
FRONT
A
FRONT
A
IN
2
DVD
7
COMPONENT VIDEO
PB PR
Y
OUT
1
CENTER
DTV
MONITOR
OUT
8
COAXIAL
DIGITAL IN
2
S
V
Y
PB
PR
HDMI in
Video in
Component video in
S-video in
TV
indicates recommended connections
indicates alternative connections
30 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Connecting other components
signals are output only at the MONITOR OUT jacks. When recording a
source, you must make the same type of video connections between each
component.
Make sure that this unit and other components
are unplugged from the AC wall outlets.
• To make a digital connection to a component other than the default
component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or DIGITAL OUTPUT
jack, select the corresponding setting for “Optical Input”, “Optical
• If you connect your DVD player to both the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL)
and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jacks, priority is given to the
signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack.
Notes
example, if you connected your TV to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack
on this unit, connect your other components to the VIDEO jacks.
■ Connecting a Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD player
Connect your Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD player to the HDMI IN1 jack on this unit to perform the features of the Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD
completely.
Blu-ray Disc or
HD DVD player
Component out
Coaxial out
HDMI out
Y
PB
PR
C
NETWORK
USB
HDMI
IN1
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
IN2
IN3
IN4
OUT
VIDEO IN
1
OUT
2
DVD
DVD
CBL/SAT
DVR
RS-232C
COMPONENT VIDEO
BD/
HD DVD
A
VIDEBOD/OHDUT
ZONE OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
PB
S VIDEO
VIDEO
DOCK
DIGITAL OUT
Y
PB
PR
MONITOR
OUT
+
+
DVD
DTV
CBL/SAT
DVR
VCR
DVR
VCR
5
Y
PR
1
2
3
3
4
5
5
4
R
L
REAR
REAR
PRESENCE
/ZONE
PRESENCE
/ZONE
ZONE
COAXIAL
CD-R
DVD
B
FRONT
FRONT
VIDEO
2
OPTICAL
MD/TAPE
CBL/SAT
C
PRESENCE
/ZONE
PRESENCE
/ZONE
AUDIO IN
CBL/SAT
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN
MD/TAPE CD
DVD
DTV
DVR
VCR
DVR
CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD-R
TUNER
PHONO
1
L
4
4
5
VCR
L
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
3
4
5
6
DVR
D
DVD
R
SURROUND
(SINGLE)
SURROUND
R
1
2
CBL/SAT
DVR
FRONT (6CH)
CENTER
(FRONT)
(SINGLE)
SUR. BACK
AC IN
+12v
15mA MAX.
L
L
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
REMOTE
R
R
OPTICAL
CD
IN
1
(REAR)
FRONT
REAR
FRONT
/ZONE
B
SB (8CH)
SURROUND SUBWOOFER ZONE
MULTI CH INPUT
AC OUTLET
2
ZONE
ZONE OUT
3
ZONE
4
FRONT
SURROUND
CENTER
FRONT
/ZONE
B
GND
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
PRESENCE
PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
EXTRA SP
OUT
BD/
HD DVD
FRONT
A
FRONT
A
IN
2
DVD
7
COMPONENT VIDEO
PB PR
Y
OUT
1
CENTER
DTV
MONITOR
OUT
8
COAXIAL
DIGITAL IN
2
indicates recommended connections
indicates alternative connections
31 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
■ Connecting a DVD player
NETWORK
USB
HDMI
SPEAKERS
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
OUT
VIDEO IN
1
OUT
2
DVD
DVD
CBL/SAT
ZONE OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
PB
DVR
-232C
COMPONENT VIDEO
BD/
HD DVD
A
VIDEBODO/HDUT
S VIDEO
VIDEO
DOCK
DIGITAL OUT
Y
PB
PR
MONITOR
OUT
+
DVD
DTV
CBL/SAT
DVR
VCR
DVR
VCR
5
Y
PR
1
2
3
3
4
5
5
4
L
REAR
PRESENCE
/ZONE
ZONE
COAXIAL
CD-R
DVD
B
FRONT
VIDEO
2
OPTICAL
MD/TAPE
CBL/SAT
C
PRESENCE
/ZONE
AUDIO IN
CBL/SAT
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN
MD/TAPE CD
DVD
DTV
DVR
VCR
DVR
CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD-R
TUNER
PHONO
1
4
4
5
VCR
L
IGGER
OUT
1
2
3
4
5
6
L
DVR
D
DVD
R
SURROUND
(SINGLE)
R
L
CBL/SAT
DVR
FRONT (6CH)
CENTER
(FRONT)
(SINGLE)
SUR. BACK
AC IN
v
A
MAX.
L
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
MOTE
R
R
OPTICAL
CD
(REAR)
FRONT
REAR
SB (8CH)
SURROUND SUBWOOFER ZONE
MULTI CH INPUT
AC OUTLET
2
ZONE
ZONE OUT
3
ZONE
4
FRONT
SURROUND
CENTER
FRONT
/ZONE
B
GND
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
PRESENCE
PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
BD/
HD DVD
FRONT
A
DVD
7
COMPONENT VIDEO
PB PR
Y
1
DTV
MONITOR
OUT
8
COAXIAL
DIGITAL IN
2
O
S
Y
PB
PR
V
C
L
R
Optical out
Coaxial out
Audio out
Component out
DVD player
■ Connecting set-top boxes
Satellite receiver
or cable TV receiver
Component out
Optical out
Y
PB
PR
L
R
V
O
S
NETWORK
USB
HDMI
SPEAKERS
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
OUT
VIDEO IN
1
OUT
2
DVD
DVD
CBL/SAT
ZONE OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
PB
DVR
C
COMPONENT VIDEO
BD/
HD DVD
A
VIDEBOD/OHDUT
S VIDEO
VIDEO
DOCK
DIGITAL OUT
Y
PB
PR
MONITOR
OUT
+
DVD
DTV
CBL/SAT
DVR
VCR
DVR
VCR
5
Y
PR
1
2
3
3
4
5
5
4
L
REAR
PRESENCE
/ZONE
ZONE
COAXIAL
CD-R
DVD
B
FRONT
VIDEO
2
OPTICAL
MD/TAPE
CBL/SAT
C
PRESENCE
/ZONE
AUDIO IN
CBL/SAT
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN
MD/TAPE CD
DVD
DTV
DVR
VCR
DVR
CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD-R
TUNER
PHONO
1
4
4
5
VCR
L
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
L
DVR
D
DVD
R
SURROUND
(SINGLE)
R
L
CBL/SAT
DVR
FRONT (6CH)
CENTER
(FRONT)
(SINGLE)
SUR. BACK
AC IN
AX.
E
L
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
R
R
OPTICAL
CD
(REAR)
FRONT
REAR
SB (8CH)
SURROUND SUBWOOFER ZONE
MULTI CH INPUT
AC OUTLET
2
ZONE
ZONE OUT
3
ZONE
4
FRONT
SURROUND
CENTER
FRONT
/ZONE
B
GND
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
PRESENCE
PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
BD/
HD DVD
FRONT
A
DVD
7
COMPONENT VIDEO
PB PR
Y
1
DTV
MONITOR
OUT
8
COAXIAL
DIGITAL IN
2
S
V
C
L
R
S-video out
HDTV decoder
32 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
■ Connecting a DVD recorder
NETWORK
USB
HDMI
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
OUT
VIDEO IN
1
OUT
2
DVD
DVD
CBL/SAT
ZONE OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
PB
DVR
RS-232C
COMPONENT VIDEO
BD/
HD DVD
A
VIDEBODO/HDUT
S VIDEO
VIDEO
DOCK
DIGITAL OUT
Y
PB
PR
MONITOR
OUT
+
+
DVD
DTV
CBL/SAT
DVR
VCR
DVR
VCR
5
Y
PR
1
2
3
3
4
5
5
4
R
L
REAR
REAR
PRESENCE
/ZONE
PRESENCE
/ZONE
ZONE
COAXIAL
CD-R
DVD
B
FRONT
FRONT
VIDEO
2
OPTICAL
MD/TAPE
CBL/SAT
C
PRESENCE
/ZONE
PRESENCE
/ZONE
AUDIO IN
CBL/SAT
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN
MD/TAPE CD
DVD
DTV
DVR
VCR
DVR
CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD-R
TUNER
PHONO
1
4
4
5
VCR
L
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
3
4
5
6
L
DVR
D
DVD
R
SURROUND
(SINGLE)
SURROUND
R
L
1
2
CBL/SAT
DVR
FRONT (6CH)
CENTER
(FRONT)
(SINGLE)
SUR. BACK
AC IN
+12v
15mA MAX.
L
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
REMOTE
R
R
OPTICAL
CD
IN
1
(REAR)
FRONT
REAR
FRONT
/ZONE
B
SB (8CH)
MULTI CH INPUT
SURROUND SUBWOOFER ZONE
2
ZONE
ZONE OUT
3
ZONE
4
FRONT
SURROUND
CENTER
FRONT
/ZONE
B
GND
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
PRESENCE
PRESENCE
AC OUTLET
EXTRA SP
EXTRA SP
OUT
BD/
HD DVD
FRONT
A
FRONT
A
IN
2
DVD
7
COMPONENT VIDEO
PB PR
Y
OUT
1
CENTER
DTV
MONITOR
OUT
8
COAXIAL
DIGITAL IN
2
O
S
S
Y
PB
PR
V
V
L
R
L
R
S-video out
HDMI out
Optical out
Component out
DVD recorder
VCR
■ Connecting a VCR
Audio out
Video out
Audio in
Video in
L
R
L
R
V
V
S
S
TWORK
HDMI
IN1
IN2
IN3
CBL/SAT
OUT
VIDEO IN
1
OUT
2
DVD
DVD
VIDEBODO/HDUT
ZONE OUT
S VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
D
MONITOR
OUT
DVD
DTV
CBL/SAT
DVR
VCR
DVR
VCR
5
Y
PB
PR
1
1
2
3
3
4
5
5
4
VIDEO
2
AUDIO IN
CBL/SAT
AUDIO OUT
5
VCR CD-R
AUDIO IN
DVD
DTV
DVR
VCR
DVR
MD/TAPE
CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD
TUNER
4
4
L
R
L
FRONT (6CH)
CENTER
(FRONT)
(SINGLE)
indicates recommended connections
indicates alternative connections
33 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
■ Connecting audio components
Notes
• Connect your turntable to the GND terminal on this unit to reduce noise in the signal. However, you may hear less noise without the connection to the GND
terminal for some turntables.
• The PHONO jacks are only compatible with a turntable with an MM or a high-output MC cartridge. To connect a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge
to the PHONO jacks, use an in-line boosting transformer or an MC-head amplifier.
• When you connect both the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) jack and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack to an audio component, the priority is given to
the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack.
CD player
CD recorder
Tuner
Optical in
Audio out
Audio out
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
C
O
DVD
VIDEBODO/HDUT
ZONE OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
PB
VIDEO
DOCK
DIGITAL OUT
MONITOR
R
VCR
Y
PR
5
OUT
ZONE
COAXIAL
CD-R
OPTICAL
MD/TAPE
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN
CD
R
5
VCR
CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD-R
MD/TAPE
TUNER
PHONO
L
1
2
3
4
5
6
DVD
R
CBL/SAT
DVR
(FRONT)
(SINGLE)
SUR. BACK
AC IN
L
R
OPTICAL
CD
(REAR)
FRONT
REAR
E
4
FRONT
SURROUND
CENTER
GND
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
PRESENCE
PRESENCE
BD/
HD DVD
DVD
7
DTV
8
COAXIAL
DIGITAL IN
O
L
R
L
R
L
R
MD recorder or
tape deck
Turntable
indicates recommended connections
indicates alternative connections
34 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
■ Connecting external amplifiers
Notes
This unit has more than enough power for any home use. However,
if you want to use external amplifiers, connect the external
amplifiers to the PRE OUT jacks. Each PRE OUT jack outputs the
same channel signals as the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.
• When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT
digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs.
• The audio signals input at the CENTER and SUBWOOFER MULTI CH
INPUT jacks are mixed down to the left and right headphone channels.
• This unit redirects the audio signals input at the CENTER and/or
SUBWOOFER MULTI CH INPUT jacks to the front left and right speaker
channels when you set “Center” and/or “Configuration” in “Speaker Set”
channel speaker system before using this feature.
y
Use the external amplifiers in the following cases:
– when you want to add more power to the speaker output
– when you want to use another amplifier for your presence of sounds
– when you want to enjoy the 11.2-channel surround sound in the main
zone with activating the other zones (see page 111)
Pre-amplifier mode
For 6-channel input
If you want use the external amplifiers for the all channels in the
main zone, set “PREAMP MODE” to “ON” in the advanced
the power consumption is reduced.
FRONT (6CH)
CENTER
L
R
SB (8CH)
SURROUND SUBWOOFER
MULTI CH INPUT
1
2
3
4
5
6
L
R
L
R
(FRONT)
(SINGLE)
L
R
(REAR)
FRONT
REAR
FRONT
SURROUND
CENTER
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
PRESENCE
PRESENCE
Multi-format player/
External decoder
PRE OUT
7
For 8-channel input
PRE OUT jack
Output audio channel
Front left/right
L
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
FRONT
*
R
Surround left/right
SURROUND
SUBWOOFER
SUR.BACK
FRONT (6CH)
CENTER
Surround back left/right *
Front presence left/right
Rear presence left/right
Center
L
R
FRONT PRESENCE
REAR PRESENCE
CENTER
SB (8CH)
MULTI CH INPUT
SURROUND SUBWOOFER
L
R
L
R
L
R
Note
* When you only connect one external amplifier for the surround back
channel, connect it to the SINGLE jack.
■ Connecting a multi-format player or an external
decoder
Multi-format player/
External decoder
This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right
FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and
SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-
format player, external decoder, sound processor or pre-amplifier.
If you set “Input Channels” to “8ch” in “Multi CH Assign” (see
page 83), you can use the input jacks assigned as “Front Input” in
INPUT jacks to input 8-channel signals.
Note
* The analog audio input jacks assigned as “Front Input” in “Multi CH
Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external
decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left
and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and
surround channels.
35 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
■ Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock
This unit is equipped with the DOCK terminal on the rear panel that
allows you to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the
YDS-10, sold separately) where you can station your iPod and
control playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control.
Connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold
separately) to the DOCK terminal on the rear panel of this unit
using its dedicated cable.
■ Using the TRIGGER OUT jacks
This unit can control the components (for example, the electric
screen, projector, etc.) corresponding to the selected input source
and activating/deactivating the desired zone. This unit sends the 12
V/15 mA direct electric current at the TRIGGER OUT jacks
according to the settings of “Trigger Output” in “Manual Setup”
and the trigger input jack (or control input jack) of the components
with the monaural analog mini cable as follows.
SPEAKERS
IN4
DVR
DOCK
DIGITAL OUT
+
L
TRIGGER
OUT
REAR
PRESENCE
/ZONE
ZONE
COAXIAL
CD-R
1
2
FRONT
OPTICAL
MD/TAPE
PRESENCE
/ZONE
TUNER
PHONO
L
1
2
3
4
5
6
DVD
R
SURROUND
(SINGLE)
CBL/SAT
DVR
*
L
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
R
OPTICAL
CD
REAR
FRONT
/ZONE
B
GND
CE
PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
BD/
HD DVD
Yamaha iPod universal dock
(such as the YDS-10,
sold separately)
Electric screen,
projector, etc.
■ Using REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
* You can connect another component to the TRIGGER OUT 2 jack
same as the TRIGGER OUT 1 jack.
When the components have the capability of the transmission of the
remote control signals, connect the REMOTE IN and REMOTE
OUT jacks to the remote control input and output jacks with the
monaural analog mini cable as follows.
Note
The function when you use this feature with the components may vary
depending on the components. Refer to the instruction manuals of the
connected components.
REMOTE
IN
1
OUT
IN
2
OUT
Remote
Remote
control in
control out
*
Controlled component
(CD or DVD player, etc.)
Infrared signal receiver
or controlling
component
* You can connect another set of infrared signal receiver and Yamaha
component to the REMOTE IN 2 and OUT 2 jacks same as the REMOTE
IN 1 and OUT 1 jacks.
36 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Connecting the network
To connect this unit to your network, plug one end of a network cable (CAT-5 or higher straight cable) into the NETWORK port on this unit,
and plug the other end into one of the LAN ports on your router that supports the DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server
function. The following diagram shows a connection example where this unit is connected to one of the LAN ports on a 4-port router. To
enjoy music files saved on your PC and Yamaha MCX-2000, access the Internet Radio, or control this unit by using your PC, each device
must be connected properly in the network.
Notes
• You must use an STP (shielded twisted pair) cable (commercially available) to connect a network hub or router and this unit.
• If the DHCP server function on your router is disabled, you need to configure the network settings manually (see page 92).
• Yamaha MCX-2000, MCX-A10 and MCX-C15 may not be for sale in same locations.
Internet
Yamaha MCX-2000
Yamaha MCX-C15
WAN
LAN
Yamaha MCX-A10
(with optional
speakers)
PC
Modem
Router
Network cable
NETWORK
Connecting the USB storage devices to the USB ports
This unit is equipped with both the front and rear USB ports. Connect the USB storage device (for example, a high capacity USB hard disk
drive) to the front or rear USB port on this unit. Set “USB Select” in “Input Select” to “Front” or “Rear” to select the active USB port (see
page 83). The initial setting of “USB Select” is “Front”. The initial setting of “USB Select” is “Front”.
(Front panel)
(Rear panel)
USB
T/
TONE CONTROL
USB
2
PUSH ENTER
L
HDMI IN
USB storage device
USB storage device or USB
portable audio player
Notes
• We do not guarantee the power supply and operation of all the connected USB devices.
37 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Connecting the power cable
Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front
panel
Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a game
console or a video camera to this unit.
■ Connecting the AC power cable
Plug the supplied AC power cable into the AC inlet (AC IN) after all
other connections are complete, and then plug the AC power cable
into an AC wall outlet.
Caution
Be sure to turn down the volume of this unit and other components
before making connections.
AC IN
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
ON
ON/OFF
OFF
INPUT
STRAIGHT
PROGRAM
MENU
VOLUME
SPEAKERS
ZONE
CONTROLS
AUDIO SELECT
A
B
ZONE ON/OFF
EFFECT
MULTI
ZONE
REC OUT/
ZONE
2
TONE CONTROL
USB
ZONE
2
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
PUSH ENTER
SILENT CINEMA
PHONES
S
VIDEO
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
OPTICAL
HDMI IN
YPAO
OPTIMIZER
MIC
VIDEO AUX
To the AC wall outlet
S VIDEO
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
OPTICAL
HDMI IN
■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)
U.K. model ............................................................ 1 outlet
Korea model .............................................................. None
Other models .........................................................2 outlets
S
V
O
L
R
Use these outlet(s) to supply power to any connected components.
Connect the power cable of your other components to these
outlet(s). Power to these outlet(s) is supplied when this unit is
turned on. However, power to these outlet(s) is cut off when this
unit is turned off. For information on the maximum power or the
total power consumption of the components that can be connected
to these outlet(s), see “Specifications” on page 138.
Game console or
video camera
Recommended
Alternative
38 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Setting the speaker impedance and
language
B
Press MASTER ON/OFF to release it outward to
7
the OFF position to save the new setting and turn off
this unit.
The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this
unit.
Caution
If you are to use 6-ohm speakers, set “SPEAKER IMP.” to
“6ΩMIN” as follows BEFORE using this unit.
Before using this unit, set the speaker impedance of the connected
speakers and the language of the menu items and messages.
Turning this unit on and off
■ Turning on this unit
1
2
Make sure this unit is turned off.
B
Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel inward to
the ON position to turn on this unit.
I
Press and hold PROGRAM on the front panel and
B
When you turn on this unit by pressing MASTER ON/OFF, the
B
then press MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON
main zone is turned on.
position to turn on this unit.
Press and hold IPROGRAM until “ADVANCED SETUP”
appears in the front panel display.
Note
After this unit is turned on, it takes approximately 20 seconds until this unit
produces sounds, and while “Please wait” appears in the front panel display,
this unit does not accepts the front panel operations and stores the remote
control operations. This unit performs the stored remote control operations
after “Please wait” disappears.
While holding
PROGRAM
down
MASTER
PUSH ENTER
■ Turning off this unit
B
Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel again to
release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit.
ADVANCED SETUP
Notes
A
D
B
E
MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel as well as POWER and
STANDBY on the remote control are operational only when
MASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward to the ON position.
•
I
Rotate PROGRAM to select “SPEAKER IMP.”.
3
4
• Basically, we recommend that you use the standby mode to turn off this
unit.
I
Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “8ΩMIN” or
“6ΩMIN”.
■ Set the main zone to the standby mode
I
Rotate PROGRAM to select “LANGUAGE”.
5
6
A
D
Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or STANDBY) to set
the main zone to the standby mode.
In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in
order to receive infrared signals from the remote control.
I
Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select the desired
language setting.
Choices: ENGLISH (English), JAPANESE (Japanese),
FRENCH (French), GERMAN (German), SPANISH
(Spanish), RUSSIAN (Russian)
■ Turning on the main zone from the standby
mode
A
E
Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or POWER) to turn on
Notes
the main zone.
for details.
• Some languages are not displayed in the front panel display or Zone OSD.
y
• When you turn on this unit, there will be a delay for a few seconds before
this unit can reproduce sound.
• These buttons are operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is pressed
Front panel
display
LANGUAGE
GUI menu
Zone OSD
B
inward to the ON position.
RUSSIAN
—
—
If there are some problems...
JAPANESE
Other languages
—
•
•
First, turn off and then turn on this unit again.
If problems persist, initialize the parameters of this unit. See
··· The selected language is displayed.
— ··· The selected language is not displayed. The menu items and
messages are displayed in English.
39 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Front panel display
1
2
3
4
5
6
NET V-AUX
USB DOCK
CBL
SAT
BD
MD
RECOUT
AAC
VCR
DVR
DTV DVD
CD-R CD PHONO MULTI CH TUNER
SLEEP
HD DVD
TAPE
F
R
96
24
HD
t
qTRUE HD
q
qPL x
DIGITAL PLUS
EX MMAATSRTIEXR ADUISDCIROETE
dB
VOLUME
DSD
PCM
MP3
q
LFE
L
C
R
SR
3
PRE AMP
HD
ZONE2
ZONE3
ZONE4
FPR SL
SILENT SP
VYIPRTAUOALENHANCER
A B
RPR SBL SB SBR
WMA
CINEMA
7
8 9
0
SLEEP
H
I
96
24
HD
t
DIGITAL PLUS
qTRUE HD
A
q
qPL x
dB
VOLUME
q
EX MMAATSRTIEXR ADIUSDCIROETE
B
3
F
G
PRE AMP
HD
LFE
L
C
R
SR
ZONE2
C
D
E
VYIPRTAUOALENHANCER
SILENT
FPR SL
J
ZONE3
K
CINEMA
RPR SBL SB SBR
ZONE4
1 RECOUT indicator
8 SP A B indicators
Lights up when this unit is in the recording input source selecting
Lights up according to the set of front speakers activated (see
SP A: The FRONT A speakers are activated.
SP B: The FRONT B speakers are activated.
SP A B: The FRONT A and B speakers are activated.
2 HDMI indicator
Lights up when the signal of the selected input source is input at one
of the HDMI input jacks (see page 28).
9 Headphones indicator
HDMI indicator also lights up when “Standby Through” is set to
“On” and this unit is in the standby mode (see page 94).
3 Front/rear USB port indicator
Lights up according to the setting of “USB Select” (see page 83).
F: Front USB port is selected.
0 Multi-information display
Shows the name of the current sound field program and other
information when adjusting or changing settings.
R: Rear USB port is selected.
A Decoder indicators
4 Battery charge indicator
Lights up when this unit charges the battery of the stationed iPod in
The respective indicator lights up when any of the decoders of this
unit function.
B DSP indicators
5 Input source indicators
The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently selected
input source.
The respective indicator lights up when any of the sound field
programs are selected.
CINEMA DSP HD indicator
Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound
Note
NET indicator also lights up when “NET STANDBY” in “Advanced setup”
HD³ indicator
Lights up when the CINEMA DSP HD³ mode is active (see
6 Sound field indicators
Light up to indicate the active sound fields (see page 54).
C VIRTUAL indicator
Lights up when the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode is active (see
7 Input signal indicators
The respective indicator lights up when this unit is reproducing
DSD (Direct Stream Digital), PCM (Pulse Code Modulation),
WMA (Windows Media Audio), MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3), or
AAC (MPEG-4 AAC) audio signals.
40 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
D YPAO indicator
Lights up when you run “Auto Setup” and when the speaker
settings set in “Auto Setup” are used without any modifications (see
E ENHANCER indicator
Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is selected
F PRE AMP indicator
Lights up when this unit is in the pre-amplifier mode (see
page 120).
G SILENT CINEMA indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound field
H SLEEP indicator
Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 52).
I VOLUME level indicator
Indicates the current volume level.
y
When the audio output is muted, the VOLUME level indicator flashes (see
J Input channel and speaker indicators
Input channel indicators
LFE L C R
FPR SL
SR
Presence speaker indicators
RPR SBL SB SBR
Input channel indicators
• Indicate the channel components of the current digital input
signal.
• Light up or flash according to the settings of the speakers
the speaker level setting procedure in the “Speaker Level”
Presence speaker indicators
Light up according to setting for “Front Presence” and “Rear
procedure in the “Speaker Level” (see page 86).
y
You can make settings for the presence and surround back speakers
adjusting settings for “Front Presence”, “Rear Presence” (see page 84),
K ZONE2/ZONE3/ZONE4 indicators
Lights up when Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4 is turned on
41 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)
This unit employs the YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) technology which lets you avoid troublesome listening-based
speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments automatically. The supplied optimizer microphone collects and this unit
analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening environment.
This unit is equipped with various automatic setup features. You can
Before starting the automatic setup
select the automatic setup features according to your preference.
Make sure of the following check points before starting the
automatic setup operations.
Quick automatic setup
❏
❏
❏
❏
Speakers are connected appropriately.
Headphones are disconnected from this unit.
This unit is turned on.
The connected subwoofer is turned on and the volume
level is set to about half way (or slightly less).
The crossover frequency controls of the connected
subwoofer is set to the maximum.
Use this feature to carry out the automatic setup quickly. You
can optimize the basic parameters of the sound in the listening
room automatically.
❏
CROSSOVER
HIGH CUT
VOLUME
Basic automatic setup
Use this feature to customize the automatic setup and review
the result of the measurements. You can set the parameters that
this unit sets in the automatic setup procedure and review the
results of the measurements.
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
Controls of a subwoofer (example)
❏
amplifiers are turned on and the settings are appropriate.
The room is sufficiently quiet.
Set the operation mode selector on the remote control to
FAMP.
❏
❏
Notes
Advanced automatic setup
• Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output during the
automatic setup procedure.
• To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible
while the automatic setup procedure is in progress. If there is too much
ambient noise, the results may not be satisfactory.
Use this feature to make fine-adjustments of the sound. You
can optimize the setup of this unit for multiple listening
positions in a listening room, and/or for the effect of the sound
field programs.
Notes
• Sometimes due to interaction with the room, you may notice irregular
results when setting the level and/or distance of the main speakers. If this
happens, THX Ltd. recommends setting them manually.
• Sometimes due to the electrical complexities of subwoofers and the
interaction with the room, THX Ltd. recommends setting the level and the
distance of the subwoofer manually.
42 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)
Before proceeding next operation
Using the quick automatic setup
Use this feature to optimize the sound of this unit to the listening
room quickly.
Once you perform the next operation, this unit starts the
automatic setup procedure immediately. For more accurate
measurements, we recommend that you move to the wall where
speakers are not around.
1
Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the
OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel.
“MIC ON” appears in the front panel display.
I
Press PROGRAM on the front panel to start the
measurements.
3
This unit starts the measurements immediately. Loud test tones
are output from each speaker during the automatic setup
procedure. During the setup procedure, following messages
appear in the front panel display.
STRAIGHT
PROGRAM
MENU
SPEAKERS
ZONE
ZONE ON/OFF
AUDIO SELECT
A
B
CONTROLS
EFFECT
MULTI
ZONE
REC OUT/
TONE CONTROL
USB
ZONE
2
ZONE
2
ZONE
3
ZONE
L
4
PUSH ENTER
VIDEO
OPTICAL
S VIDEO
AUDIO
R
HDMI IN
SILENT CINEMA
PHONES
YPAO
OPTIMIZER
MIC
VIDEO AUX
AUTO SETUP
PREPARING
Omni-directional
microphone
AUTO SETUP
MEASURING
AUTO SETUP
ENTER TO START
Note
AUTO SETUP
ANALIZING
If “GUI” appears in the front panel display as follows, the menu screen
(GUI) is displayed in the video monitor and you cannot proceed the
J
quick automatic setup. In such a case, press MENU to turn off the
y
To cancel the automatic setup procedure, rotate EVOLUME.
Notes
GUI
DSP-Z11
• During the automatic setup procedure, do not perform any operation
on this unit.
• Keep quiet when you leave the room. The necessary time for the
automatic setup procedure may differ depending on the environment
of the listening room and connected speakers (from 30 seconds to 5
minutes).
2
Place the optimizer microphone at your normal
listening position on a flat level surface with the
omni-directional microphone heading upward.
Optimizer microphone
4
Once this unit completes all measurements and
adjustments successfully, following message
appears in the front panel display.
COMPLETED
PLS UNPLUG MIC
If error or warning message appears...
Error message appears in the front panel display. See the
for a complete list of error messages and proper remedies.
y
It is recommended that you use a tripod (etc.) to affix the optimizer
microphone at the same height as your ears would be when you are
seated in your listening position. You can use the attached screw of a
tripod (etc.) to fix the optimizer microphone to the tripod (etc.).
ERROR: E-01
PRESS ENTER
y
You can check the detailed results of the measurements by using the
43 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)
Measurement
Descriptions
5
Disconnect the optimizer microphone to exit from the
automatic setup mode.
The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. Keep it away
from direct sunlight and do not place it on top of this unit.
You can make adjustments of this unit for multiple
listening positions. For details, refer to “Using advanced
automatic setup” on page 46. In the basic automatic
setup, leave the setting to the default.
Multi Measure
(Multiple point
measurement)
This unit checks and adjusts which speakers are
connected and the polarity of each speaker.
Wiring
(Speaker wiring)
Using the basic automatic setup
Use this feature to customize the measurements and the settings of
the automatic setup using the connected video monitor.
This unit checks and adjusts the distance of each speaker
from the listening position and adjusts the timing of each
channel.
Distance
(Speaker
distance)
This unit checks and adjusts the frequency response of
each speaker and sets the appropriate low-frequency
crossover for each channel.
Size
(Speaker size)
1
2
Turn on the connected video monitor.
Parametric equalizer adjusts the level of the specified
frequency bands. This unit automatically selects the
crucial frequency bands for the listening room and
adjusts the level of the selected frequency bands to
create a cohesive sound field in the room.
Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to this
unit and then place the microphone appropriately.
Equalizing
(Speaker
equalizing)
This unit checks and adjusts the volume level of each
speaker.
Level
(Speaker level)
3
Press IMENU on the remote control.
Following menu screen appears in the video monitor.
Standing waves are the sound waves generated in a room
due to the acoustic characteristics of the room and audio
system, etc., and the acoustic standing waves may
interrupt the accurate reproduction of the source sound
and distort the characteristics of the sound produced by
this unit. This unit reduces the effects of the standing
waves in the listening with the specially customized
parametric equalizer.
Standing Wave
(Standing wave
cancelling)
Information
Setup Menu
Start
Start:ENTER
For details, refer to “Using advanced automatic setup”
on page 46. In the basic automatic setup, clear the check
mark.
Angle
(Speaker angle)
4
5
Press 9kto select “Setup Menu” and then 9h.
The list of the measurements in the automatic setup appears in
the screen.
Note
When you use THX speakers, clear the check mark of “Size” and then make
Press 9k/ nrepeatedly to select the desired
measurement item and then press 9ENTER
repeatedly to select whether the selected
measurement is carried out.
Check mark appears in the check box of the measurement that
this unit carries out.
6
7
Once you have finished the settings, press 9lto
return to the previous menu level and then press 9n
to select “Start”.
9
Press ENTER to start the measurements.
This unit starts the measurements immediately. Loud test tones
are output from each speaker during the automatic setup
procedure.
Notes
• During the automatic setup procedure, do not perform any operation
on this unit.
• Keep quiet when you leave the room. The necessary time for the
automatic setup procedure may differ depending on the environment
of the listening room and connected speakers (from 30 seconds to 5
minutes).
y
To cancel the automatic setup procedure, press 0RETURN. The error
message “E09:User Cancel” appears in the menu screen and this unit
stops the measurement immediately (see page 45).
44 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)
■ Reviewing the result of the automatic setup
Use this feature to review the result of the automatic setup.
8
Once all measurement items are set successfully,
following display appears in the menu screen.
F
Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then
1
2
I
press MENU to turn on the GUI screen.
Retry
Setup
Angle Check
Angle
Exit
Detail
Press 9k/ nrepeatedly and then 9hto select
“Auto Setup”.
Result
Measurement Over
Successfully
Input Select
In this menu, you can perform the following operations:
• Press 9nand select “Setup” to set the measured values.
• Press 9kand select “Retry” to retry the automatic setup
procedure. This unit starts the automatic setup procedure
immediately again.
Manual Setup
Auto Setup
Information
Setup Menu
Start
System Memory
Signal Info.
• Press 9hand select “Detail” to view information about
measurement results and warning messages. In the
information display, press 9k/ nrepeatedly to toggle
between the parameters. See page 46 for details.
• Press 9lto cancel the measurement results and exit from
the automatic setup menu.
3
4
Press 9kto select “Information”.
Information
Setup Menu
Start
Multi Measure
If error or warning messages appear...
Wiring
Distance
Retry
Setup
Angle Check
Angle
Exit
Detail
Result
Measurement Over
W1:Out of Phase
W3:Level Error
Press 9hand then 9k/ nrepeatedly to select the
desired check items.
Left Right
Front
Center
Sur.
S.Back NRM NRM
F.PRNS NRM NRM
R.PRNS NRM NRM
SubWfr DET DET
NRM NRM
NRM
NRM NRM
Error or warning messages
Multi Measure
Wiring
When this unit detects potential problems during the
automatic setup procedure, error or warning messages
appears in the result display. See the “Auto Setup” section
error or warning messages and proper remedies.
Press 9lto view the detailed information of the error or
warning messages.
Distance
Size
Reload:ENTER
I
Press MENU to turn off the GUI menu.
9
Notes
• After you have completed the automatic setup procedure, be sure to
disconnect the optimizer microphone.
• The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. Keep it away from direct
sunlight and do not place it on top of this unit.
45 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)
Measurement
Descriptions
Notes
Displays the number of the points the measurements are
carried out at. For details, refer to “Using advanced
automatic setup” on this page.
Multi Measure
(Multiple point
measurement)
• “–––” appears when no speaker is connected to the corresponding speaker
channel or this unit does not measure the corresponding speaker channel
yet.
• If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your listening
environment, run “Auto Setup” again to recalibrate your system.
• The distances displayed in the “Distance” results may be longer than the
actual distance depending on the characteristics of your subwoofer or
external amplifiers if you connect them.
• In the “Equalizing” results, different values may be set for the same band
to provide finer adjustments.
• Even if you change the setting of “PEQ Select”, the equalizer type that is
displayed in “Equalizing” is not changed.
Displays the polarity of each connected speaker.
– “NRM” appears when the polarity of the connected
speaker is normal.
– “REV” appears when the polarity of the connected
speaker is reversed.
– “DET” appears when this unit detects the
subwoofer(s) is connected.
– “–––” appears when no speaker is connected to the
corresponding speaker channel.
Wiring
(Speaker wiring)
Displays the speaker distance from the listening
position. Press 9hrepeatedly to switch the unit to
display the value of the each speaker distance.
Distance
(Speaker
distance)
5
Once you finish the review of the result of the
automatic setup, press 9lrepeatedly to exit from
the automatic setup menu.
Displays the size of the connected speakers and the bass
cross over frequency (“Cross”).
Size
(Speaker size)
– “LRG” appears when the connected speaker has the
ability to reproduce the low-frequency signals
effectively.
– “SML” appears when the connected speaker does
not have the ability to reproduce the low-frequency
signals effectively.
y
• You can also set the parametric equalizer type by using “Parametric EQ” in
• You can set the connected subwoofer phases by using “Phase” in “Manual
Displays the result of the adjustment of the frequency
responses of each connected speaker. You can switch the
parametric equalizer type that appears in the result
display by pressing 9hrepeatedly in the “Equalizing”
result display. To apply the result that is displayed in the
display, press 9ENTER.
Equalizing
(Speaker
equalizing)
Using advanced automatic setup
You can use the multiple-point measurement feature to optimize up
to eight listening positions in a listening room and speaker angle
measurement feature to optimize the speakers for the effects of the
sound field programs.
Choices: Natural, Flat, Front
– Select “Natural” to average out the frequency
response of all speakers with higher frequencies
being less emphasized. Recommended if the “Flat”
setting sounds a little harsh.
Notes
• Before starting the operations, prepare the supplied microphone base.
• You can make fine adjustments of this unit by using the multiple-point
measurement and speaker angle measurement features, however it takes
from 30 seconds to 3 minutes to make the measurements at each listening
point.
– Select “Flat” to average the frequency response of all
speakers. Recommended if all of your speakers are
of similar quality.
– Select “Front” to adjust the frequency response of
each speaker in accordance with the sound of your
front speakers. Recommended if your front speakers
are of much higher quality than your other speakers.
The following listening room is set as the example in the following
instructions.
Displays the result of the adjustment of each connected
speaker output level. You can display the result of the
adjustment of the speaker level for each parametric
equalizer type (see above) by pressing 9hrepeatedly.
Select “Through” to display the result when this unit
does not use the parametric equalizer.
Level
(Speaker level)
Displays the active band frequencies of the special
parametric equalizer for each speaker. Press 9h
repeatedly to switch the result of the front and rear
speaker.
Standing Wave
(Standing wave
cancelling)
1
2
7
6
3 4 5
Displays the angles of the front speakers, surround
speakers, front presence speakers and rear presence
speakers at the measured point.
Angle
(Speaker angle)
y
• You can reload the displayed result of the automatic setup by pressing
9ENTER.
• The results of the measurement that are the causes of the warning
message(s) appear in red.
/2/3/4/5/6/7: Listening positions
1
1
2
Turn on the connected video monitor.
Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to this
unit and then place the microphone appropriately.
Refer to the steps 1 and 2 of “Using the quick automatic setup”
on page 43. First, place the optimizer microphone to the
listening position
.
1
46 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)
3
4
Press IMENU on the remote control.
11 Press 9ENTER to start the measurement at the next
Following menu screen appears in the video monitor.
listening position.
y
To skip the measurements at the remaining listening positions, press
9n.
Information
Setup Menu
Start
Start:ENTER
12 Repeat steps 10 and 11 until the measurements at all
listening points are completed.
13 Once following display appears in the video monitor,
place the supplied microphone base at the listening
point you want to be seated most frequently as
follows.
Press 9kto select “Setup Menu” and then 9h.
The list of the measurements in the automatic setup appears in
the screen.
Make sure that the arrow mark on the microphone base points
the center speaker or between the front left and right speakers.
5
6
Press 9krepeatedly to select “Multi Measure”.
Equalizing
Press 9hand then 9k/ nrepeatedly to set the
number of the listening positions you want to make
the measurement at.
Put the microphone at
Level
1st listening position
Angle Check
Angle
Next:ENTER
1
Choices: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
3
2
Result
Information
ꢁ
✓
ꢀ3
Setup Menu
Start
Multi Measure
Wiring
ꢂ
✓
✓
Distance
7
8
Press 9lto return to the previous menu level and
then press 9nrepeatedly to select “Angle”.
Microphone base
FRONT
DIRECTION
Make sure that a check mark appears in the check
box of “Angle”.
Note
If the check mark does not appears, press 9ENTER to select
the check box.
For the accurate measurements of the speaker angles, we strongly
recommend that you use a tripod (etc.) to affix the microphone base at
the same height as your ears would be when you are seated in your
listening position. You can use the attached screw of a tripod (etc.) to
fix the microphone base to the tripod (etc.).
9
Once you have finished the settings, press 9lto
return to the previous menu level and then press 9n
to select “Start”.
details.
14 Place the optimizer microphone to the “(1)” position
on the microphone base.
10 Once this unit pauses the automatic measurement
procedure and then “Put the microphone at 2nd
listening position” appears in the display, move the
optimizer microphone to the listening position
.
2
Pre Check
Put the microphone at
2nd listening position
Main Check
Next:ENTER
Skip: ꢁ
Wiring
Distance
47 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)
For other configuration of the listening position
The following examples indicate the measurement points when
there is a listening position or are two listening positions.
15 Once the setting has been completed, press
9ENTER.
This unit starts the measurements of the speaker angles.
Example 1: Two listening positions
We recommend that you make measurements in front of and
behind the listening positions as well as the listening positions.
16 Once the following display appears in the video
monitor, move the optimizer microphone to the “(2)”
position on the microphone base.
3
Equalizing
1
2
Put the microphone at
Level
2nd listening position
Angle Check
Angle
Next:ENTER
1
4
3
2
Result
Example 2: One listening position
We recommend that you make measurements around the
listening position as well as the listening position.
17 Press 9ENTER to resume the measurements.
5
18 Once the following display appears in the video
monitor, move the optimizer microphone to the “(3)”
position on the microphone base.
4 1 2
3
Equalizing
Put the microphone at
Level
3rd listening position
Angle Check
Angle
Next:ENTER
1
3
2
Result
19 Press 9ENTER to resume the measurements.
20 Once the measurement procedure has been
complete, following display appears in the video
monitor.
See page 45 for details.
Retry
Setup
Angle Check
Angle
Exit
Detail
Result
Measurement Over
Successfully
48 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operation
Basic procedure ................................................................................................................. 50
Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component ................................................................... 50
Selecting the front speaker set ........................................................................................... 51
Muting the audio output .................................................................................................... 52
Using the sleep timer ......................................................................................................... 52
Selecting sound field programs ......................................................................................... 54
Using audio features ............................................................................ 61
Enjoying pure hi-fi sound .................................................................................................. 61
Adjusting the tonal quality ................................................................................................ 61
Recording ............................................................................................. 62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Playback
Caution
E
J
4
Rotate VOLUME (or press VOLUME +/–) to
adjust the volume to the desired output level.
Control range: Mute, –80.0 dB (minimum) to
+16.5 dB (maximum)
Extreme caution should be exercised when you play back CDs
encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD encoded in DTS on a
DTS-incompatible CD player, you will only hear some
unwanted noise that may damage your speakers. Check whether
your CD player supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the
sound output level of your CD player before you play back a CD
encoded in DTS.
y
See page 61 to adjust the level of each speaker.
I
5
Rotate the PROGRAM selector (or press one of
y
the sound field program selector buttons (Q)
repeatedly) to select the desired sound field
program.
To play DTS-encoded CDs when using a digital audio connection, set
“Decoder Mode” in “Input Select” to “DTS” before playback (see
The name of the selected sound field program appears in the
front panel display and in the short message display. See
page 54 for details about sound field programs.
Before performing the following operations, set the operation mode
F
selector on the remote control to AMP.
Currently selected sound field program category
Basic procedure
Movie
1
Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit.
Sci-Fi
y
Currently selected sound field program
• If you connect two video monitors to the HDMI OUT jacks of this
unit, press CHDMI OUT repeatedly to select the active video
monitor.
Note
• You can control this unit by using the graphical user interface (GUI)
Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component
connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input
• You can turn on or off the short message displays in the video
y
D
Rotate the INPUT selector (or press one of the
input selector buttons (3)) to select the desired
2
• Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not
merely on the name of the program.
input source.
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the
last sound field program used with the corresponding input source.
The name of the currently selected input source appears in the
front panel display and in the short message display for a few
seconds.
Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT
component
Available input sources
Use this feature to select the component connected to the MULTI
NET V-AUX
USB DOCK
CBL
SAT
BD
MD
VCR
DVR
DTV DVD
CD-R CD PHONO MULTI CH TUNER
HD DVD
TAPE
DVD
D
3
Rotate the INPUT selector (or press MULTI) to
select “MULTI CH”.
Currently selected input source
y
Use “MULTI CH” menu in “Input Select” to set the parameters for MULTI
3
Start playback on the selected source component or
select a broadcast station.
Note
• Refer to the instruction manuals for the source component.
programs and the music contents in the PC or USB storage
devices.
Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to
the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 54).
50 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Selecting the HDMI OUT jack
Using your headphones
Use this feature to select the HDMI OUT jack to output the input
signals.
Connect a pair of headphones with a stereo analog audio
cable plug to the PHONES jack on the front panel.
Press CHDMI OUT on the remote control repeatedly to
select the desired setting of “HDMI OUT SEL”.
Each time you press CHDMI OUT, the front panel display changes
as shown below.
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
ON
ON/OFF
OFF
INPUT
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
PROGRAM
MENU
VOLUME
SPEAKERS
ZONE
CONTROLS
AUDIO SELECT
A
B
ZONE ON/OFF
SEARCH MODE
MULTI
ZONE
REC OUT/
TONE CONTROL
USB
OUT 1
OUT 2
ZONE
2
ZONE
2
ZONE
3
ZONE
L
4
PUSH ENTER
S
VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
OPTICAL
HDMI IN
SILENT CINEMA
PHONES
YPAO
OPTIMIZER
MIC
VIDEO AUX
OFF
Choice
OUT 1
Functions
Outputs the signals at the HDMI OUT 1 jack.
Outputs the signals at the HDMI OUT 2 jack.
OUT 2
OFF
Does not output any signals at the HDMI OUT 1 and 2
jacks. Select this setting when you do not use the video
monitor connected to one of the HDMI OUT jacks.
y
When you select a sound field program, the SILENT CINEMA mode
activates automatically (see page 60).
Selecting the front speaker set
Use this feature to turn the front speaker system (FRONT A and/or
FRONT B) on or off.
Notes
• When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the speaker
terminals.
• All digital multi-channel audio signals (except DSD signals) are mixed
down to the left and right headphone channels.
• If you connect or disconnect your headphones to or from this unit in the
party mode, the sounds in the zones that join in the party mode are muted
for a moment.
G
G
Press SPEAKERS A and/or SPEAKERS B on the
front panel to turn on or off the set of front speakers
connected to the FRONT A and/or EXTRA SP speaker
terminals.
• The audio signals input at the CENTER and SUBWOOFER MULTI CH
INPUT jacks are mixed down to the left and right headphone channels.
Note
Turn off the volume level of this unit when you switch the front speaker
setting.
Playing video sources in the background
of an audio source
You can combine a video image from a video source with sound
from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy listening to
classical music while viewing beautiful scenery from the video
source in the video monitor.
■ Using the Zone B feature
the speakers connected to the EXTRA SP speaker terminals in
another room (Zone B).
Press GSPEAKERS B on the front panel repeatedly to
turn on or off the Zone B speakers.
When you activate the Zone B speakers, all the speakers in the main
room are muted.
Press the input selector buttons (3) to select a video
source and then an audio source.
MD
MULTI
V-AUX
PHONO
TAPE
Note
BD
You cannot activate both the main room and Zone B speakers
simultaneously.
DVD
CD
CD-R
HD DVD
CBL
SAT
DTV
DVR
VCR
NET
USB
TUNER
DOCK
: Audio source buttons
: Video source buttons
y
Set the “BGV” parameter in the “MULTI CH” menu to the desired setting to
select the default background video input source of the MULTI CH INPUT
51 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Selecting audio input jacks
(AUDIO SELECT)
This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Use this feature (audio
input jack select) to switch the input jack assigned to an input
source when more than one jacks are assigned to an input source.
Using the sleep timer
Use this feature to automatically set the main zone to the standby
mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep timer is useful when
you are going to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a
source. The sleep timer also automatically turns off any external
y
• We recommend setting the audio input jack select to “AUTO” in most
cases.
• You can adjust the default the audio input jack select of this unit by using
• You can also set the audio input jack select setting in “Audio Select” in
1
2
Press one of the input selector buttons (3) on the
remote control to select the desired input source.
Start playback on the selected source component or
select a broadcast station.
Refer to the operating instructions for the source component.
D
1
Rotate the INPUT selector (or press one of the
input selector buttons (3)) to select the desired
input source.
C
Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time.
C
Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display
3
changes as shown below.
F
O
2
Press AUDIO SELECT (or AUDIO SEL)
repeatedly to select the desired Audio input jack
select setting.
120min.
OFF
90min.
60min.
30min.
Available input sources
The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching the
amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep timer is set,
the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel display, and
the display returns to the selected sound field program.
NET V-AUX
USB DOCK
CBL
SAT
BD
MD
VCR
DVR
DTV DVD
CD-R CD PHONO MULTI CH TUNER
HD DVD
TAPE
A.SEL: AUTO
Currently selected Audio input jack select
setting
SLEEP
SLEEP
Automatically selects input signals in the following
order:
AUTO
120min.
(1) HDMI
(2) Digital signals
(3) Analog signals
Flashes
Selects only HDMI signals. When HDMI signals are not
input, no sound is output.
HDMI
SLEEP
STRAIGHT
Automatically selects input signals in the following
order:
COAX/OPT
(1) Digital signals input at the COAXIAL jack.
(2) Digital signals input at the OPTICAL jack.
When no signals are input, no sound is output.
Lights up
Selects only analog signals. If no analog signals are
input, no sound is output.
ANALOG
■ Canceling the sleep timer
C
Press SLEEP repeatedly until “OFF” appears in the
front panel display.
Note
This feature is not available when no digital input jack (OPTICAL,
COAXIAL and HDMI) are assigned. Use “I/O Assignment” in “Input
SLEEP
OFF
Muting the audio output
Disappears
The SLEEP indicator turns off, and “OFF” disappears from the
front panel display after a few seconds.
L
Press MUTE on the remote control to mute the audio
L
output. Press MUTE again to resume the audio output.
“VOLUME” flashes in the front panel display when the audio
output is muted.
y
A
• The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing MAIN ZONE
D
ON/OFF (or STANDBY) to set the main zone to the standby mode.
y
page 117 for details.
E
J
• You can also rotate VOLUME on the front panel or press VOLUME
+/– on the remote control to resume the audio output.
• You can adjust the muting level by using the “Muting Type” parameter in
52 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Operating this unit by using the graphical user interface (GUI) menu
This unit features a sophisticated graphical user interface (GUI) menu that helps you to control the amplifier function of this unit. With the
GUI menu, you can view the information of the signals being input and the status of this unit. You can also set up this unit using the GUI
■ Items in GUI menu
Currently selected decoder
Currently selected
input source
Currently selected
sound field program
DVD
qPLIIx Movie
Sound
Sci-Fi
3D
Stereo/Surround
Input Select
Video
Currently selected
menu item
Menu area
Manual Setup
Auto Setup
Basic
Multi Zone
Network
System Memory
Manual Setup
-40.0dB
Volume level
Current menu directory
y
F
• Set the operation mode selector to AMP when you operate this unit by using GUI menu.
• This unit reserves the previously selected GUI menu.
■ Basic controls in the GUI menu
■ Basic operation of the GUI menu by using the
front panel controls
Button
9 Cursor k/ n
9 Cursor h
Function
IPROGRAM
Function
Selects the item in the current menu level.
Selects the item in the current menu level.
Turn left/right
Selects the currently selected menu item and
moves to the next menu level.
Selects the currently selected menu item and moves to
the next menu level.
Press
Returns to the previous menu level.
9 Cursor l
9 ENTER
Selects the currently selected menu item and
moves to the next menu level.
Button
JMENU
Ll
Functions
Turns on or off the GUI menu.
Returns to the previous menu level.
Turns on or off the GUI menu.
I MENU
Selects the currently selected menu item and moves to
the next menu level.
Mh
53 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sound field programs
Sound field programs
This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from almost any stereo or
multi-channel sound source. This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha digital sound field processing (DSP) chip containing several sound
field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.
y
• The Yamaha CINEMA DSP sound field program are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, Dolby Surround, Dolby TrueHD, and DTS-HD sources.
• The Yamaha HiFi DSP sound field programs recreate real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in actual concert halls, music
venues, movie theaters, etc. Thus, you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right.
Selecting sound field programs
Notes
I
Rotate the PROGRAM selector (or set the operation
mode selector to AMP and then press one of the
F
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last
sound field program used with the corresponding input source.
• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected
• Sampling frequencies higher than 96 kHz are sampled down to 96 kHz or
lower and then sound field programs are applied.
sound field selector buttons (Q) repeatedly).
The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front
panel display and in the short message display.
y
You can select the desired sound field programs and setting the parameters
Sound field program descriptions
y
Select a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program, etc.
CINEMA DSP
Name of the
program
or
Created sound
fields
HiFi DSP
Sci-Fi
Size
Small
Vertical
Front
Large
V/H balance
F/R balance
Atmosphere
Horizontal
Rear
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science
fiction and special effects-featuring movies. You can enjoy a variety of
cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between
dialog, sound effects and background music.
Simple
Complex
Program description
Sound field indicators
Presence sound field
Listening position
Surround left
sound field
Surround right
sound field
Surround back sound field
y
sound field indicators light up.
HD³ sound field
indicators
Note
The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ
depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.
54 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sound field programs
Descriptions of the characteristics of the sound field programs
Following indexes indicates the characteristics and trends of each sound field program.
Note
The characteristics of the sound field programs may differ depending on the settings of the listening room, etc.
Size of sound field space (Size)
Sound field atmosphere (Atmosphere)
(For the HiFi DSP programs)
(For the HiFi DSP and CINEMA DSP programs)
Small
Large
Simple
Complex
Indicates the size of the sound field to be generated. If the value for The sound field to be generated is evaluated according to whether it
this item is small, the sound is that of a small space, while if the
value is large, the sound is that of a vast space.
is nearer to one or the other of the following;
Simple: Sounds that fade straight-forwardly, with a light, gentle
impression, depending on the program. This suits almost all contents
relatively well, but provides little brilliance or powerfulness.
Complex: Sounds transform in complex ways as they fade out, with
a rich, brilliant impression, depending on the program.
This is extremely effective for the right contents, but is suited for a
smaller range of contents.
Vertical/horizontal balance (V/H balance)
(For the HiFi DSP and CINEMA DSP programs)
Vertical
Horizontal
Indicates the balance of the vertical (height) and horizontal
directions for the sound field to be generated. If this item is more in
the horizontal direction, the sound is that of a space with strong
reflections from the walls, while if it is more in the vertical direction,
the sound is that of a space with strong reflections from the ceiling.
(For the CINEMA DSP programs)
Calm
Powerful
The sound field to be generated is evaluated according to whether it
is nearer to one or the other of the following;
Calm: An overall composed, moderate effect, stressing the overall
quality of the atmosphere without aiming at any extreme effects.
This suits almost all contents relatively well, but provides little
showiness or powerfulness.
Powerful: Designed with specific contents in mind (expressing vast
spaces, feverish excitement, etc.). This is extremely effective for the
right contents, but is suited for a smaller range of contents.
Front/rear balance (F/R balance)
(For the CINEMA DSP programs only)
Front
Rear
A CINEMA DSP sound field processing expressing whether the
effect is stronger towards the front or rear. When the effect is
stronger towards the front, the listener senses a feeling of openness
and depth towards the screen, while when the effect is stronger
towards the rear, the listener gets a sense of envelopment and
movement. Suits basically all types of contents for programs with a
good front/rear balance, and is effective when selected appropriately
for programs in which the balance is more towards either the front or
rear.
■ For audio music sources
y
For audio music sources, we also recommend using the Pure Direct mode (see page 61), the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 60), or surround decode mode (see
CLASSICAL
1
1
CLASSICAL 1
Hall in Munich A
HiFi DSP
Size
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in Munich, using
stylish wood for the interior finishing as normal standards for European concert halls.
Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s
virtual seat is at the center left of the arena.
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Horizontal
Complex
Hall in Munich B
Size
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
HiFi DSP
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Horizontal
Complex
This hall is frequently used for recording orchestral music, and is a shoe-box type concert
hall with around 1300 seats. The hall is constructed from marble, resulting in relatively flat
resonance. Further, the high ceiling causes sound to reverberate for longer than usual.
Hall in Frankfurt
Size
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
HiFi DSP
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Horizontal
Complex
This is a large shoe-box type concert hall with around 2400 seats located in Frankfurt. This
hall has a very solid, powerful sound. The listener’s virtual seat is in the center-right
section on the first floor.
55 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sound field programs
Hall in Stuttgart
Size
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
HiFi DSP
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Horizontal
Complex
This is a large asymmetrical concert hall with around 2000 seats located in downtown
Stuttgart. Sound reflected off the concrete wall located to the left of listeners has a
powerful presence.
Hall in Vienna
Size
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
HiFi DSP
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Horizontal
Complex
This is an approximately 1700-seated, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that
is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections
from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound.
Size
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
Hall in Amsterdam
HiFi DSP
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Horizontal
Complex
The large, shoe box shaped hall seats about 2200 around the circle stage. Reflections are
rich and pleasing while the sound travels freely.
CLASSICAL
2
2
CLASSICAL 2
Hall in USA A
Size
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
HiFi DSP
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Horizontal
Complex
This is a large 2600 seat concert hall in the United States which features a fairly traditional
European design. The interior is relatively simple, in the American style. The middle and
high frequencies are richly and beautifully reinforced.
Hall in USA B
HiFi DSP
Size
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
This spacious arch-shaped hall has a dome ceiling and can seat 2600. The ample
resonance apparent in the sound is a feature brought about by longer than average period
of reverberation. In addition to this, the reflector suspended above the stage allows
listeners to experience rich sound from the direction of the stage.
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Horizontal
Complex
Chamber
Size
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
HiFi DSP
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Horizontal
Complex
This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a
palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber
music.
Church in Tokyo
Size
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
HiFi DSP
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Horizontal
Complex
The acoustic environment of an ordinary church with moderate reverberations. The
reverberation lasts 2.5 seconds. This is ideal for reproducing church organ and choral
music.
Church in Freiburg
HiFi DSP
Size
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
Located in the south of Germany, this grand, stone-built church has a pointed tower at 120
meters in height. Its long and narrow shape and the high ceiling enable the elongated
reverberation time and limited initial reflection time. Thus, the rich reverberation rather
than the sound itself reproduces the atmosphere of the church.
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Horizontal
Complex
Size
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
Church in Royaumont
HiFi DSP
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Horizontal
Complex
This program features the sound field created by the refectory (dining hall) of a beautiful
medieval Gothic monastery located in Royaumont on the outskirts of Paris.
LIVE/CLUB
3
LIVE/CLUB
Size
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
Village Gate
HiFi DSP
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Horizontal
Complex
This is the sound field at a jazz club that was in New York. It is in a basement and has a
relatively spacious floor area. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall.
Size
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
Village Vanguard
HiFi DSP
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Horizontal
Complex
The Jazz club is on 7th Avenue, New York. This small club with the low ceiling makes the
powerful reflections converge toward the stage located in the corner.
56 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sound field programs
The Bottom Line
Size
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
HiFi DSP
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Horizontal
Complex
This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, that was a famous New York jazz
club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real
and vibrant sound.
Cellar Club
Size
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
HiFi DSP
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Horizontal
Complex
This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic,
live sound field features powerful sound as if the listener is in a row in front of a small
stage.
Size
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
The Roxy Theatre
HiFi DSP
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Horizontal
Complex
This is the sound field of a rock music live house in Los Angeles, with approximately 460
seats. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall.
Size
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
Warehouse Loft
HiFi DSP
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Horizontal
Complex
The warehouse resembles some lofts in Soho. Sound reflects off the concrete walls clearly
with a lot of energy.
Size
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
Arena
HiFi DSP
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Horizontal
Complex
This is the sound field of a large arena, with just the right sense of distance from the stage.
A dynamic sound field reproduces the power of live performances.
■ For various sources
ENTERTAIN
4
ENTERTAIN
Sports
Size
Small
Vertical
Front
Large
V/H balance
F/R balance
Atmosphere
Horizontal
Rear
This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety
programs with enriched live feeling. In sports broadcasts, the voices of the commentator
and sportscaster are positioned clearly on the center while the atmosphere of the stadium
expands in an optimum space to offer the listeners with a feeling of presence in the
stadium.
Calm
Powerful
■ For visual sources of music
ENTERTAIN
4
ENTERTAIN
Size
Small
Vertical
Front
Large
Music Video
V/H balance
F/R balance
Atmosphere
Horizontal
Rear
This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and
jazz music. The listener can indulge oneself in a hot live space thanks to the presence
sound field that emphasizes the vividness of vocals and solo play and the beat of rhythm
instruments, and to the surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.
Calm
Powerful
Recital/Opera
Size
Small
Vertical
Front
Large
This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum level and emphasizes
the depth and clarity of human voices. “Recital/Opera” offers the reverberations of an
orchestra box in front of the listener at the same time as providing the acoustic positioning
and feeling of presence on the stage. The surround sound field is relatively moderate, but
the data for concert hall effects are used to represent the inherent beauty of music. The
listener will not be fatigued even after long hours of opera entertainment.
V/H balance
F/R balance
Atmosphere
Horizontal
Rear
Calm
Powerful
Size
Small
Vertical
Front
Large
Pavilion
V/H balance
F/R balance
Atmosphere
Horizontal
Rear
This program reproduces vocals clearly, letting you feel the spaciousness of a pavilion.
Reverberation, which is somewhat delayed, reproduces the live acoustics unique to a
pavilion, and helps to make concert scenes more exciting.
Calm
Powerful
57 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sound field programs
■ For parties
ENTERTAIN
4
ENTERTAIN
Disco
Size
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
HiFi DSP
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Horizontal
Complex
This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city.
The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by high-energy,
“immediate” sound.
■ For game programs
ENTERTAIN
4
ENTERTAIN
Size
Small
Vertical
Front
Large
Action Game
V/H balance
F/R balance
Atmosphere
Horizontal
Rear
This sound field is suitable for action games such as car racing and FPS games. It uses the
reflection data that limits the effects range per channel in order to offer a powerful playing
environment with a being-there feeling by enhancing various effects tones while
maintaining a clear sense of directions.
Calm
Powerful
Size
Small
Vertical
Front
Large
Roleplaying Game
V/H balance
F/R balance
Atmosphere
Horizontal
Rear
This sound field is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. It combines the sound
field effects for movies and the sound field design used with “Action Game” to represent
the depth and spatial feeling of the field during play, while offering movie-like surround
effects in the movie scenes in the game.
Calm
Powerful
■ For movie sources
y
You can select the desired decoder used with following sound field program (except “Mono Movie”). See page 72 for details.
MOVIE
5
MOVIE
Size
Small
Vertical
Front
Large
Standard
V/H balance
F/R balance
Atmosphere
Horizontal
Rear
This program create a sound field emphasizing the surrounding feeling without disturbing
the original acoustic positioning of multi-channel audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It
has been designed with the concept of “an ideal movie theater”, in which the audience is
surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right and rear.
Calm
Powerful
Size
Small
Vertical
Front
Large
Spectacle
V/H balance
F/R balance
Atmosphere
Horizontal
Rear
This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale movie productions. It
reproduces a broad theater sound field matching the cinemascope and wider-screen
movies with an excellent dynamic range from very small to extremely large sound.
Calm
Powerful
Size
Small
Vertical
Front
Large
Sci-Fi
V/H balance
F/R balance
Atmosphere
Horizontal
Rear
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science
fiction and special effects-featuring movies. You can enjoy a variety of
cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between
dialog, sound effects and background music.
Calm
Powerful
Adventure
Size
Small
Vertical
Front
Large
V/H balance
F/R balance
Atmosphere
Horizontal
Rear
This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of action and adventure
movies. The sound field restrains reverberations but puts emphasis on reproducing a
powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The reproduced depth is also
restrained relatively to ensure the separation between audio channels and the clarity of the
sound.
Calm
Powerful
Drama
Size
Small
Vertical
Front
Large
V/H balance
F/R balance
Atmosphere
Horizontal
Rear
This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres
from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest but offer an
optimum spatial feeling, reproducing effects tones and background music softly but
cubically around clear words and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue the
listener even after long hours of viewing.
Calm
Powerful
58 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sound field programs
Size
Small
Vertical
Front
Large
Mono Movie
V/H balance
F/R balance
Atmosphere
Horizontal
Rear
This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources such as a classic movie
in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program produces the optimum
expansion and reverberation to the original audio to create a comfortable space with a
certain sound depth.
Calm
Powerful
■ Stereo playback
STEREO
6
STEREO
2ch Stereo
Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels.
11ch Stereo
HiFi DSP
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back
multi-channel sources, this unit downmixes the source to 2 channels, and
then output the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger
sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc.
■ For compression artifacts
(Compressed Music Enhancer mode)
ENHANCER
7
ENHANCER
Straight Enhancer
Use this program to improve the sound enhancer nearest to the original
depth and width of the 2-channel or multi-channel compression artifacts.
11ch Enhancer
Use this program to play back compression artifacts in 11-channel stereo.
■ Surround decoder mode
SUR. DECODE
8
SUR. DECODE
Surround Decode
Use this program to play back sources with using the desired surround
decoders.
■ THX Surround mode
THX
9
THX
Use this feature to play back sources with the accurate surround
processing programs compliant with the THX specifications. See
59 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sound field programs
■ Using sound field programs without surround
speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP)
Before performing the following operation, set the operation mode
F
selector on the remote control to AMP.
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA DSP or
HiFi DSP sound field programs without surround speakers. It
creates virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field.
CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever you select a
CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field program (see page 54).
Using CINEMA DSP HD³ mode
CINEMA DSP HD³ mode creates the intensive and accurate
stereoscopic sound field in the listening room. You can activate and
deactivate the CINEMA DSP HD³ mode.
Note
P
Press 3D DSP repeatedly to turn on and off the
Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate even when “Surround” is set to
“None” (see page 84) and you select a CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound
field program in the following cases:
– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is
CINEMA DSP HD³ mode.
•
“HD CUBIC:ON” appears in the front panel display and the HD³
while this unit is in the CINEMA DSP HD³ mode. CINEMA
DSP HD³ mode creates the intensive and stereoscopic sound
field in the listening room.
– when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.
– when this unit is in the “11ch Stereo” mode.
•
“HD CUBIC:OFF” appears in the front panel display and the
HD³ indicator disappears when the CINEMA DSP HD³ mode is
turned off. Conventional CINEMA DSP mode creates the large
and expanding sound field in the listening room.
■ Enjoying multi-channel sources and sound field
programs with headphones (SILENT CINEMA)
SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel music or
movie sound through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA
activates automatically whenever you connect headphones to the
PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound
CINEMA indicator lights up in the front panel display.
Notes
• “HD CUBIC:––” appears when the CINEMA DSP HD³ mode is not
available.
• If you set “Front Presence” to “None”, this unit cannot activate the
CINEMA DSP HD³ mode.
• This unit activates the CINEMA DSP HD³ mode only when you select one
of the CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs (except the “11ch
Stereo” mode).
Notes
• SILENT CINEMA does not activate when the component connected to the
“STRAIGHT” mode.
• When your headphones are connected to this unit, this unit cannot activate
the CINEMA DSP HD³ mode.
Enjoying unprocessed input sources
When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode, 2-channel stereo
sources are output from only the front left and right speakers and
multi-channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate
channels without any additional effect processing.
y
page 78 for details.
H
R
Press STRAIGHT (or STRAIGHT) to select
“STRAIGHT”.
STRAIGHT
y
• The names of the audio signal format of the input source and the active
decoder appear in the front panel display.
• You can select the extended surround mode used with the “STRAIGHT”
■ Deactivating the “STRAIGHT” mode
H
R
Press STRAIGHT (or STRAIGHT) so that
“STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel display.
The sound effect is turned back on.
y
I
You can also select desired sound field program by rotating PROGRAM
(or press one of the desired sound field program buttons (Q)) repeatedly.
60 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operation
Using audio features
Before performing the following operation, set the operation mode
Notes
F
selector on the remote control to AMP.
• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the
low-frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the surround
speakers may not match that of the front L/R and center speakers and the
subwoofer.
Enjoying pure hi-fi sound
Use the Pure Direct mode to enjoy the pure fidelity sound of the
selected source. When the Pure Direct mode is activated, this unit
plays back the selected source with the least circuitry.
• TONE CONTROL is not effective when PURE DIRECT or the THX
Surround mode is selected, or when MULTI CH is selected as the input
source.
y
C
M
Press PURE DIRECT (or PURE DIRECT) to turn
on or off the Pure Direct mode.
Use “Tone Control” parameter in “Sound” menu to adjust the balance of
bass and treble output to your speakers or headphones by using GUI menu.
See page 88 for details.
The CPURE DIRECT button on the front panel lights up and the
front panel display automatically turns off while this unit is in the
Pure Direct mode.
Adjusting the speaker level
You can adjust the output level of each speaker while listening to a
music source. This is also possible when playing sources input at
the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
Notes
• When you set Audio input jack selects to “Auto”, “HDMI”, or “Coax/Opt”
(see page 52) and play back the bitstreams or multi-channel PCM sources,
this unit activates the corresponding decoder.
• The following operations are not possible when this unit is in the Pure
Direct mode:
Note
This operation will override the level adjustments made in “Auto Setup”
– switching the sound field program
– displaying the GUI menu
– operating video functions (video conversion, etc.)
• The Pure Direct mode is automatically canceled whenever this unit is
turned off.
8
Press LEVEL on the remote control repeatedly to
1
select the speaker you want to adjust
.
• When you set “Pure Direct” in “Manual Setup” to “Video On”, you can
cannot use the GUI menu while this unit is un the Pure Direct mode even if
“Pure Direct” in “Manual Setup” to “Video On”.
• While this unit is in the Pure Direct mode, you cannot activate Zone 2,
Zone 3, and Zone 4, and when this unit is in the Pure Direct mode, Zone 2,
Zone 3, and Zone 4 are automatically tuned off.
Display
Adjusted speaker
Front left speaker
FRONT L
FRONT R
CENTER
SUR. L
SUR. R
SB L
Front right speaker
Center speaker
y
Surround left speaker
Surround right speaker
Surround back left speaker
Surround back right speaker
Subwoofer left
The front panel display turns on momentarily when an operation is
performed.
Adjusting the tonal quality
Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble for the front
L/R and center speaker channels and the subwoofer channel.
SB R
SWFR L
SWFR R
FP L
Subwoofer right
M
Press TONE CONTROL on the front panel.
1
2
Front presence left speaker
Front presence right speaker
Rear presence left speaker
Rear presence right speaker
I
Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select the high-
frequency response (TREBLE), or the low-frequency
response (BASS).
FP R
RP L
RP R
I
Rotate PROGRAM to adjust the high-frequency
response (TREBLE), or the low-frequency response
(BASS).
3
y
8
Once you press LEVEL on the remote control, you can also select
the speaker by pressing 9k/ n.
Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB
2
Press 9l/ hto adjust the speaker output level.
• Press 9hto increase the value.
• Press 9lto decrease the value.
Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
61 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
Recording
Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating instructions for those
components.
Caution
The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if
you want to use this unit to record sources encoded in DTS, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. To play DTS-
encoded DVDs and CDs (when using a digital audio connection) on your DTS-compatible player, follow its operating instructions to
make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player.
Notes
• When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit.
• TONE CONTROL (see page 61) and the volume settings, the speaker level (see page 86) and the sound field programs (see page 54) do not affect recorded
material.
• When this unit is in the Pure Direct mode, no signals output at the AUDIO OUT jacks.
• The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks on this unit cannot be recorded.
• The Internet Radio, PC or MCX audio signals are only output at the analog AUDIO OUT jacks.
• Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT jacks for recording. Likewise, analog signals input at the
AUDIO IN jacks are not output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your source component is connected to provide only digital or analog signals,
you can only record digital or analog signals.
• A given input source is not output on the same AUDIO OUT channel.
• S-video and composite video signals pass independently through the video circuits of this unit. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals input
from a video source component that provides only an S-video or a composite video signal, you can record only an S-video or a composite video signal on
your VCR.
• The analog audio and video signals input at the DOCK terminal can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT jacks and DVR or VCR OUT jacks for recording.
• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws.
y
Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.
If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those
signals.
1
2
Turn on all the connected components.
L
Press REC OUT/ZONE2 until the RECOUT
indicator lights up in the front panel display.
This unit in the recording source selecting mode.
RECOUT
I
Rotate PROGRAM to select the source
component you want to record from.
3
Carry out the operation while the RECOUT indicator is lit.
y
Select “SOURCE” to record the currently selected input source.
4
5
Start playback on the selected source component or
select a broadcast station.
Start recording on the recording component.
62 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Internal Source
Operation
Using a PC server or Yamaha MCX-2000 ........................................................................ 68
Using a USB storage device or a USB portable audio player .......................................... 69
Using shortcut buttons ...................................................................................................... 70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using iPod™
Using iPod™
Once you have stationed your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal
on this unit (see page 36), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control. You can also use the Compressed Music
Enhancer mode of this unit to enhance the sound quality of the compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) stored on your iPod (see
Notes
• Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported.
• Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod.
y
• For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and video monitor, see the “iPod” section in “Troubleshooting” on page 126.
• Once your iPod is stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal on this unit, this unit
begins signal transmission with your iPod.
• Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears in the front panel display.
• Your iPod battery is automatically charged when your iPod is stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to
the DOCK terminal on this unit as long as this unit is turned on. You can also select whether this unit charges the battery of the stationed iPod or not when
this unit is in the standby mode by selecting the “Standby Charge” parameter in “iPod” (see page 93).
• While the stationed iPod is being charged in the standby mode of this unit, the battery charge indicator (see page 40) appears in the front panel display. Once
the charge is complete (or after 4 hours from the start of the charge), the indicator disappears.
■ Controlling iPod in the menu browse mode
Controlling iPod™
You can perform the advanced operations of your iPod using the
supplied remote control with the aid of the video monitor. The name
You can control your iPod when “DOCK” is selected as the input
of the song being played appears in the front panel display
source. The operations of your iPod can be done with the aid of the
according to the “Scroll” parameter in “Front Panel Disp.” (see
GUI screen of this unit (menu browse mode) or without it (simple
remote mode).
by using your video monitor. Further, you can change or adjust
settings for your iPod to suit your personal preferences.
■ Remote control operation
Notes
Before performing the following operations, set the operation mode
F
selector on the remote control to SOURCE and then press 3DOCK.
• Operations cannot be done with the controls on your iPod.
• There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the front panel
display or in the GUI screen of this unit. Those characters are replaced
with underscores “_”.
• You cannot browse the photos or video clips stored on your iPod in the
GUI screen. Use the simple remote mode to enjoy watching the photos or
video clips stored on your iPod.
• You can set the time for which the GUI screen of iPod is displayed in the
video monitor by using the “On Screen” parameter in “Manual Setup” (see
page 90).
Button
Function
9
ENTER
Subsequent menu
Menu up
k
n
Menu down
l
h
Previous menu
Subsequent menu
Before performing the following operations, set the operation mode
A ll
hh
a
b
s
Search backward (Press and hold)
Search forward (Press and hold)
Skip forward
F
selector on the remote control to SOURCE and then press 3DOCK.
K
Press DISPLAY on the remote control.
The following display appears in the video monitor.
1
Skip backward
Stop
e
Pause (Menu browse mode)
Play/Pause (Simple remote mode)
Top
Playlist
Artists
Albums
Songs
Genres
Composers
Settings
p
Play (Menu browse mode)
Play/Pause (Simple remote mode)
I
K
MENU
DISPLAY
Previous menu
Display
■ Controlling iPod in the simple remote mode
You can perform the basic operations of your iPod (play, stop, skip,
etc.) using the supplied remote control without the aid of the video
monitor.
y
• You can view the photos or video clips stored on your iPod (some models
only).
• Operations can be also done with the controls on your iPod.
64 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using iPod™
■ The functions of the play information display
9
Press k/ n/ l/ hto navigate the iPod menu and
9
then press ENTER to begin playback of the
selected song.
2
iPod Information
5
6
1/9
1
Choices: Playlist (playlists), Artists (artists),
Albums (albums), Songs (songs),
Genres (genres), Composers (composers), Settings
(settings)
Frankie Zipper
7
Made-to-order
2
Road to India
3
8
• Playlist > Songs
• Artists > Albums > Songs
• Albums > Songs
0:51
-7:44
4
9
• Songs
1 Track number/total tracks
2 Name of the album
3 Name of the song
4 Elapsed time
• Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs
• Composers > Albums > Songs
• Settings > Shuffle, Repeat
Shuffle (Shuffle)
Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in random
order.
Choices: Off, Songs, Albums
5
(playback),
(pausing), (search forward) or
•
•
•
Select “Off”to deactivate this feature.
Select “Songs” to set this unit to play songs in random order.
Select “Albums” to set this unit to play albums in random order.
(search backward)
6 Shuffle and repeat icons
7 Name of the artist
8 Progress bar
Notes
• When “Shuffle” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, “
” appears in the
top right corner while songs or albums are being shuffled.
• Press 9ENTER repeatedly to toggle between the settings of “Shuffle”.
9 Remaining time
Repeat (Repeat)
Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a sequence of
songs.
Choices: Off, One, All
•
•
•
Select “Off”to deactivate this feature.
Select “One” to set this unit to repeat one song.
Select “All” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of songs.
Notes
• When “Repeat” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, “ ” or “ ” appears
in the top right corner while one song or a sequence of songs are being
repeated.
• Press 9ENTER repeatedly to toggle between the settings of “Repeat”.
y
Press KDISPLAY again to turn off the iPod menu.
iPod menu in the Zone OSD
You can control your iPod by using the Zone OSD. The design and
functions may be different from the iPod menu displayed in the video
monitor in the main zone.
65 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Network/USB features
Using Network/USB features
This unit is equipped with network and USB features that allow you to enjoy WAV (PCM format only), MP3, MPEG-4 AAC, and WMA files
saved on your PC, Yamaha MCX-2000, USB storage device and USB portable audio player or access the Internet Radio.
Notes
• Yamaha MCX-2000 may not be for sale in some locations.
• For further details about networking, refer to the operation manuals supplied with your network devices. Also refer to technical reference books, if needed.
• Some WAV, MP3, MPEG-4 AAC, and WMA files may not be playable or may be noisy when played.
y
For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and video monitor, see the “Network and USB” section in “Troubleshooting” on
Navigating the network and USB menus
The following diagram shows the construction of the network and USB menu.
NET/USB
PC/MusicCAST
(MCX-2000)
Server*
Selects an Internet Radio station that has been added to the “Bookmark” list (see page 69).
Selects an Internet Radio station that you add to the list of the stations.
Selects an Internet Radio station or a Podcast service by location.
Internet Radio
Bookmark
My Added Station
Location
Selects an Internet Radio station or a Podcast service by genre.
Genres
Selects an Internet Radio station from the ones that have recently started the service.
Selects an Internet Radio station from the list of popular stations.
Selects a Podcast service by location or genre.
New Stations
Popular Stations
Podcasts
Broadcasts voice-assisted guidelines on various topics of the related Internet service.
Help
Selects a file by navigating directories.
USB
Files/Directories
Note
* Only the available PC servers and MCX-2000 are displayed.
y
66 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Network/USB features
The following procedure shows the basic steps to navigate the
sub input source.
9
Press ENTER to play the selected song or to listen
to the selected station.
5
Before performing the following operations, set the operation mode
y
F
• Some items do not appear in the play information display depending on
the selected sub input source.
selector on the remote control to SOURCE.
• You can set the time for which the GUI screen of the network/USB is
displayed in the video monitor by using “On Screen” in “Manual Setup”
3
Press NET/USB on the remote control to select
“NET/USB” as the input source.
The cursor on the left of the NET/USB indicator lights up in
the front panel display, and the contents previously played for
the corresponding sub input source of NET/USB is
automatically played.
1
• Press KDISPLAY again to turn off the Network/USB menu.
■ Remote control operation
Before performing the following operations, set the operation mode
Lights up
F
selector on the remote control to SOURCE and then press 3NET/
USB.
NET V-AUX
USB DOCK
CBL
SAT
BD
MD
VCR
DVR
DTV DVD
CD-R CD PHONO MULTI CH TUNER
HD DVD
TAPE
Button
TITLE
Function
*1
8
Bookmark
Up
9 k
n
Down
K
2
Press DISPLAY to display the top NET/USB menu.
The following display appears in the video monitor.
If any other screen appears in the video monitor, press
l
Previous menu
Subsequent menu
Subsequent menu
Memory
h
I
MENU on the remote control repeatedly until the top NET/
USB menu appears.
ENTER
MEMORY
NET RADIO
USB
0
A
Select “NET RADIO”
Top
Select “USB”
PC/MusicCAST
Internet Radio
USB
b
Skip backward (“PC/MCX” and “USB” only)
a
Skip forward (“PC/MCX” and “USB” only)
PC/MCX
s
Select “PC/MCX”
Stop
Play
p
*2
B
I
K
1 – 8
Numeric buttons (1-8)
MENU
DISPLAY
Previous menu
Display
9
Press k/ nto select the desired sub input source
3
4
9
9
and then press hor ENTER.
*1 Press and hold to store your favorite Internet Radio stations with
y
A
You can also select the desired sub input source by pressing PC/
, A
A
NET RADIO, or USB when “NET/USB” is selected as
MCX
the input source. This unit automatically starts playback of the last
selected music file, Internet Radio station, or Podcast when you press
Network/USB menu in the Zone OSD
You can use the network/USB feature with the Zone OSD. The design
and functions may be different from the network/USB menu displayed in
the video monitor in the main zone.
A
, A
A
PC/MCX
NET RADIO, or USB.
9
Press k/ n/ l/ hto select the desired song or
Internet Radio station.
9
• Press k/ nto select the desired menu.
9
• Press hto enter the selected menu.
9
• Press lto return to the previous menu level.
y
• “>” in the right corner of each menu line indicates that there is a
submenu available in the next menu level.
I
• You can also press 9ENTER or MENU to enter the selected
menu or to return to the previous menu level.
67 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Network/USB features
■ Installing Windows Media Player 11 on your PC
With Windows Media Player 11, you can play back the audio files
on your PC. For details refer to the documents of Windows Media
Player 11.
Using a PC server or Yamaha
MCX-2000
Use this feature to enjoy music files saved on your PC or Yamaha
MCX-2000. MCX-2000 is a music server that enhances the concept
of Yamaha exclusive MusicCAST, a digital music delivery method
over a personal network.
y
You can also play back the audio files on your PC with Windows Media
Connect 2.0 installed.
1
2
Install Windows Media Player 11 on your PC.
You can download the installer of Windows Media Player 11
from the Microsoft website, or use the upgrade function of the
installed Microsoft Windows Media Player.
1
Install Windows Media Player 11 on your PC, or
register this unit on your Yamaha MCX-2000.
• Refer to “Installing Windows Media Player 11 on your PC”
and “Registering this unit on the Yamaha MCX-2000” on
page 68.
• This procedure is needed only the first time.
• (PC only) You may need to make some setting of Windows
Media Player 11 to start the contents sharing. Refer to the
attached documents of Windows Media Player 11.
Turn on your PC and then share a folder on the PC.
The Shared folder is added to the server list on the submenu of
PC/MusicCAST.
Notes
• If the operating system (OS) of your PC is Windows Vista, Windows
Media Player 11 is pre-installed (except some products).
• Some security software installed on your PC (anti-virus software, firewall
software, etc.) may block the access of this unit to your PC. In such cases,
configure the security software appropriately.
2
3
Turn on your PC or MCX-2000.
The PC server or MCX-2000 is added to the server list on the
submenu of PC/MusicCAST.
Select a desired server or MusicCAST to begin
playback.
■ Registering this unit on the Yamaha MCX-2000
You must register this unit on your Yamaha MCX-2000 so that this
unit can be recognized by your Yamaha MCX-2000. For details,
refer to the operation manual supplied with your Yamaha MCX-
2000.
Notes
• Yamaha MCX-2000 may not be for sale in some locations.
• You can connect this unit to up to 15 PC servers and 1
MCX-2000, and each server must be connected to the same subnet as this
unit.
• Some WAV, MP3, MPEG-4 AAC, and WMA files on your PC may not be
playable or may be noisy when played.
• (MCX-2000 only) Files marked with an asterisk (*) have not been
converted to MP3 format. You cannot play back such files immediately
unless you set the “Receive PCM Stream” setting of this unit to “ON” on
MCX-2000. For details, refer to the instruction manual of MCX-2000.
1
2
Turn off this unit.
Set your Yamaha MCX-2000 to the “Auto Config”
mode.
3
Turn on this unit.
• MCX-2000 is added to the server list on the submenu of PC/
MCX.
y
• While a song is being played, the time elapsed is displayed at the bottom
of the playback information screen.
• You can use b/ ato skip backward/forward and
A
• The client ID of this unit appears in the OSD of your
Yamaha MCX-2000 (shown as CL-XXXXX), and this
completes the automatic configuration procedure.
A
h/ sto start/stop playback independently from the menu in the video
monitor.
Notes
• You can set the settings for repeat and shuffle mode by using the “Play
• You can set the front panel display mode by using the “Scroll” parameter
• The latter part of the client ID of this unit is same as the last 5 digits of the
• To clear the registered client ID of this unit, use the “Manual Config”
mode of your Yamaha MCX-2000 (refer to the instruction manual of
MCX-2000) and then set “INITIALIZE” in the advanced setup menu of
this unit to “NETWORK” (see page 119).
• The client control functions of MusicCAST over this unit other than “View
Play Info”, “Receive PCM Stream” and “Edit Client title” are not
available. Avoid using these functions as it will stop the playback on this
unit.
68 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Network/USB features
Using the Internet Radio
Use this feature to listen to Internet Radio stations. This unit uses
the vTuner Internet Radio station database service particularly
customized for this unit, providing over 2000 radio station database.
Further, you can store your favorite stations with bookmarks.
Using a USB storage device or a USB
portable audio player
Use this feature to enjoy WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA and
MPEG-4 AAC files saved on your USB storage device or USB
portable audio player connected to the USB port on the front panel
of this unit.
This unit is equipped with the front and rear USB ports. Set “USB
Select” in “Input Select” to “Front” or “Rear” to select the active
Notes
• This service may be discontinued without notice.
• Some Internet Radio stations may not be played even if they are selected in
the NET RADIO menu.
• To listen to the Internet Radio, connect this unit to your network (see
page 37).
Notes
• This unit supports USB mass storage class or USB MTP devices using
FAT 16 or FAT 32.
• Only the first partition is displayed in the GUI menu. You cannot select
files in other partitions.
• A narrowband Internet connection (i.e. 56K modem, ISDN) will not
provide satisfactory results, and a broadband connection is strongly
recommended (i.e. a cable modem, an xDSL modem, etc.). For detailed
information, consult with your ISP.
• Up to 8 levels of directory hierarchy and 500 music files per directory are
recognized.
• Some devices may not work properly even if they meet the requirements.
• Some WAV, MP3, WMA and MPEG-4 AAC files may not be playable or
may be noisy when played.
y
A
• You can use h/ sto start/stop playback independently from the menu
in the video monitor.
• “Podcast” is a type of the Internet Radio service, and there are a number of
Podcast services available on the Internet. The Podcast is not a continuous
service. That is, this unit stops playback when an episode of the Podcast
ends.
• When you connect your USB storage device or USB portable audio player,
there may be an about 10 seconds delay.
y
• Some security devices (such as firewall) may block the access of this unit
to Internet Radio stations. In such cases, configure the security settings
appropriately.
• While a song is being played, the time elapsed is displayed at the bottom
of the playback information screen.
A
A
• You can use b/ ato skip backward/forward and h/ sto
start/stop playback independently from the menu in the video monitor.
• You can set the settings for repeat and shuffle mode by using the “Play
• You can set the front panel display mode by using the “Scroll” parameter
■ Storing your favorite Internet Radio stations
with bookmarks
Use this feature to select your favorite Internet Radio stations
quickly.
8
Press and hold TITLE on the remote control while the
selected Internet Radio station service is being
broadcast.
The stored Internet Radio station is added to the “Bookmark” list
y
• To remove the stored station from the list, select the item in the first level
8
of the “Bookmark” list and then press and hold TITLE on the remote
control.
• You can also register your favorite Internet Radio stations to this unit by
accessing the following website with the web browser on your PC. To use
this feature, you need the MAC address of this unit as the ID number and
your e-mail address to create your personal account. Use “Information” in
the “Network” menu to display the MAC address of this unit (see
page 92). For details, refer to the help information on the website.
URL: http://yradio.vtuner.com/
69 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Network/USB features
■ Select an item by using numeric buttons (1-8)
Using shortcut buttons
B
(
)
Use this feature to access the desired music sources (WAV, MP3 and
WMA files on the connected PC, MCX-2000 or USB storage
devices and Internet Radio stations) directly. You can preset 8 items
in each sub input sources.
Before performing the following operations, set the operation mode
F
selector on the remote control to SOURCE.
3
Press NET/USB to select “NET/USB” as the input
source.
1
■ Assigning the items to the numeric button (1-8)
Before performing the following operations, set the operation mode
F
selector on the remote control to SOURCE.
2
3
Select the desired sub input source.
Press one of the numeric button (1-8) (B) which the
desired item is assigned to select the item as the
input source.
3
Press NET/USB to select “NET/USB” as the input
1
source.
The selected preset number appears in the front panel display,
and this unit starts the playback of the source assigned to the
selected numeric button.
2
3
Select a desired music source you want to assign to
the numeric button (1-8) (B), and then play back the
source.
NET V-AUX
USB DOCK
CBL
SAT
BD
MD
VCR
DVR
DTV DVD
CD-R CD PHONO MULTI CH TUNER
See page 67 for details.
HD DVD
TAPE
1: PC/MCX
0
Press MEMORY.
This unit in the memory preset mode. The MEMORY indicator
flashes and following message appears in the video monitor
and front panel display.
Selected preset number
NET V-AUX
USB DOCK
CBL
SAT
BD
MD
VCR
DVR
DTV DVD
CD-R CD PHONO MULTI CH TUNER
Notes
HD DVD
TAPE
MEMORY
-: PC/MCX
• “Empty Memory!” appears in the front panel display and the short
message display when you press the numeric button (1-8) (B) to
which no items are assigned.
• This unit does not recall the correct item assigned to the selected
numeric button (1-8) (B) in the following cases:
– the connected USB device is incorrect.
– the PC or MCX-2000 which stores the selected item is turned off or
disconnected from the network.
Preset number
Flashes
y
When you do not complete each of the following steps within 10 seconds,
the memory preset mode is automatically canceled. In this case, start over
from step 3.
– the selected Internet Radio station is temporary unavailable or out
of service.
– the directory of the selected item has been changed.
4
Press desired numeric buttons (1-8) (B).
The number of the selected numeric button appears in the video
monitor or front panel display.
y
This unit stores the relative position of the preset items in a directory or
playlist, and does not recall the correct item by using numeric buttons
(1-8) (B) if you add or delete music files to or from the same directory
or playlist as the preset items. In such cases, preset the desired item to
the numeric buttons (1-8) (B) again.
NET V-AUX
USB DOCK
CBL
SAT
BD
MD
VCR
DVR
DTV DVD
CD-R CD PHONO MULTI CH TUNER
HD DVD
TAPE
MEMORY
1: PC/MCX
We recommend the following methods:
PC server/MCX-2000
Create eight playlists which contain the desired items, and then preset
the top item of each playlist to the numeric buttons (1-8) (B). When
you change the items which are preset to the numeric buttons (1-8)
(B), replace the registered items in the playlist with the desired items
without deleting the playlist.
Selected preset number
Flashes
9
0
5
Press ENTER or MEMORY to confirm the
preset.
USB storage devices
Create eight directories which contain the desired items in a directory
beside the directory which contains all music files, and then preset the
top item of each directory to the numeric buttons (1-8) (B). When you
change the items which are preset to the numeric buttons (1-8) (B),
replace the items in the directory to the desired items without deleting
the directory.
70 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operation
GUI menu overview ................................................................................................................ 76
Manual Setup (Volume) ........................................................................................................... 86
Manual Setup (Video) ............................................................................................................. 89
Language ................................................................................................................................. 95
Saving the current system settings .......................................................................................... 96
Using examples ....................................................................................................................... 99
Controlling this unit by using the Web browser
(Web Control Center) ..................................................................... 101
Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components .................................................................. 102
Customizing the remote control ............................................................................................ 104
Changing source names in the display window (RNAME) .................................................. 106
Clearing configurations ......................................................................................................... 109
Step1: Planning the multi-zone system ................................................................................. 111
Step2: Connecting the speakers, external amplifiers, and/or other components ................... 112
Using the party mode ............................................................................................................ 118
Advanced setup ................................................................................. 119
Using the advanced setup menu ............................................................................................ 119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced sound configurations
Advanced sound configurations
y
When you select the surround decode mode for the multi-channel digital sources, this
Selecting decoders
unit automatically selects the corresponding decoder for each source.
■ Selecting decoders for 2-channel sources
(surround decode mode)
Use this feature to play back sources with selected decoders. You
can play back 2-channel sources on multi-channels.
■ Selecting decoders used with sound field
programs
Use this feature to select the desired decoder used with MOVIE
sound field programs (except “Mono Movie”) or THX Surround
mode. Use “Decoder Type” parameter in “Stereo/Surround” to set
F
Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then
Q
press SUR. DECODE repeatedly on the remote
Available decoders (Decoder Type)
control to select the surround decode mode.
You can select desired surround decoder modes depending on the
type of source you are playing and your personal preference.
For MOVIE sound field programs (see page 58)
Choices: PLIIx Movie (PLII Movie), Neo:6 Cinema
y
For THX Cinema mode
Choices: Pro Logic, PLIIx Movie (PL II Movie), Neo:6
Cinema, Off
You can select the desired decoder and adjust the decoder parameter settings by using
■ Decoder descriptions
For THX Music mode
Choices: Pro Logic, PLIIx Music (PL II Music), Neo:6 Music,
Off
Name of the
decoder
(Decoder Type)
PLIIx Music
PLII Music
For THX Games mode
Choices: Pro Logic, PL II Game, Neo:6 Cinema, Off
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources.
The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “Surround Back” is set to
“None” or using headphones (see page 84).
Notes
When you select “Decoder Type” to “Off” in the THX Surround mode, this unit
activates the decoder corresponding to the input source.
Decoder description
■ Selecting decoders for multi-channel sources
If you connected surround back speakers, use this feature to enjoy
6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-channel sources using the Dolby
Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX, or DTS-ES decoders.
Pro Logic
Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources.
PLIIx Movie
PLII Movie
1
Set the operation mode selector to FAMP and then
press NEXTD SUR. on the remote control
repeatedly to switch between 5.1 and 6.1/7.1-channel
playback.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for movie sources.
The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “Surround Back” is set to
“None” or using headphones (see page 84).
Choice
AUTO
Functions
PLIIx Music
PLII Music
Activates the optimum decoder to play back signals
in 6.1/7.1 channels when this unit recognizes a
signal flag being input.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources.
The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “Surround Back” is set to
“None” or using headphones (see page 84).
Use this feature to activate the desired decoders for
the playback of multi-channel sources manually.
Decoders
(PLIIx Movie,
PLIIx Music,
EX/ES, EX)
PLIIx Game
PLII Game
Does not use any decoders to create 6.1/7.1
channels.
OFF
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for game sources. The
Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “Surround Back” is set to “None”
or using headphones (see page 84).
2
Press 9l/ hrepeatedly to select a decoder while
the name of the decoder is displayed when you
select other than “AUTO” or “OFF”.
Neo:6 Music
DTS processing for music sources.
y
Use this feature to activate the desired decoder manually when this unit cannot detect
the signal flag encoded to the input sources correctly.
Neo:6 Cinema
DTS processing for movie sources.
72 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced sound configurations
■ For multi-channel sources
You can select the following THX Surround programs.
Notes
• The available decoders vary depending on the setting of the speakers and the input
sources.
Ultra2 Cinema
Surround EX
Cinema
• 6.1/7.1-channel playback is not possible in the following cases:
– when “Surround” (see page 84) or “Surround Back” (see page 84) is set to “None”.
– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is being played.
– when the source being played does not contain surround left and right channel
signals.
– when a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played.
– when this unit is in the stereo playback, 11ch Enhancer (see page 59) or Pure Direct
(see page 61) mode.
THX Surround modes for the multi-channel movie sources. When this
unit activates the Dolby Digital EX decoder (see left), this unit
automatically selects the THX Surround EX mode, and when this unit
activates the decoders for 6.1/7.1-channel playback or when “Surround
Back” is set to “Large x1”, “Small x1”, or “None” (see page 84), this unit
automatically selects the THX Cinema mode.
– when “BI-AMP” is set to “ON” (see page 120).
Playing back sources with the THX
Surround modes
Ultra2 Music
Music
Use this feature to play back sources with the accurate surround
processing programs compliant with the THX specifications.
THX Surround mode for the multi-channel music sources.
When “Surround Back” is set to “Large x1”, “Small x1”, or “None” (see
page 84), this unit automatically selects the THX Music mode.
I
Rotate PROGRAM (or set the operation mode selector
to FAMP and then press QTHX repeatedly) to select
the desired THX Surround mode.
Ultra2 Games
Games
You can select the THX Surround mode for movies, music, or
games.
THX Surround mode for the multi-channel game audio.
When “Surround Back” is set to “Large x1”, “Small x1”, or “None” (see
page 84), this unit automatically selects the THX Games mode.
■ For 2-channel sources
You can select the following THX Surround programs.
y
To optimize the speaker settings for the THX Surround modes, set the parameters in
“THX Set” (see page 83) appropriately.
Cinema
System Memory
THX Surround mode for the 2-channel movie sources. This unit decodes
the sources by the selected decoder.
You can store the settings of this unit optimized for the THX
Surround modes and recall then easily by using the system
memory feature. See page 96 for details.
Music
THX Surround mode for the 2-channel music sources. This unit decodes
the sources by the selected decoder before THX processing.
Games
THX Surround mode for the 2-channel game audio. This unit decodes the
sources by the selected decoder before THX processing.
y
When this unit is in the THX Cinema, THX Music, or THX Games mode, you can
73 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
DSP-Z11 GUI menu tree
Stereo/Surround
Input Select
TUNER
MULTI CH
PHONO
CD
CD-R
MD/TAPE
BD/HD DVD
DVD
DTV
CBL/SAT
DVR
VCR
V-AUX
DOCK
NET/USB
Adaptive DRC
Adaptive DSP Lvl
Max Volume
Manual Setup
Volume
Initial Volume
Muting Type
LFE Level
Speakers
Headphones
Speakers
Sound
Dynamic Range
Headphones
S-Wave Control
Parametric EQ
Tone Control
Control
Bass
Treble
Auto Bypass
HDMI Auto
Auto
Lipsync
Manual
Pure Direct
Channel Mute
Conversion
Video
HDMI Processing
Component I/P
HDMI Resolution
HDMI Aspect
Short Message
On Screen
Position
Wall Paper
Test Tone
THX Set
Basic
THX Ultra2 SWFR
Bndry Gain Comp
SB Speaker Dist.
THX Loudness Plus
Front
Speaker Set
Center
Surround
Surround Back
Front Presence
Rear Presence
Subwoofer
Configuration
Phase
Bass Out
Speaker Distance
Speaker Level
74 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
Multi Zone
Speaker B
Zone SP Assign
Party Mode Set
Zone2 Set
Zone2 Volume
Zone2 Max Vol.
Zone2 Initial Vol.
Zone2 Balance
Zone2 Mono
Muting Type
Zone3 Set
Zone3 Volume
Zone3 Max Vol.
Zone3 Initial Vol.
Zone3 Balance
Zone3 Mono
Muting Type
Zone4 Set
Zone4 Volume
Zone4 Max Vol.
Zone4 Initial Vol.
Zone4 Balance
Zone4 Mono
Muting Type
Zone OSD
Network
Configuration
Information
Option
Front Panel Disp.
iPod
Audio Select
Decoder Mode
EXTD Surround
Memory Guard
HDMI Set
Trigger Output
Trigger1
Trigger2
Main
Main Load
Main Save
System Memory
Main Rename
Zone2
Zone3
Zone4
Zone2 Load
Zone2 Save
Zone2 Rename
Zone3 Load
Zone3 Save
Zone3 Rename
Zone4 Load
Zone4 Save
Zone4 Rename
Signal Info.
Audio Info.
Video Info.
English
Language
Français
Deutsch
Español
Русский
75 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
GUI menu overview
This unit features a sophisticated graphical user interface (GUI) menu that helps you to control the amplifier function of this unit. With the
GUI menu, you can view the information of the signals being input and the status of this unit.
Stereo/Surround
Input Select
Manual Setup
Auto Setup
Volume
Sound
Video
System Memory
■ Stereo/Surround (Stereo/Surround menu)
Use this feature to select the sound field programs and customize the program parameter settings (see page 77).
■ Input Select (Input select menu)
Use this feature to select the input source and customize the parameters of each input source (see page 81).
■ Manual Setup (Manual setup menu)
Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters.
Volume (Volume menu)
See page 86 for details.
Sound (Sound menu)
See page 86 for details.
Video (Video menu)
See page 89 for details.
Basic (Basic menu)
See page 83 for details.
Multi Zone (Multi-zone menu)
See page 91 for details.
Network (Network and USB menu)
See page 92 for details.
Option (Option menu)
See page 93 for details.
■ Auto Setup (Automatic setup menu)
Use this feature to run the automatic setup and specify which speaker parameters to be adjusted (see page 42).
■ System Memory (System memory menu)
■ Signal Info. (Signal information)
■ Language (GUI language menu)
Use this feature to select the language of your choice that appears in the GUI menu of this unit (see page 95).
y
• You can also select the GUI language using “LANGUAGE” parameter in “Advanced setup” in the front panel display (see page 120).
76 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
Adjusting the vertical dialogue position
Stereo/Surround
(Dialogue Lift)
Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the dialogues in
movies. The ideal position of the dialogues is at the center of the
video monitor screen.
(Stereo/Surround menu)
Use this feature to select the sound field programs (see page 54), the
surround decode mode, the THX Surround mode, or the
“STRAIGHT” mode (see page 60), and adjust the parameters of
each program.
The ideal
dialogue
position
■ Basic configuration of sound field programs
Each sound field program has some parameters defining the
characteristics of the program. To customize the selected sound
field program, adjust “DSP Level” and/or “Dialogue Lift” first, and
then try other parameters.
If the dialogues are heard at the lower position of the video monitor
screen, increase the value of “Dialogue Lift”.
Adjusting the effect sound level of the sound field
programs (DSP Level)
Sound field programs add effect sounds (DSP effect sounds) to the
original source sound to create sound field in the listening room.
Use the “DSP Level” parameter to adjust the level of the effect
sounds.
Move up to the ideal dialogue position
Choices: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
“0” (initial setting) is the lowest position, and “5” is the highest
position.
Notes
The DSP effect
sound level is low
The DSP effect sound
level is high
• “Dialogue Lift” is available when “Front Presence” is set to “Yes” (see page 84) and
headphones are not connected.
• You cannot move the dialogue position down from the initial dialogue position.
Adjust “DSP Level” as follows:
Increase the value of “DSP Level” when
• the effect sound of the selected sound field program is too
weak.
• you cannot recognize any difference between the sound field
programs.
Decrease the value of “DSP Level” when
• the sound is vague.
• you feel that the additional sound effect is excessive.
Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB
77 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
■ Sound field parameter descriptions
You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so that the sound fields are recreated accurately in your listening room. Not
all of the following parameters are found in every program.
Sound field
parameter
Features
Decoder type. Selects the decoder used with the SUR. DECODE, THX, or MOVIE programs. See page 72 for details.
Decoder Type
Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back sound field initial delay. Changes the apparent size of the sound field by adjusting the
delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the smaller the sound field seems to the
listener.
Init. Delay
Sur. Init.Delay
SB. Init. Delay
y
When you adjust the initial delay parameters, we also recommend that you adjust the corresponding room size parameters likewise. This adjustment
is especially effective for the CINEMA DSP programs.
Control range: 1 to 99 ms (Init. Delay)
1 to 49 ms (Sur. Init. Delay and SB Init. Delay)
Source sound
Early
reflections
Time
Time
Time
Delay
Delay
Delay
Sound source
Reflection face
Small value = 1 ms
Large value = 99 ms
Room size. Presence, surround, and surround back room size. Adjusts the apparent size of the sound field. The larger the value, the larger
the surround sound field becomes. As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between
the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds, you can change the
apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one to two doubles the apparent length of the room.
Room Size
Sur. Room Size
SB. Room Size
y
When you adjust the room size parameters, we also recommend that you adjust the corresponding initial delay parameters likewise. This adjustment
is especially effective for the CINEMA DSP programs.
Control range: 0.1 to 2.0
Source sound
Early
reflections
Time
Time
Time
Sound source
Small value = 0.1
Large value = 2.0
78 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
Sound field
parameter
Features
Liveness. Surround and surround back liveness. Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the
early reflections decay. The early reflections of a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than
in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly
reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. This parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate and thus the “liveness” of the room.
Liveness
Sur. Liveness
SB. Liveness
Control range: 0 to 10
Source sound
Live
Dead
Time
Time
Time
Small reflected
sound
Large reflected
sound
Small value = 0
Large value = 10
Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB at 1 kHz. This
changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time to get more sustaining
reverberation sound, and set a shorter time to get articulate sound.
Rev. Time
Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 s
Reverberation
Source sound
Reverberation
Early reflections
60 dB
60 dB
60 dB
Rev. Time
Rev. Time
Rev. Time
Sound source
Short
reverberation
Long
reverberation
Small value = 1.0 s
Large value = 5.0 s
Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the reverberation sound.
The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel as if you are in a larger acoustic
environment.
Rev. Delay
Control range: 0 to 250 ms
Source sound
(dB)
60 dB
Reverberation
Time
Rev. Delay
Rev. Time
79 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
Sound field
parameter
Features
Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes.
Control range: 0 to 100%
Rev. Level
Source sound
Rev. Level
Time
■ Stereo program parameter descriptions
Sound field
parameter
Features
2-channel stereo direct. Bypasses the decoders and DSP processors of this unit for pure hi-fi stereo sound when playing 2-channel analog
sources.
Direct
(“2ch Stereo” only)
Choices: Auto, Off
y
• Select “Auto” to bypass the decoders, DSP processors and the tone control circuitry only when “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to “BYPASS” (see
• Select “Off” not to bypass the decoders, DSP processors and the tone control circuitry when “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to “BYPASS”.
• When multi-channel signals are input, they are downmixed to 2 channels and output from the front left and right speakers.
• The low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels are redirected to the subwoofer in the following cases:
– “Bass Out” is set to “Front & SWFR” (see page 85).
– “Front” is set to “Small” (see page 84) and “Bass Out” is set to “SWFR” (see page 85).
11-channel stereo center, surround left, surround right, surround back, presence left and presence right levels. Adjusts the volume level of
each channel in the 11-channel stereo mode. The available parameters differ depending on the speaker settings.
Center Level
Surround L Level
Surround R Level
Sur.Back L Level
Sur.Back R Level
F.PRNS L Level
F.PRNS R Level
R.PRNS L Level
R.PRNS R Level
(“11ch Stereo” only)
Control range: 0 to 100%
■ Compressed Music Enhancer mode parameter descriptions
The Compressed
Music Enhancer
mode
Features
Straight enhancer or 11-channel enhancer effect level. Select “High” or “Low” to adjust the effect for the high-frequency.
Level
(“Straight Enhancer”
and “11ch Enhancer”
only)
Choices: High, Low
■ Decoder parameter descriptions
Decoder parameter
Features
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music panorama. Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as well as the front
speakers for a wraparound effect.
Panorama
(“PLIIx Music” and “PLII Music”
only)
Choices: Off, On
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music center width. Moves the center channel output completely towards the center
speaker or towards the front left and right speakers. A larger value moves the center channel output towards the front left
and right speakers.
Center Width
(“PLIIx Music” and “PLII Music”
only)
Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from the center speaker) to
7 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers)
Initial setting: 3
80 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
Decoder parameter
Features
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music dimension. Adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear.
Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front)
Dimension
(“PLIIx Music” and “PLII Music”
only)
Initial setting: STD (standard)
DTS Neo:6 Music center image. Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center channel to make the
center channel more or less dominant as necessary.
Center Image
(“Neo:6 Music” only)
Control range: 0.0 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers) to
1.0 (center channel sound output only from the center speaker)
Initial setting: 0.3
■
Initialize (Program parameters initialization)
Use this feature to initialize the parameter of the selected sound field program.
Choices: No, Yes
Rev. Level
Dialogue Lift
Initialize
No
Yes
•
•
Select “Yes” and then press 9ENTER to set the program parameters to the factory default settings.
Select “No” (or press 9l) to cancel the program parameter initialization.
y
Use “DSP PARAM” of “INITIALIZE” in “Advanced setup” to initialize the parameters of all sound field programs (see page 120).
Notes
Input Select
Use this feature to reassign digital input/outputs, select the input
signal, rename the inputs, or adjust the level of the signal input at
each input source.
• Some parameters described above may not be available for all input sources and some
parameters are only available for specific input sources.
• You can set “Volume Trim” for each sub input source separately.
• The “Play Style” setting is effective to both “PC/MCX” and”USB”.
■ I/O Assignment
Input source
TUNER
Sub input source
Parameter
(Input/output assignment)
Volume Trim
Use this feature to assign the input/output jacks according to the
component to be used if the initial settings of this unit do not
correspond to your needs. Change the following parameters to
reassign the respective jacks and effectively connect more
components.
Once the input/output jacks are reassigned, you can select the
corresponding component by using the INPUT selector (or the
—
Rename
Volume Trim
Rename
Multi CH Assign
BGV
MULTI CH
—
—
I/O Assignment
Audio Select
Decoder Mode
Volume Trim
Rename
PHONO
CD
CD-R
MD/TAPE
BD/HD DVD
DVD
D
input selector buttons (3)).
DTV
CBL/SAT
DVR
VCR
I/O Assignment
Audio Select
Coaxial Input
Optical Input
Optical Output
Decoder Mode
I/O Assignment
Audio Select
Decoder Mode
Volume Trim
Rename
V-AUX
—
Example 1: Assigning the CD DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL
jack to “VCR”.
Volume Trim
Rename
DOCK
—
1
Select “Input Select” in the GUI menu and then select
“VCR”.
Volume Trim
Play Style
NET/USB
PC/MCX
Volume Trim
NET RADIO
USB
USB Select
Volume Trim
Play Style
2
3
Select “I/O Assignment” and then “Coaxial Input”.
5
Select “ CD”.
81 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
Example 2: Clearing a jack assignment.
Note
You can only adjust the volume for the current input source using this setting.
1
2
Select “Input Select” and then select the desired
input source (“DVD”, etc.).
■ Rename (Rename)
Use this feature to change the name of the inputs in the GUI menu
or the front panel display menu. (“DVD” is used as the source
component in the following example.)
Select “I/O Assignment” and then select the desired
jack assignment (“Coaxial Input”, “Optical Input”,
“Optical Output”, “Analog I/O”, “Component Video”,
or “HDMI”).
9
Press l / hto place the _ (underscore) under the
space or character you want to edit.
1
9
Select “None” and then press ENTER to clear the
assignment.
3
Decoder Mode
Volume Trim
Rename
CAPITAL
DVD
RESET
Notes
OK
• “None” appears in the GUI when any input source is not assigned to the input/output
jack.
• You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same type of jack.
• When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority
is given to signals input at the COAXIAL jack.
9
2
3
Press ENTER repeatedly to select a character type
(CAPITAL/SMALL/LATIN CAPITAL/LATIN SMALL/
FIGURE/MARK).
■ Audio Select (Audio input jack select)
Use this feature to select the type of the input jack you want to use.
Choice
Auto
Functions
Automatically selects input signals in the following
9
Press k/ nto select the character you want to use
9
and l / hto move to the next one.
order:
(1) HDMI
(2) Digital signals
(3) Analog signals
• You can use up to 9 characters for each memory.
9
• Press nto change the character in the following order, or
Selects only HDMI signals. When HDMI signals are not
input, no sound is output.
HDMI
9
press kto go in the reverse order:
CAPITAL A to Z, space
SMALL a to z, space
LATIN CAPITAL Ä, Ö, Ü, etc., space
Automatically selects input signals in the following
order:
(1) Digital signals input at the COAXIAL jack.
(2) Digital signals input at the OPTICAL jack.
When no signals are input, no sound is output.
Coax/Opt
LATIN SMALL
FIGURE 0 to 9, space
MARK !, #, %, &, etc., space
• Press ENTER to switch between character types.
ä, ö, ü, etc., space
Selects only analog signals. If no analog signals are
input, no sound is output.
Analog
9
9
• Press hrepeatedly to select “RESET” to set the name of
y
the input source to the initial name.
F
• You can also select the audio input jack by pressing AUDIO SELECT (or
O
Notes
• You can set the default audio input jack select of this unit by using “Audio Select” in
• The character types you can select differ depending on the setting in
Note
• If you set “Language” to “
”, you can also select Japanese characters.
This feature is not available when no digital input jack (OPTICAL, COAXIAL and
HDMI) are assigned. In addition, “HDMI” is not available as an Audio input jack select
setting when the HDMI input jacks are not used. Use “I/O Assignment” in “Input
Select” to reassign the respective input jack.
9
Press l / hrepeatedly to select “OK” and press
4
9
ENTER when complete.
■ Decoder Mode (Decoder mode)
Use this feature to switch the decoder mode. You can designate the
y
• Repeat steps 1 to 4 to rename each input.
• You can also change the name of the input source that appears in the display window
Choice
Auto
Functions
Automatically detects digital audio signal input types and
selects the appropriate decoder.
Note
You can only change the name of the current input source
(except for multi channel input sources) using this setting.
Activates the DTS decoder when digital audio signals are
input.
DTS
■ Volume Trim (Volume trimming)
Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input at each input
source. This feature is useful if you want to balance the level of each
input source to avoid sudden changes in volume when switching
between input sources.
Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB
Initial setting: 0.0 dB
y
This parameter also affects the signals output at the ZONE OUT jacks.
82 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
■ Multi CH Assign (Multi channel assignment)
Use this feature to set the direction of the signals input into the
center, subwoofer and surround channels when a source component
is connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
Notes
• If “Repeat” is set to “Single”, the setting will be reset to “Off” when this unit is
turned off.
• When you set “BGV” to “Last”, you can select the background video source by using
the remote control only.
Input Channels (Input channels)
Use this setting to select the number of channels input from an
Shuffle (Shuffle)
Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in a random
order.
Choice
Description
Choice
Functions
Deactivates the shuffle function.
Select “6ch” the connected component outputs discrete
6-channel audio signals.
6ch
Off
Select “8ch” the connected component outputs discrete
8-channel audio signals. Also set “Front Input” (see
below) to the analog audio jacks at which the front left
and right channel signals output from the connected
component are input.
On
8ch
Play songs or albums in a random order. “
in the top right corner of the playback status screen.
” appears
■ USB Select (USB port select)
Selects the component connected to the front or rear USB port as
Note
Choice
Front
Functions
Depending on the settings of the zone configuration, no sound is output at the surround
back speakers even if you set “Input Channels” to “8ch”. In this case, select “6ch” and
set the audio output setting of the source component to 6 channels.
Selects the component connected to the front USB port as
the input source.
Selects the component connected to the rear USB port as
the input source.
Rear
Front Input
(Front left and right channels input jacks)
If you selected “8ch” in “Input Channels”, you can select analog
jacks at which front left and right channel signals from an external
decoder will be input.
Choices: CD, CD-R, MD/TAPE, BD/HD DVD, DVD, DTV,
CBL/SAT, DVR, VCR, V-AUX
Manual Setup (Basic)
Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker setting.
y
• Most of the parameters described in the basic menu are set automatically when you
run “Auto Setup”. You can use the basic menu to make further adjustments, but we
recommend running “Auto Setup” first.
Note
• If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the crossover frequency, set the
volume to about half way (or slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the
maximum.
source appears in the choices of this parameter.
■ BGV (Back ground video)
Use this feature to select the video source played in the background
of the sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
■ Test Tone (Test tone)
Turns the test tone output on or off for “Speaker Set”, “Speaker
Distance”, and “Speaker Level” settings.
Choice
Functions
Selects the corresponding input source as the background
video source.
BD/HD DVD,
DTV, CBL/SAT,
DVD, DVR, VCR,
V-AUX
Choice
Functions
This unit does not output the test tone for the “Speaker
Set”, “Speaker Level”, and “Speaker Distance” settings.
Off
This unit outputs the test tone for the “Speaker Set”,
“Speaker Level”, and “Speaker Distance” settings.
While “Test Tone” is set to “On”, the volume level is
automatically set to 0 dB.
On
Automatically selects the last selected video source as the
background video source.
Last
Does not play the video source in the background.
Off
Notes
Note
• Loud test tones will be output when “On” is selected. In this case, make sure no
children are present in the listening room.
• This function is automatically turned off if you exit “Basic”.
source appears in the choices of this parameter.
■ Play Style (Playback styles)
■ THX Set (THX settings)
Use this feature to set the parameters to optimize the THX Surround
Use this feature to adjust the playback style according to your
preference. You can shuffle songs in a random order or repeat one
specific song or a sequence of songs.
THX Ultra2 SWFR (THX Ultra2 subwoofer setting)
Use this feature to select whether the connected subwoofers are the
THX Ultra2 certified subwoofers.
Repeat (Repeat)
Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a sequence of
songs.
Choice
Descriptions
Choice
Functions
Deactivates the repeat function.
Select this setting when the connected subwoofers are the
THX Ultra2 certified subwoofers.
Yes
Off
Single
Repeats one song. “ ” appears in the top right corner
of the playback status screen.
Select this setting when the connected subwoofers are not
the THX Ultra2 certified subwoofers.
No
All
Repeats a sequence of songs. “ ” appears in the top
right corner of the playback status screen.
83 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
Note
Note
When “THX Ultra2 SWFR” is set to “No”, you cannot select “Bndry Gain Comp” is
automatically set to “Off”.
When “Bass Out” is set to “Front” (see page 85), you can select only “Large” in
“Front”. If the value of “Front” is set to other than “Large” in advance, this unit change
the value to “Large” automatically.
Bndry Gain Comp (Boundary gain compensation)
Use this feature to improve boomy bass when the listening position
is closer to the rear wall.
Center (Center speaker)
Choice
Large
Descriptions
Select this setting when the center speaker is large.
Select this setting when the center speaker is small.
Choice
Descriptions
Select this setting when you do not want to use the
boundary gain compensation feature.
Off
Small
Select this setting when you do not use the center
speaker. The center channel signals are directed to the
front left and right speakers.
None
Select this setting to activate the boundary gain
compensation feature.
On
SB Speaker Dist. (Surround back speaker distance)
Use this feature to set the distance between the left surround back
speaker and right surround back speaker.
Surround (Surround left/right speakers)
Choice
Large
Descriptions
Choice
Under 1ft
Descriptions
Select this setting when the surround speakers are large.
Select this setting when the surround speakers are small.
Select this setting when the distance between the two
surround back speakers is less than 0.3 m (1 foot).
Small
(Under 0.3m)
Select this setting when you do not use the surround
speakers. This unit is set to the Virtual CINEMA DSP
automatically set to “None”.
None
Select this setting when the distance between the two
surround back speakers is 0.3 m to 1.2 m (1 foot to 4
feet).
1 – 4ft (0.3-1.2m)
Select this setting when the distance between the two
surround back speakers is over 1.2 m (4 feet).
Over 4ft
(over 1.2m)
y
See page 23 for the connection information of the surround speakers.
Surround Back
(Surround back left/right speakers)
Note
The unit used in this parameter differs depending on the setting of “Unit” in “Speaker
Distance” (see page 85).
Choice
Large x1
Descriptions
Select this setting when the single surround back speaker
is large.
THX Loudness Plus (Loudness plus setting)
THX Loudness Plus function compensates for the total and spatial
shifts that occur when the volume is reduced by intelligently
adjusting ambient surround channel levels and frequency response.
Use this feature to select whether this unit automatically activates
the THX Loudness Plus function in the THX Surround modes.
Select this setting when the surround back left and right
speakers are large.
Large x2
Small x1
Small x2
None
Select this setting when the single surround back speaker
is small.
Select this setting when the surround back left and right
speakers are small.
Choice
Descriptions
Select this setting when you do not use the surround back
speakers. The surround back channel signals are directed
to the surround left and right speakers.
Deactivates the Loudness Plus function.
Off
Activates the Loudness Plus function in the THX
Surround modes.
On
y
■ Speaker Set (Speaker settings)
Use to manually adjust any speaker setting.
See page 23 for the connection information of the surround speakers.
Cross Over (Cross over)
y
Use this feature to select the crossover frequency of the speaker(s)
that is set to “Small”. All frequencies below the selected frequency
will be sent to the subwoofers or to the speakers set to “Large” in
“Speaker Set” (see pages 84).
Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz (THX), 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz,
160Hz, 200Hz
If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers, you can change these
settings according to your preference.
Measure for the speaker size
The woofer section of a speaker is
– 16 cm (6.5 in) or larger: large
– smaller than 16 cm (6.5 in): small
y
If your subwoofers can adjust the output volume and the crossover frequency, set the
volume to about half way (or slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the
maximum.
y
THX Ltd. recommends you that you set “Front”, “Center”, “Surround”, and
“Surround Back” to “Small” and “Cross Over” to “80Hz (THX)”.
To select the crossover frequency of the speaker(s) manually, select “Small” and
then set “Cross Over” (see page 84).
Front Presence (Front presence speakers)
Use this feature if you want to use the front presence speakers
connected to this unit.
Front (Front speakers)
Choice
Descriptions
Choice
Large
Descriptions
Select this setting when you use the front presence
speakers.
Yes
Select this setting when the front speakers are large.
Select this setting when the front speakers are small.
Small
None
Select this setting when you do not use the front presence
speakers. “Rear Presence” is automatically set to “None”.
84 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
Low-frequency signals output
Notes
Subwoofers and speakers
Front
• If you set “Front Presence” to “None”, you cannot activate the CINEMA DSP HD³
• “Dialogue Lift” is available when “Front Presence” is set to “Yes” and headphones
are not connected.
Choice
Other
speakers
Subwoofers
speakers
*1
*2
*3
Front &
Rear Presence (Rear presence speakers)
Use this feature if you want to use the rear presence speakers
connected to this unit.
SWFR
SWFR
Front
*4
*3
*1
*3
*3
No output
Choice
Descriptions
*1 Output(s) the low-frequency signals of the front channels and other
speakers set to “Small”.
*2 Always output the low-frequency signals of the front channels.
*3 Output the low-frequency signals if the speakers are set to “Large”.
*4 Outputs the low-frequency signals of the speakers set to “Small” or
“None”.
Select this setting when you use the rear presence
speakers.
Yes
None
Select this setting when you do not use the rear presence
speakers.
Subwoofer (Subwoofer)
■ Speaker Distance (Speaker distance)
Configuration (Subwoofer configuration)
Use this feature to select the configuration of the subwoofers
Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each speaker and the
delay applied to the respective channel. Ideally, each speaker should be
the same distance from the main listening position. However, this is not
possible in most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay must
be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all sounds will arrive
at the listening position at the same time.
Choice
Descriptions
Select this setting when you place the subwoofers to
the front and rear of the listening room.
Front & Rear
Select this setting when you place the subwoofers to
the left and right of the listening room.
Stereo
Speaker distances
Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft)
Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
Control step: 0.05 m (0.2 ft)
Select this setting when you use a single subwoofer.
Select this setting when you do not use a subwoofer.
Monaural
None
Speaker Distance
Front L
Adjusted speaker
Front left speaker
y
If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the crossover frequency, set
the volume to about half way (or slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to
the maximum.
Front right speaker
Front R
Phase (Subwoofer phase)
Center speaker
Center
Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofers if bass
sounds are lacking or unclear.
Surround left speaker
Surround right speaker
Surround back left speaker
Surround back right speaker
Front presence left speaker
Front presence right speaker
Rear presence left speaker
Rear presence right speaker
Subwoofer left
Surround L
Surround R
Choice
Normal
Functions
Surround Back L
Surround Back R
Front Presence L
Front Presence R
Rear Presence L
Rear Presence R
Subwoofer L
Subwoofer R
Does not change the phase of your subwoofers.
Sets the phase of the left (or front) subwoofer to
reverse.
L Reverse
Sets the phase of the right (or rear) subwoofer to
reverse.
R Reverse
Sets the phase of the both subwoofers to reverse.
L&R Reverse
Bass Out (Bass out)
Subwoofer right
Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE (low-
frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals.
THX Ltd. recommends that “Bass Out” to “SWFR”.
y
If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the crossover frequency, set the
volume to about half way (or slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the
maximum.
LFE signals output
Subwoofers and speakers
Notes
Choice
Front
speakers
Other
Subwoofers
• The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of the speakers.
• If you are only using one surround back speaker, connect it to the SUR.BACK
SINGLE jack, and adjust the distance in “Surround Back L”.
speakers
Output
No output
No output
Front &
SWFR
SWFR
Front
Unit (Unit)
Output
No output
Output
No output
No output
Selects the unit for displaying the values of “Speaker Distance”
parameter.
No output
Choice
Meter (m)
Feet (ft)
Functions
Adjusts speaker distances in meters.
Adjusts speaker distances in feet.
85 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
■ Speaker Level (Speaker level)
Use this feature to manually balance the speaker levels between the
front left or surround left speakers and each speaker selected in
“Speaker Set” (see page 84).
Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
Initial setting: 0.0 dB
Notes
• The adaptive dynamic range control feature does not function when this unit is in the
Stereo mode, the adaptive dynamic range control feature does not function in some
cases.
Control step: 0.5 dB
Adaptive DSP Lvl (Adaptive DSP effect level)
Speaker Level
Front L
Adjusted speaker
Front left speaker
Use this feature to make fine adjustments of the DSP effect level
(see page 77) automatically in conjunction with the volume level.
Front right speaker
Choice
Functions
Front R
Adjusts the DSP effect level in conjunction with the
volume level.
Center speaker
Auto
Center
Surround left speaker
Surround right speaker
Surround back left speaker
Surround back right speaker
Front presence left speaker
Front presence right speaker
Rear presence left speaker
Rear presence right speaker
Subwoofer left
Surround L
Does not adjust the DSP effect level automatically.
Off
Surround R
Surround Back L
Surround Back R
Front Presence L
Front Presence R
Rear Presence L
Rear Presence R
Subwoofer L
Subwoofer R
Note
Even if you set “Adaptive DSP Lvl” to “Auto”, this unit does not change but
fine-tunes the specified value of “DSP Level” (see page 77).
Max Volume (Maximum volume)
Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the main zone.
This feature is useful to avoid the unexpected loud sound by mistake.
For example, the original volume range is –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB.
However, when “Max Volume” is set to –5.0 dB, the volume range
becomes –80.0 dB to –5.0 dB.
Subwoofer right
y
Control range: –30.0 dB to +15.0 dB, +16.5 dB
Control step: 5.0 dB
• If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the crossover frequency, set the
volume to about half way (or slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the
maximum.
Initial Volume (Initial volume)
Use this feature to set the volume level of the main zone when the
power of this unit is turned on.
• If you use a handheld sound pressure level meter, hold at arm’s length and point
upwards so that the meter is in the listening position. With the meter set to the 70 dB
scale and to C SLOW, calibrate each speaker to 75 dB.
Choices: Off, Mute, –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
Notes
• The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of the speakers.
• If you are only using one surround back speaker, connect it to the SUR.BACK
SINGLE jack, and adjust the balance in “Surround Back L”.
Notes
• The setting of “Speaker Level” changes depending on the setting of “PEQ Select” in
• When this unit is in the auto setup procedure, the volume level is automatically set to
0 dB regardless of the current “Max Volume” setting.
• The “Max Volume” setting takes priority over the initial volume setting. For example,
if “Initial Volume” is set to –20.0 dB and “Max Volume” is set to –30.0 dB, the
volume level is automatically set to –30.0 dB when you turn on the power of this unit
next time.
Manual Setup (Volume)
Use this menu to manually adjust the various volume settings.
Muting Type (Muting type)
Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function reduces the
Adaptive DRC (Adaptive dynamic range control)
Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range in conjunction with the
volume level. This feature is useful when you are listening at lower
volumes or at night. When “Adaptive DRC” is set to “Auto”, this
unit controls the dynamic range as follows:
Choice
Functions
Mutes all the audio output.
Full
Reduces the current volume by 20 dB.
Reduces the current volume by 40 dB.
–20dB
–40dB
– If the VOLUME setting is low: the dynamic range is narrow
– If the VOLUME setting is high: the dynamic range is wide
Manual Setup (Sound)
Use this menu to adjust the sound parameters.
AUTO
AUTO
OFF
OFF
■ LFE Level (Low-frequency effect level)
Use this feature to adjust the output level of the
LFE (low-frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of
your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries low-
frequency special effects which are only added to certain scenes.
This setting is effective only when this unit decodes bitstream
signals.
Input level
Input level
VOLUME: low
VOLUME: high
Choice
Functions
Adjusts the dynamic range automatically.
Auto
Does not adjust the dynamic range automatically.
Off
Control range: –20.0 to 0.0 dB
Control step: 1.0 dB
y
• You can also adjust the dynamic range of the bitstream signal sources by using
• This function is also useful for listening with your headphones.
86 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
Speakers (Speaker low-frequency effect level)
PEQ Select (Parametric equalizer type select)
Select to adjust the speaker LFE level.
Use this feature to select the parametric equalizer type that applied
descriptions of each parametric equalizer type.
Headphones
(Headphone low-frequency effect level)
Select to adjust the headphone LFE level.
Choice
Manual
Descriptions
Applies the manually configured parametric equalizer in
“Manual Setup”.
Note
Depending on the settings of “Bass Out” (see page 85), some signals may not be output
at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jacks.
Applies the “Flat” type parametric equalizer.
Applies the “Front” type parametric equalizer.
Applies the “Natural” type parametric equalizer.
Does not use the parametric equalizer.
Flat
Front
■ Dynamic Range (Dynamic range)
Natural
Through
Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range compression
to be applied to your speakers or headphones. This setting is
effective only when the unit is decoding bitstream signals.
Notes
Speakers (Speaker dynamic range)
• When you carry out the automatic setup, this unit automatically set “PEQ Select” to
“Natural”.
Adjusts the dynamic range compression for the speakers.
• “Speaker Level” settings (see page 86) also changes corresponding to the setting of
“PEQ Select”.
Headphones (Headphone dynamic range)
• This unit does not change the configurations of “Manual” even if you perform the
automatic setup.
Adjusts the dynamic range compression for the headphones.
Choice
MAX
Functions
Manual parametric equalizer configuration of each
speaker
Use this feature to adjust the tonal quality of each speaker. You can
copy the results of the automatic setup for the base of the manual
configuration by using “PEQ Data Copy”. Set “PEQ Select” to
“Manual” in advanced.
Preserves the greatest amount of dynamic range.
Adjusts the dynamic range to medium. When this unit is
decoding Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range
control is always active regardless of the instruction of
the input source signals.
STD
• MIN: Adjusts the dynamic range to narrow when this
unit is decoding bitstream signals (except Dolby
TrueHD).
• AUTO: Adjusts the dynamic range according to the
instruction of the input source signals when this unit is
decoding Dolby TrueHD signals.
MIN/AUTO
9
Press k/ n/ l/ hto select “Test Tone” or the
speaker you want to adjust.
1
Choice
Adjusted speaker
Front left speaker
■ S-Wave Control (Standing wave control)
Use this menu to activate or deactivate the specially customized
parametric equalizer to reduce the effects of acoustic standing
Front L
Front R
Center
Front right speaker
Center speaker
Surround left speaker
Surround right speaker
Surround back left speaker
Surround back right speaker
Front presence left speaker
Front presence right speaker
Rear presence left speaker
Rear presence right speaker
Subwoofer left
Surround L
Choice
Functions
Activates the parametric equalizer.
Deactivates the parametric equalizer.
Surround R
On
Surround Back L
Surround Back R
Front Presence L
Front Presence R
Rear Presence L
Rear Presence R
Subwoofer L
Off
■ Parametric EQ (Parametric equalizer)
Use this feature to adjust the parametric equalizer of each speaker.
PEQ Data Copy (Parametric equalizer data copy)
Use this feature to copy the result data of the automatic setup to the
manual configuration area. You can select the parametric equalizer
type applied to the copied result data of the automatic setup. See
page 46 for the descriptions of each parametric equalizer type.
Subwoofer right
Subwoofer R
Choice
Descriptions
Test Tone
Use this feature to select whether to turn on or off the test tone
output while you are adjusting the tonal quality of each
speaker.
Copies the result of the automatic setup that the “Flat”
type parametric equalizer is applied to.
Flat → Manual
Manual Copies the result of the automatic setup that the
“Front” type parametric equalizer is applied to.
Front → Manual
Choice
Functions
Outputs the test tone.
Does not output the test tone.
Copies the result of the automatic setup that the
“Natural” type parametric equalizer is applied to.
Natural
→
Manual
On
Off
87 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
Control (Tone control)
Choice
9
Press hto access the settings window.
2
Functions
Adjust the bass/treble balance of your speakers.
Adjust the bass/treble balance of your headphones.
Speaker
PEQ Data Copy
PEQ Select
Front L
PARAM
EDIT
Band/Gain
RESET
EXIT
Headphone
y
“Speaker” and “Headphone” adjustments are stored independently. The adjustments for
“Speaker” affects the front left/right, center, presence left/right speaker channels and
Subwoofer channel.
Front R
Center
Bass (Bass control)
Use this feature to adjust low-frequencies output to your speakers or
headphones.
Choices: 125 Hz, 350 Hz, 500 Hz
Control range: – 6.0 dB to +6.0 dB
Initial setting: 0.0 dB
9
Press k/ n/ l/ hto select “PARAM” and then
9
press ENTER to select a parameter from “Band”
(band), “Freq.” (frequency) or “Q” (Q factor).
3
4
y
You can adjust “Gain” (gain) with any parameter.
Speaker
Freq.: 350Hz
Gain: 0.0dB
Control
9
9
Press nto select “EDIT” and press ENTER to
access the edit window.
+6
Bass
0
Treble
For more information on the parametric equalizer and each
parameter, see page 131.
Auto Bypass
-6
Band
Gain
Freq.
Q
#1
0.0dB
62.5Hz
1.000
PEQ Data Copy
PEQ Select
Front L
Treble (Treble control)
Use this feature to adjust high-frequencies output to your speakers
or headphones.
Choices: 2.5 kHz, 3.5 kHz, 8.0 kHz
Control range: – 6.0 dB to +6.0 dB
Initial setting: 0.0 dB
Front R
Center
The parameter selected in “PARAM” is highlighted.
9
• Press l/ hto adjust the parameter.
Control
Bass
Speaker
Freq.: 3.5kHz
Gain: 0.0dB
9
• Press k/ nto adjust the “Gain”.
+6
0
9
• Press ENTER to exit the edit window.
Treble
Auto Bypass
y
• When you select “Band” in step 3, you can use this menu as a graphic
equalizer.
-6
• “Band #4”, “Band #5”, “Band #6”, and “Band #7” can adjust the frequencies
above of 500 Hz.
• When you select “Subwoofer L” or “Subwoofer R” in step 1 and “Band” in
“Band #1”, “Band #2”, and “Band #3” can adjust the frequencies below of 250
Hz.
Auto Bypass (Auto bypass)
Use this feature to select whether the audio output bypasses the tone
control circuitry when “Treble” and “Bass” are set to 0 dB (see
5
6
Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you are satisfied with the
results.
Choice
Auto
Functions
Automatically bypasses the tone control circuitry to
provide the purest signal possible when “Treble” and
“Bass” are set to 0 dB.
y
If you want to reset all “Parametric EQ” parameter settings for the selected
speaker, select “RESET” and press 9ENTER.
Does not bypass the tone control circuitry.
Off
9
Select “EXIT” and press ENTER to exit from the
settings window.
■ Lipsync (Audio and video synchronization)
Use this feature to adjust the audio and video synchronization.
HDMI Auto (HDMI automatic lip sync mode)
■ Tone Control (Tone control)
If the connected video monitor is connected to the HDMI OUT jack
on this unit and compatible with the automatic audio and video
synchronization function (automatic lip sync), this unit adjusts the
audio and video synchronization automatically. Use this feature to
activate or deactivate the automatic lip sync.
Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble output to
your speakers or headphones.
Note
Tone Control is not effective when:
– one of the THX Surround mode is selected (see page 73).
– MULTI CH is selected as the input source.
88 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
Choice
Descriptions
Channel Mute
Front L
Speaker channel
Select this setting if the connected video monitor is
compatible with the automatic lip sync. Use “Auto” to
make fine adjustments of the audio and video
synchronization.
Front left
Front right
Center
Off
Front R
Center
Select this setting if the video monitor is not compatible
with the automatic lip sync or you do not want to use the
automatic lip sync. Use “Manual” to adjustment the
audio and video synchronization.
On
Surround left
Surround L
Surround right
Surround R
Surround back left
Surround Back L
Surround Back R
Front Presence L
Front Presence R
Rear Presence L
Rear Presence R
Subwoofer L
Subwoofer R
Surround back right
Front presence left speaker
Front presence right speaker
Rear presence left speaker
Rear presence right speaker
Subwoofer left
Auto (Automatic audio delay adjustment)
Use this feature to make fine adjustments of the audio and video
synchronization when you set “HDMI Auto” to “On”.
Control range: 0 to 240 ms
Control step: 1 ms
y
“offset” indicates the difference between the value of the audio delay that this unit sets
automatically and the value of the audio delay that you set in “HDMI Auto”. This unit
stores the value of “Offset” and applies the value to other automatic lip sync compatible
video monitors.
Subwoofer right
Manual Setup (Video)
Use this menu to adjust the video parameters.
Manual (Manual audio delay adjustment)
Use this feature to adjust the delay of the sound output manually to
synchronize audio with video images when you set “HDMI Auto”
to “Off”.
Control range: 0 to 240 ms
Control step: 1 ms
Note
Use the “VIDEO” in “INITIALIZE” to set the parameters in “Manual Setup (Video)”
(except “Short Message” and “On Screen”) to the factory presets (see page 120).
■ Pure Direct (Pure Direct)
Use this feature to select whether this unit outputs the video signals
when this unit is in the Pure Direct mode.
■ Conversion (Video conversion)
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the video scaling as well as
the HDMI up-conversion of the analog video signals input at the
VIDEO, S VIDEO, and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks.
Choice
Video Off
Functions
Does not output video signals.
Choice
Functions
Outputs video signals. For the better sound quality, this
unit only activates the limited video features.
Video On
Converts composite, S-video, and component video
signals interchangeably and up-converts composite, S-
video, and component video signals to HDMI video
signals.
On
Note
Does not convert any signals.
Off
You cannot use the GUI menu while this unit is in the Pure Direct mode even if “Pure
Direct” is set to “Video On”.
Notes
■ Channel Mute (Channel mute)
• For optimal video performance, THX Ltd. recommends that you set “Conversion” to
“Off” to allow video signals to pass through the system without processing (e.g.,
video signals input at the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks are output at the
COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks without any processing).
• The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR OUT jacks. When
recording a video source, you must make the same type of video connections between
each component.
• When composite video or S-video signals from a VCR are converted into component
video signals, the picture quality may suffer depending on your VCR.
• If “Conversion” is set to “Off”, the “Component I/P”, “HDMI Resolution”, “HDMI
Processing”, “HDMI Aspect”, and “Short Message” features are deactivated.
• Set “Conversion” to “On” to display the short message.
• This unit does not convert 480 line video signals and 576 line video signals
interchangeably.
• The analog component video signals with 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) of resolution are
converted into the S-video or composite video signals and output at the S VIDEO
MONITOR OUT and VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks.
Use this feature to mute specific speaker channels.
Mode (Mode)
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the “Channel Mute” setting
for each speaker.
Choice
Disable
Enable
Functions
Deactivates the “Channel Mute” function.
Activates the “Channel Mute” function.
Each speaker settings
Select whether this unit mutes each speaker channel when you set
“Mode” to “Enable”.
• Even when “Conversion” is set to “On”, HDMI digital signals are not converted to
analog video signals.
Choice
Mute On
Mute Off
Functions
Mutes the selected speaker channel.
Does not mute the selected speaker channel.
• This unit cannot convert the signals input at the VIDEO or S VIDEO jacks and
displays the video images correctly depending on the input source component and the
source played on the component. In such cases, set “Conversion” to “Off”.
• When non-standard video signals (such as video signals from a video game console)
are input, this unit does not display short messages in the video monitor even if
“Conversion” is set to “On”.
• When the analog component video signals with 480p/576p of resolution are input at
the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks and the video monitor is connected to the VIDEO
MONITOR OUT or S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack on this unit, the GUI screen is
not displayed in the video monitor.
89 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
■ HDMI Processing (HDMI video processing)
Use this feature to select whether this unit processes the video
signals input at the HDMI IN jacks.
■ HDMI Aspect (HDMI aspect ratio)
Use this feature to select whether this unit converts the aspect ratio
of 4:3 video signals and outputs at the HDMI OUT jacks.
Choice
Functions
Choice
Through
Functions
Select this setting when you do not want this unit to
process the video signals input at the HDMI IN jacks
even if “Conversion” is set to “On”.
Does not make any adjustments to the aspect ratio for the
HDMI video signal sources.
Off
Displays video images with the aspect ratio of 4:3 on
your video monitor with the aspect ratio of 16:9. Black
stripes appear on the right and left sides as a result.
16:9 Normal
Smart Zoom
On
Select this setting when you want this unit to process the
video signals input at the HDMI IN jacks when
“Conversion” is set to “On”.
Fits video images with the aspect ratio of 4:3 to your
video monitor with the aspect ratio of 16:9. The signals
are input with 720p, 1080i or 1080p of resolution, this
setting does not affect the video signals output at the
HDMI OUT jack.
■ Component I/P (Component interlace/
progressive conversion)
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the analog interlace/
progressive conversion of the analog video signals input at the
composite video, S-video and component video jacks so that the
analog video signals deinterlaced from 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) to
480p/576p are output at the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT jacks.
Notes
• When “HDMI Resolution” is set to “Through”, you cannot make any adjustments to
“HDMI Aspect”.
• If the aspect ratio of the input video source is other than 4:3, this unit automatically
ignores the setting of “HDMI Aspect”.
Choice
Functions
Activates the analog interlace/progressive up-conversion
of the analog video signals.
• When “HDMI Aspect” is set to “Smart Zoom”, the video images of the edge of the
video monitor are rather stretched.
On
Deactivates the analog interlace/progressive up-
conversion of the analog video signals.
Off
■ Short Message (Short message display)
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the short message display
displayed in the main zone video monitor function.
Notes
Choice
Functions
• If your video monitor does not support analog video signals with 480p/576p of
resolution, the GUI screen may not be displayed on your video monitor when
“Component I/P” is set to “On”. In such a case, set “INITIALIZE” in “Advanced
setup” parameter to “VIDEO” (see page 120).
Activates the short message display function.
Deactivates the short message display function.
On
Off
• When you set “HDMI Processing” to “On”, you may not set “Component I/P” in
some cases.
Note
■ HDMI Resolution
The short message display does not appear in the following cases:
– when the component video signals with 720p, 1080i or 1080p resolutions are input
– when HDMI video signals are input
(HDMI video signal resolution)
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the HDMI up-scaling of the
analog and HDMI video signals input at the composite video, S-
video and component video and HDMI IN jacks so that the up-
scaled video signals are output at the HDMI OUT jacks.
This unit up-scales the analog video signals as follows:
• 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) → 480p/576p, 1080i, 720p, or
1080p
■ On Screen (On-screen display time)
Use this feature to set the time for which the iPod menu, or NET/
USB menu is displayed in the video monitor after you perform a
certain operation.
Choice
Always
Functions
Displays the menu unceasingly during an operation.
• 480p/576p → 1080i, 720p, or 1080p
• 1080i → 480p/576p, 720p, 1080p
• 720p → 480p/576p, 1080i, 1080p
Turns off the menu 10 seconds after you perform a
certain operation.
10sec
Turns off the menu 30 seconds after you perform a
certain operation.
30sec
Choice
Through
Functions
Does not up-scale any video signals.
y
Up-scales video signals to 480p or 576p, 1080i, 720p, or
1080p of resolution.
480p (or 576p),
1080i, 720p,
1080p
This setting is applied to the GUI menu in the main zone and OSD in Zone 2, Zone 3,
or Zone 4.
■ Position (GUI screen position)
Use this feature to adjust the vertical and horizontal position of the
GUI screen.
Note
The input video signals may be down-scaled depending on the setting of “HDMI
Resolution”.
Control range: –5 (downward/left) to +5 (upward/right)
Short Message
On Screen
Position
/
:0
/
:0
+
Wall Paper
90 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
Main 11ch Stereo (Main zone 11-channel stereo)
Button
9 k
Moving direction of the GUI display
Use this feature to select whether the sound field program of the
main zone is fixed to “11ch Stereo” when this unit is in the party
mode.
Up
Down
Right
Left
9 n
9 h
9 l
Choice
Descriptions
Select this setting to select the sound field program in the
main zone as you like.
Off
Select this setting to fix the sound field program of the
main zone to “11ch Stereo” mode when this unit is in the
party mode.
On
■ Wall Paper (Wall paper)
Use this feature to display the wall paper or gray background in
your video monitor when there is no video signal being input.
Target : Zone2/Target : Zone3/Target : Zone4
(Party mode target zone setting)
Use this feature to specify which zone joins to the party mode.
Choice
None
Functions
Does not display any background in your video monitor.
Displays a background image (the photograph of a piano)
in your monitor when there is no video signal being
input.
Piano
Choice
Disable
Descriptions
Select this setting not to join the selected zone to the
party mode. You can select the input source of the
selected zone independently even if this unit is in the
party mode.
Displays a background image (the photograph of a horn)
in your monitor when there is no video signal being
input.
Horn
Select this setting to join the selected zone to the party
mode. When this unit is in the party mode, the zone
which this unit plays back the same source as the main
zone in the zones join in the party mode.
Enable
Displays a background image (the photograph of an
electric guitar) in your monitor when there is no video
signal being input.
Electric Guitar
Gray
Display a gray background in your monitor when there is
no video signal being input.
■ Zone2 Set/Zone3 Set/Zone4 Set
(Zone 2/Zone 3/Zone 4 settings)
Note
Zone2 Volume/Zone3 Volume/Zone4 Volume
(Zone 2/Zone 3/Zone 4 volume)
Use this menu to select whether this unit controls the volume level
of the audio signals output at the ZONE OUT (ZONE2, ZONE3, or
ZONE4) jacks.
When “Conversion” is set to “Off”, no background is displayed even if “Wall Paper” is
set to other than “None”.
Manual Setup (Multi Zone)
Use this menu to set the functions of the multi-zone configuration.
Choice
Fixed
Descriptions
Select this setting when you want to control the volume
level of the selected zone on the external amplifier. This
unit fixes the ZONE OUT (ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) volume
level to a standard line level.
■ Speaker B (Speaker B setting)
Use this feature to select the location of the FRONT B speakers.
Choice
Main
Descriptions
Select this setting when you want to control the volume
level of the selected zone on this unit. You can adjust the
ZONE OUT (ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) volume level
Variable
Select this setting when you use the speakers connected
to the EXTRA SP speaker terminals in the main room.
This unit outputs the same audio signals at the EXTRA
SP terminals as the FRONT A speaker terminals.
C
simultaneously with VOLUME +/– on the remote
control.
Select this setting when you use the speakers connected
to the EXTRA SP speaker terminals in another room.
When you turn off the FRONT A and FRONT B is turned
on, all the speakers including the subwoofer in the main
room are muted and this unit outputs sounds at the
FRONT B terminals only.
ZoneB
Notes
• When “Zone2 Volume”, “Zone3 Volume”, or “Zone4 Volume” is set to “Fixed”, you
cannot select the following parameters:
– Zone2 Max Vol./Zone3 Max Vol./Zone4 Max Vol.
– Zone2 Initial Vol./Zone3 Initial Vol./Zone4 Initial Vol.
– Zone2 Balance/Zone3 Balance/Zone4 Balance
• Even if you set “Zone2 Volume” to “Variable”, the volume control on this unit does
Notes
• If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack on this unit, the sound is output from
both the headphones and the speakers connected to the EXTRA SP terminals when
“Speaker B” is set to “ZoneB”.
• If a sound field program is selected when “Speaker B” is set to “ZoneB”, this unit
automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 60).
Zone2 Max Vol./Zone3 Max Vol./Zone4 Max Vol.
(Zone 2/Zone 3/Zone 4 Maximum volume setting)
Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the Zone 2,
Zone 3, or Zone 4.
Control range: –30.0 dB to +15.0 dB,+16.5 dB
Control step: 5.0 dB
■ Zone SP Assign (Zone speaker assignment)
Use this feature to assign the speaker terminals for Zone 2, Zone 3,
and Zone 4. See page 116 for details.
■ Party Mode Set (Party mode settings)
The party mode enables you to play the same source in multiple
to configure the functions of this unit when this unit is in the party
mode.
Note
The “Zone2 Max Vol.”, “Zone3 Max Vol.”, or “Zone4 Max Vol.” setting takes priority
over the “Zone2 Initial Vol.”, “Zone3 Initial Vol.”, or “Zone4 Initial Vol.” setting. For
example, “Zone2 Initial Vol.” is set to –20.0 dB and then “Zone2 Max Vol.” is set to
–30.0 dB, the volume level is automatically set to –30.0 dB when you turn on the power
of this unit next time.
91 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
Zone2 Initial Vol./Zone3 Initial Vol./Zone4 Initial Vol.
(Zone 2/Zone 3/Zone 4 initial volume setting)
Use this feature to set the volume level of Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4
when the power of each zone is turned on.
Manual Setup (Network)
Use this menu to adjust the network and USB system parameters.
Control range: Off, Mute, –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
■ Configuration (Network configuration)
Use this feature to view the network parameters (IP address, etc.) or
to change them manually.
Note
DHCP (DHCP setting)
The “Zone2 Max Vol.”, “Zone3 Max Vol.”, or “Zone4 Max Vol.” setting takes priority
over the “Zone2 Initial Vol.”, “Zone3 Initial Vol.”, “Zone4 Initial Vol.” setting.
Use this feature to select whether this unit can obtain the network
parameters (IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, primary DNS
server and secondary DNS server) from the DHCP server of the
connected network.
Zone2 Balance/Zone3 Balance/Zone4 Balance
(Zone 2/Zone 3/Zone 4 balance)
Use this feature to adjust the balance of the volume of the left and
right channels in each zone.
Choice
Descriptions
Choices: L10 to L1, 0, R1 to R10
Select this setting when this unit can obtain the network
parameters from the DHCP server of the connected
network.
On
Zone2 Mono/Zone3 Mono/Zone4 Mono
(Zone 2/Zone 3/Zone 4 monaural mode)
Use this feature to select whether you play back sources monaurally
in the selected zone.
Select this setting when you set the network parameters
manually.
Off
IP Address (IP address)
Choice
Descriptions
Use this parameter to specify an IP address assigned to this unit.
This value must not duplicate the one used for other devices in the
target network.
Turns off the monaural playback mode. This unit plays
back sources in stereo.
Off
Turns on the monaural playback mode. This unit mixes
down the left and right channel signals and plays the
sources monaurally.
On
Subnet Mask (Subnet mask)
Use this parameter to specify the subnet mask value assigned to this
unit.
Muting Type
(Zone 2/Zone 3/Zone 4 muting type)
y
For most of the cases, the subnet mask value can be set as “255.255.255.0”.
Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function reduces the
output volume of the selected zone.
Default Gateway (Default gateway)
Use this parameter to specify the IP address of the default gateway.
Choice
Functions
Mutes all the audio output.
Full
DNS Server (P) (Primary DNS server)
Reduces the current volume by 20 dB.
Reduces the current volume by 40 dB.
–20dB
–40dB
DNS Server (S) (Secondary DNS server)
Use this parameter to specify the IP address of the primary and
secondary DNS (Domain Name System) servers.
■ Zone OSD (Zone on-screen display)
Use this feature to display the operational status of Zone 2, Zone 3,
and Zone 4 on the Zone 2 video monitor connected to the ZONE
VIDEO jacks on the rear panel of this unit. The Zone 2, Zone 3, and
Zone 4 information to be displayed is listed as follows:
Note
If you have only one DNS address, enter the DNS address in “DNS Server (P)”. If you
have two or more DNS addresses, enter one of them in “DNS Server (P)” and another
in “DNS Server (S)”.
•
•
•
•
•
The input source
The volume level
The audio mute status
The tonal quality status
iPod or network/USB menu when “DOCK” or “NET/USB” is
selected as the input source of Zone 2, Zone 3, and/or Zone 4
Setup (Setup)
Select “Setup” to confirm the settings of the “Configuration”
parameters.
Procedure of the network configuration
Choice
Zone2
Zone All
Functions
9
From the top GUI menu, press k/ non the remote
1
9
control repeatedly and then hto select
Displays the operational status of Zone 2 only.
“Configuration”.
Displays the operational status of Zone 2, Zone 3, and
Zone 4.
9
9
2
Press k/ nrepeatedly and then hto select
“DHCP”.
Notes
• You can connect up to two composite and one component video monitors to the
ZONE OUT VIDEO jacks and ZONE OUT COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. If you
connect multiple video monitors to the ZONE VIDEO and ZONE OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks, these video monitors display the same video images of
the input source of Zone 2.
• When you set “Zone OSD” to “Zone All”, the operational status of Zone 3 and Zone
4 appears on the Zone 2 video monitor(s) even if Zone 2 is turned off.
92 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
System (System ID)
9
Press k/ nto select “On” or “Off” and then
3
This information displays the system ID that is assigned to this unit.
9
ENTER to confirm.
• If you select “On”, you do not have to set other network parameters.
Refer to step 5 and finish the configuration.
Manual Setup (Option)
This menu adjusts the optional system settings.
• If you select “Off”, you need to set other network parameters. Refer
to steps 4 through 6 to set the parameters.
■ Front Panel Disp.
Note
(Front panel display setting)
When “DHCP” is set to “On”, you cannot select and adjust any other network
settings. To specify the other parameters, you need to first set “DHCP” to “Off”.
Dimmer (Dimmer)
Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel display.
Control range: – 4 to 0
9
4
5
Press
k
/
nto select the desired parameter and
9
then h.
9
Press l/ hrepeatedly to select the digit to
9
change and then press k/ nrepeatedly to change
the number.
0
Dimmer
Scroll
9
Press ENTER to confirm the setting of the
6
7
8
parameter.
Scroll (Front panel display message scroll)
Use this feature to set whether to display the information (such as
song title or channel name) in the front panel display in a
continuous manner or by the first 14 alphanumeric characters after
scrolling all characters once when “DOCK”, or “NET/USB” is
selected as the input source.
Repeat steps 4 through 6 to configure each network
parameter.
9
Press nrepeatedly to select “Setup” and then
9
ENTER to finish configuration.
Choice
Continue
Functions
Continuous mode.
Note
Select this to display the operation status in the front
panel display in a continuous manner.
In case you have changed your network configuration, you may need to reconfigure the
network settings again.
Scroll-once mode.
Once
Select this to display the operation status in the front
panel display by the first 14 alphanumeric characters
after scrolling all characters once.
y
You can reset the network settings of this unit to the initial factory settings by using
“NETWORK” of “INITIALIZE” in the advanced setup menu (see page 120).
■ Information (Network information)
Use this feature to display the network system information.
■ iPod (iPod settings)
Standby Charge
(iPod charge on the standby mode)
Use this feature to select whether this unit charges the battery of the
stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the standby mode (see
MAC Address
00:00:00:00:00:00
Configuration
Status
Information
100BASE-TX
Full Duplex
System
ABCDE123
Choice
Auto
Functions
Charges the battery of the stationed iPod when this unit is
turned on and in the standby mode.
Charges the battery of the stationed iPod only when this
unit is turned on.
Off
Note
The above display is an example.
■ Audio Select
MAC Address
(MAC (Media Access Control) address)
This information displays the MAC address that is assigned to this
unit.
(Default audio input jack select)
Use this feature to designate the default audio input jack select
setting (see page 81) for the input sources connected to the
DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit.
Status (Network status)
Choice
Auto
Functions
This information displays the current link status of the network.
Display status: 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, No Link,
Full Duplex, Half Duplex
Automatically detects the type of audio input signals and
selects the appropriate audio input jack select setting.
Automatically selects the last audio input jack select
setting used for the connected input source.
Last
Note
“No Link” appears when network connection is not made.
93 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
■ Decoder Mode (Default decoder mode)
for the input sources when you turn on the power of this unit.
Choice
Functions
Does not accept the HDMI signals when this unit is in the
standby mode.
Off
Choice
Auto
Functions
Accepts the HDMI signals when this unit is in the
standby mode.
On
Automatically detects the type of input signals and select
the appropriate decoder mode setting.
Automatically selects the last decoder mode setting used
for the connected input source.
Last
Notes
• When “Standby Through” is set to “On” and this unit is in the standby mode, the
audio signals are only output at the HDMI OUT 1 or HDMI OUT 2.
• When “Standby Through” is set to “On”, the amount of power consumption in the
standby mode is increase. When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time,
■ EXTD Surround
(Default extended surround decoder mode
setting)
Use this feature to designate the extended surround decoder mode
(see page 72) for the input sources connected to the DIGITAL
INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit.
B
press MASTER ON/OFF to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this
unit.
Input/output jack select
When “Standby Through” is set to “On”, you can designate an
HDMI IN jack and an HDMI OUT jack that accept the signals when
this unit in the standby mode.
Choice
Auto
Functions
Automatically detects the input digital audio signals and
activates the appropriate decoder.
Input (HDMI IN jack select)
Use this feature to select an HDMI IN jack select that accepts
HDMI signals when this unit is in the standby mode.
Selects the last selected extended surround decoder
mode.
Last
Choice
Selected HDMI IN jack
■ Memory Guard (Memory guard)
HDMI IN1
HDMI IN2
HDMI IN3
HDMI IN4
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to sound field
program parameter values and other system settings.
Choice
Functions
Turns off the “Memory Guard” feature.
Off
Front HDMI IN
Protects the following parameters:
– sound field program parameters
– GUI menu parameters
FRONT
On
Output (HDMI OUT jack select)
Use this feature to select an HDMI OUT jack select that
outputs HDMI signals when this unit is in the standby mode.
– speaker levels settings
y
When you select the protected parameter, “ ” appears at the bottom left of the GUI
screen. You can adjust the parameters when you select the parameter and “ ” does not
appear at the bottom left of the GUI menu even if “Memory Guard” is set to “On”.
Choice
OUT 1
OUT 2
Selected HDMI OUT jack
HDMI OUT1
HDMI OUT2
■ HDMI Set (HDMI settings)
Use this feature to adjust the HDMI support audio.
■ Trigger Output (Trigger output)
Use this feature to select the functions of each TRIGGER OUT jack
on this unit.
Support Audio (Support audio)
Use this feature to select whether to play back HDMI audio signals
on this unit or on another HDMI component connected to the
HDMI OUT jacks on the rear panel of this unit.
Choice
Trigger1
Trigger2
Function
Sets the functions for the TRIGGER OUT 1 jack.
Sets the functions for the TRIGGER OUT 2 jack.
Choice
DSP-Z11
Functions
Plays back HDMI audio signals on this unit. The HDMI
audio signals input at the HDMI input jacks on this unit
are not output to the HDMI component connected to the
HDMI OUT jacks on the rear panel of this unit.
Trigger operation mode
Choice
Descriptions
Plays back HDMI audio signals on another HDMI
component connected to the HDMI OUT jacks.
Other
Select this setting to send the voltage signals at the
selected TRIGGER OUT jack while the selected zone is
turned on.
Power
Source
Manual
Note
Select this setting to send the voltage signals at the
selected TRIGGER OUT jack while the selected input
source is selected.
Available audio/video signals depend on the specification of the connected video
monitor. Refer to the instruction manual of each connected component.
Select this setting to send the voltage signals manually.
Standby Through (Standby through)
Use this feature whether this unit allows the HDMI signals input at
the HDMI IN jacks to pass thorough this unit when this unit is in the
standby mode. You can also designate an HDMI IN jack and an
HDMI OUT jack that accept the signals when “Standby Through” is
set to “On” and this unit is in the standby mode.
94 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
Source (Source)
HDMI error and message
Message
After selecting the input source, you can set the function of the
TRIGGER OUT jacks when the corresponding input source is
selected.
Cause
The number of the connected HDMI components is
over the limit.
Device Over
Choice
Descriptions
HDCP authentication failed.
Sends the voltage when you select the input source
you set in “Source”.
Input High
The connected monitor is not compatible with the
resolution of the input video signal.
Out of Resolution
Stops sending the voltage when you select the input
source you set in “Source”.
Input Low
Language
Use this feature to select the language of the menu items and
messages.
Manual (Manual)
Choice
Function
Sends the voltage signals.
High
Choices: English (English),
(Japanese),
Français (French), Deutsch (German),
Español (Spanish), Русский (Russian)
Stops sending the voltage signals.
Low
y
You can also select the language using the “LANGUAGE” parameter in “Advanced
setup” in the front panel display (see page 120).
Signal Info.
(Input signal information)
Front panel
display
Language
GUI menu
Zone OSD
You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel, bit rate
and flag data of the current input signal.
Русский
(Russian)
—
—
■ Audio Info. (Audio information)
—
(Japanese)
Format
Signal format. When this unit cannot detect a digital
signal, it automatically switches to analog input.
Other languages
Sampling
Channel
The number of samples per second taken from a
continuous signal to make a discrete signal.
··· The selected language is displayed.
— ··· The selected language is not displayed. The menu items and
messages are displayed in English.
The number of source channels in the input signal
(front/surround/LFE). For example, a multi-channel
soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2 surround channels
and LFE, is displayed as “3/2/0.1”.
Bitrate
The number of bits passing a given point per second.
Dialogue
The dialogue normalization level preset to the current
Flag1/Flag2
Flag data encoded in the bitstream, or PCM signals that
cue this unit to automatically switch decoders
(“Surround EX”, etc.).
Notes
• “–––” appears when this unit cannot display the corresponding information.
• Some high definition audio bitstream contents may not include the discrete surround
back left and right channel signals but are encoded at the bitrate of 192 kHz.
• Even if you make settings to output bitstreams directly, some players convert the
Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Digital Plus bitstreams to the Dolby Digital bitstreams,
while converting the DTS-HD Master Audio or DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
bitstreams to the DTS bitstreams.
■ Video Info. (Video information)
HDMI Signal
Type of the source video signals and the
video signals output at the HDMI OUT jack
on this unit.
HDMI Resolution
Resolution of the input signal (analog or
HDMI) and the output signal (HDMI).
Analog Resolution
Resolution of the source video signals and
the analog video signals output at the
COMPONENT MONITOR OUT jacks of
this unit.
HDMI Error
(HDMI Message)
Error message for HDMI sources or
details.
95 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving and recalling the system settings (System Memory)
Saving and recalling the system settings (System Memory)
Use this feature to save and recall up to 10 of your favorite setting
for the main zone. You can also save up to four of your favorite
settings for Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4.
2
Press 9k/ nrepeatedly to select “System Memory”
and then press 9h.
The “System Memory” menu appears in the video monitor.
Saving the current system settings
Before performing the following operations, set the operation mode selector on the
F
remote control to AMP.
Main
Main Load
Zone2
Zone3
Main Save
7
■ Saving by the SYSTEM MEMORY buttons
You can save the current system settings stored in “Memory1” to
“Memory4” by pressing the corresponding 7SYSTEM MEMORY
buttons.
Main Rename
3
Press 9k/ nrepeatedly to select the desired zone
and then press 9h.
In the following example, you select “Main” (main zone). The
list of the memory number appears in the video monitor.
7
Press and hold one of the SYSTEM MEMORY
buttons on the remote control for 4 seconds.
“MEMORY 1 SAVE” (example) appears in the front panel display,
and then this unit saves the current system setting to the
corresponding memory number.
Main Load
Main Save
Memory1
Memory2
Memory3
SYSTEM MEMORY
Main Rename
1
2
3
4
Notes
• If system settings are already saved in the selected memory number, this unit
overwrites the old system settings.
4
Press 9k/ nrepeatedly to select “Main Save” and
then press 9h.
The following menu appears in the video monitor.
• To save the system settings for Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4, press HZONE on the
remote control repeatedly to select the operation zone setting of the remote control
and then press and hold the desired 7SYSTEM MEMORY button for 4 seconds.
You can save the system settings for the selected Zone only when the zone is turned
on.
• This unit saves the parameters in the groups you select by using the GUI menu when
you save the parameters by using the 7SYSTEM MEMORY buttons.
Main Save
Input/HDMI Out
✓
Audio
Volume
SP Config
■ Saving by the GUI menu operation
You can save the current system settings stored in “Memory1” to
“Memory10” by using the “System Memory” menu in the GUI
menu.
Memory1
✓
✓
Video
Option
Memory2
✓
Memory3
Save
Group of the system parameters
I
Press MENU on the remote control.
The top menu appears in the video monitor.
1
5
Press 9k/ nrepeatedly to select the desired
memory number (“Memory1” to “Memory10” or
“Memory4”) and then press 9h.
Stereo/Surround
Input Select
Manual Setup
Auto Setup
Volume
Sound
Video
The list of the saved items appears in the video monitor.
System Memory
Main Save
Input/HDMI Out
✓
Audio
Volume
SP Config
Memory1
✓
✓
Video
Option
Memory2
✓
Memory3
Save
Select: ENTER
96 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving and recalling the system settings (System Memory)
y
• If you select “Zone2”, “Zone3”, or “Zone4” in step 3, you can select
“Memory1” to “Memory4”. You can save the parameters for the selected zone
only when the zone is turned on.
• If system settings are already saved in the selected memory number, this unit
overwrite to old system settings.
• If you save the system settings to “Memory1” to “Memory4”, you can load the
stored settings by pressing the corresponding 7SYSTEM MEMORY buttons
4
5
Press 9k/ nrepeatedly to select “Main Rename”
(example) and then 9h.
The list of the memory number appears in the video monitor.
Press 9k/ nrepeatedly to select the desired
memory number and then 9h.
The rename display appears in the video monitor.
6
Press 9k/ nrepeatedly to select the group of
parameters and then press 9ENTER to select or
clear the check box of the group.
This unit saves the parameters in the checked groups. Refer to
CAPITAL
Memory1
OK
Memory1
Memory2
Memory3
RESET
Main Save
Input/HDMI Out
✓
Audio
✓
Volume
SP Config
Memory1
✓
9
✓
6
7
Press ENTER repeatedly to select a character type
(CAPITAL/SMALL/LATIN CAPITAL/LATIN SMALL/
FIGURE/MARK).
Video
Option
Memory2
Memory3
✓
Save
Select: ENTER
Current selected group of the parameters
appears in red
9
Press k/ nto select the character you want to use
9
and l / hto move to the next one.
• You can use up to 9 characters for each memory.
Note
9
• Press nto change the character in the following order, or
If the selected zone is other than “Main”, you can select “Input”, “Volume”, and
9
press kto go in the reverse order:
CAPITAL A to Z, space
SMALL a to z, space
LATIN CAPITAL Ä, Ö, Ü, etc.
7
Press 9nrepeatedly to select “Save” and then
9ENTER to save the current system settings to the
selected memory number.
LATIN SMALL
FIGURE 0 to 9, space
MARK !, #, %, &, etc.
ä, ö, ü, etc.
Main Save
9
• Press ENTER to switch between character types.
Input/HDMI Out
✓
Audio
✓
✓
✓
✓
y
Volume
SP Config
Video
Option
Save
Memory1
Memory2
Memory3
Press 9hrepeatedly to select “RESET” and then press 9ENTER to set the
name of the memory to the initial name.
Notes
Save: ENTER
• The character types you can select differ depending on the setting in
y
• If you set “Language” to “
”, you can also select Japanese characters.
You can cancel the saving by pressing 9l.
9
Press hrepeatedly to select “OK” and press
8
9
I
Press MENU again to exit from the GUI menu.
8
9
ENTER when complete.
y
■ Renaming the stored settings
Use this feature to rename the stored settings. The name of each
memory number appears in the GUI menu or front panel display.
Repeat steps 5 to 7 to rename each input.
I
Press MENU again to exit from the GUI menu.
I
Press MENU on the remote control.
1
2
Note
The top menu appears in the video monitor.
page 120), the name of each system memory are automatically set to the initial name of
the selected language.
Press 9k/ nrepeatedly to select “System Memory”
and then press 9h.
The “System Memory” menu appears in the video monitor.
3
Press 9k/ nrepeatedly to select the desired zone
and then press 9h.
In the following example, “Main” is selected.
97 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving and recalling the system settings (System Memory)
■ Saved parameters for the main zone
The groups of the system parameters indicated in bold are the
groups that is saved in the initial setting.
■ Saved parameters for Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4
Parameter
Input
Descriptions
Input source *
Page
117
Group
Parameters
Page
—
83
84
85
86
89
90
90
90
Volume level
Volume
117
Input/HDMI
Out *
Audio Select
Decoder Mode
Input source
Tone control settings
Tone Control
Note
HDMI OUT SEL
Stereo/Surround
Pure Direct on/off
EXTD SUR. setting
Adaptive DRC
Adaptive DSP Lvl
LFE Level
* The playing status of the network/USB sources (selected radio station,
etc.) is also saved.
Audio
Loading the stored system settings
• Before performing the following operations, set the operation mode selector on
F
the remote control to AMP.
• This unit overwrites the stored settings to the current settings of this unit. If you
do not want to erase the current settings, save the current settings to any System
Memory number in advance.
Dynamic Range
Tone Control
■ Loading by the 7SYSTEM MEMORY buttons
You can recall the system settings stored in “Memory1” to
“Memory4” by pressing the corresponding 7SYSTEM MEMORY
buttons.
Pure Direct
CINEMA DSP HD³ ON/OFF
Volume level
Volume
SP Config
S-Wave Control
Parametric EQ
THX Set
y
To recall the system settings for Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4, press HZONE on the
remote control repeatedly to select the operation zone setting of the remote control in
advance. You can recall the system settings for the selected zone only when the zone is
turned on.
Speaker Set
Speaker Distance
Speaker Level
1
2
Press one of the 7SYSTEM MEMORY buttons on
the remote control to select the desired memory
number.
“MEMORY 1 LOAD” (example) appears in the front panel
display.
Speaker B
Information (Auto Setup)
Setup Menu (Auto Setup)
Selected front speaker set (A and/or B)
Conversion
y
“EMPTY” appears in the menu screen if no system settings are stored in the
selected memory number.
Video
HDMI Processing
Component I/P
HDMI Resolution
HDMI Aspect
Press the selected 7SYSTEM MEMORY button
once more to confirm the selection.
This unit loads the settings stored in the selected memory
number.
Short Message
On Screen
■ Loading by the GUI menu operation
Position
I
Press MENU on the remote control.
The top menu appears in the video monitor.
1
2
Wall Paper
Option
Lipsync
Front Panel Disp.
Support Audio
Press 9k/ nrepeatedly to select “System Memory”
and then press 9h.
The “System Memory” menu appears in the video monitor.
Note
3
Press 9k/ nrepeatedly to select the desired zone
and then press 9h.
*
The playing status of the network/USB sources (selected radio station, etc.) is also
saved.
In the following example, you select “Main” (main zone). The
list of the memory number appears in the video monitor.
Main Load
Memory1
Memory2
Memory3
Main Save
Main Rename
98 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving and recalling the system settings (System Memory)
Note
Using examples
■ Example 1: Switching the settings of this unit
according to the using situations
You can recall the system settings for the selected zone only when the zone is
turned on.
Use the following example to change the settings of this unit
according to the using situations just by pressing the 7SYSTEM
MEMORY buttons.
4
Press 9k/ nto select “Main Load” and then press
9h.
The following menu appears in the video monitor.
SYSTEM MEMORY 3
Settings for the book-reading time
SYSTEM MEMORY 4
Settings for enjoying games
Main Save
Input/HDMI Out
Audio
Volume
SYSTEM MEMORY
Memory1
SP Config
Memory2
1
2
3
4
Video
Option
Memory3
SYSTEM MEMORY 1
Settings for enjoying movie
SYSTEM MEMORY 2
Settings for enjoying TV programs
y
If system settings are already stored in the selected memory number, the stored
system parameter settings appear in the menu screen. “Memory Empty” appears
in the menu screen if no system settings are stored in the selected memory
number.
SYSTEM MEMORY 1: Settings for enjoying movie
Save the following settings to enjoy movies. You can switch the
input source, sound field program, and the HDMI OUT jack
simultaneously.
5
Press 9k/ nrepeatedly to select the desired
memory number where the system settings are
stored and then press 9h.
Once “Load: ENTER” appears in the video monitor, press
9ENTER to confirm the loading.
Recommended parameter settings
Sound field program: Sci-Fi (see page 54)
y
You can cancel the loading by pressing 9l.
Saved parameter groups
Input/HDMI Out, Audio, Option
Main Save
Input/HDMI Out
Audio
SYSTEM MEMORY 2: Settings for enjoying TV programs
When you want to play back the audio signals input at the CBL/
SAT HDMI IN 3 jack on the speakers of the TV connected to the
HDMI OUT 1 jack to enjoy TV programs, use the following
settings. You can set input source and output component of the
audio signals simultaneously.
Volume
Memory1
SP Config
Video
Option
Memory2
Memory3
Save
Load: ENTER
Recommended parameter settings
“Support Audio” setting: Other (see page 94)
I
Press MENU to exit from the GUI menu.
6
Saved parameter groups
Input/HDMI Out, Audio
SYSTEM MEMORY 3: Settings for the book-reading time
When you enjoy reading books with listening to your favorite
Internet radio service, use the following settings. You can recall the
desired input source, Internet radio service, and audio settings
simultaneously.
Recommended parameter settings
Sound field program: 11ch Enhancer (see page 54)
y
Saved parameter groups
Input/HDMI Out, Audio, Volume
99 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving and recalling the system settings (System Memory)
SYSTEM MEMORY 4: Settings for enjoying games
Save the following settings to enjoy roleplaying games. You can
switch the input source, sound field program, and the HDMI OUT
jack simultaneously.
Recommended parameter settings
Sound field program: Roleplaying Game (see page 54)
“HDMI OUT SEL” setting: OUT 2 (see page 51)
Saved parameter groups
Input/HDMI Out, Audio
■ Example 2: Switching the setting of this unit
according to the environment of the listening
room
Use the following example to change the speaker and audio settings
according to the environment of the listening room and the
situation.
SYSTEM MEMORY
1
2
3
4
SYSTEM MEMORY 1 SYSTEM MEMORY 2 SYSTEM MEMORY 3
Settings for a single
listening position
Settings for multiple
listening positions
Settings for the midnight
listening
SYSTEM MEMORY 1: Settings for a single listening
position
Save the result of the automatic setup for a single listening position.
Recommended parameter settings
Automatic setup: The result when you perform the
measurement for the single listening position (see page 42).
Saved parameter group
SP Config
SYSTEM MEMORY 2: Settings for multiple listening
positions
Save the result of the automatic setup for the multiple listening
positions.
Recommended parameter settings
Automatic setup: The result when you perform the
measurement for the multiple listening positions (see page 42).
Saved parameter group
SP Config
SYSTEM MEMORY 3: Settings for the midnight listening
The acoustic characteristics may change whether curtains are
opened or closed. Use the following settings for the listening when
you want to enjoy movies in midnight with low volume level.
Recommended parameter settings
Automatic setup: The result when you perform the
measurement with the curtains are closed (see page 42).
“Adaptive DRC” setting: Auto (see page 86)
“Adaptive DSP Lvl” setting: Auto (see page 86)
Saved parameter groups
Audio, SP Config
100 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling this unit by using the Web browser (Web Control Center)
Controlling this unit by using the Web browser (Web Control Center)
You can operate this unit by using a Web browser. You can select the input source and sound field program, browse the iPod or network/USB
contents, select the preset items, and adjust the parameters of this unit by using the graphical user interface (Web Control Center) that appears
in the Web browser. Check the IP address of this unit by using “IP Address” in “Network” menu (see page 92) in advance, and then enter the
IP address to the Web browser to access this unit to control it.
PC
Web browser
Control
This unit
Controlling Network/
USB features
Selecting the input source
Power on/off
Adjusting the
system parameters
And many other features...
y
• To use this feature, this unit and your PC must be connected properly in the network. See page 37 for details of the connections.
• We recommend that you use Windows Internet Explorer 6 or 7 that is installed on Windows XP or Windows Vista PC to access this unit.
• You can select whether this unit accepts the controls by using the Web browser when this unit is in the standby mode. See page 119 for details.
• You can register the MAC address of the PCs you want to use to control this unit and limit the PCs that can control this unit by using the Web browser. You can select that this unit
allows the access to this unit by the PCs whose MAC addresses are registered to this unit or allows the access by any PCs by using “MAC FILTER” in “Advanced setup” (see
page 120).
101 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote control features
Remote control features
In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by Yamaha and other
manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set up the appropriate remote control code for each input source (see
Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components
■ Controlling this unit
Set the operation mode selector to AMP to control this unit.
■ Controlling a TV
F
F
Set the operation mode selector to TV to control your TV. To
control your TV, you must set the appropriate remote control code
to the TV control area in advance (see page 104).
POWER POWER
STANDBY
POWER
POWER POWER
STANDBY
POWER
TV
AV
TV
AV
*1
*1
MD
MD
MULTI
V-AUX
DVD
PHONO
CD
MULTI
V-AUX
DVD
PHONO
CD
TAPE
TAPE
BD
BD
CD-R
VCR
CD-R
VCR
HD DVD
HD DVD
CBL
SAT
CBL
SAT
DTV
DVR
DTV
DVR
NET
USB
NET
USB
TUNER
DOCK
TUNER
DOCK
AMP
TV
AMP
TV
Set to AMP
Set to TV
SOURCE
SOURCE
SELECT
MACRO
MODE
SELECT
MACRO
MODE
SETUP
ID
SETUP
ID
ZONE
ZONE
SYSTEM MEMORY
SYSTEM MEMORY
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
LEVEL
TITLE
BAND
SRCH MODE VOLUME
MENU
LEVEL
TITLE
BAND
SRCH MODE VOLUME
MENU
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
A-E
A-E
ENTER
ENTER
*2
*3
*2
*1
*2
RETURN
MEMORY
DISPLAY
MUTE
RETURN
MEMORY
DISPLAY
MUTE
PC/MCX
REC
PC/MCX
REC
NET RADIO
USB
NET RADIO
USB
CLASSICAL
1
1
CLASSICAL
2
2
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
CLASSICAL
1
1
CLASSICAL
2
2
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
3
4
3
4
MOVIE
5
STEREO
6
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
MOVIE
5
STEREO
6
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
*2
7
8
7
8
THX
9
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT EXTD SUR.
THX
9
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT EXTD SUR.
0
10
ENT
0
10
ENT
PARTY
SLEEP
HDMI OUT
MUTE
AUDIO SEL
AUDIO
PARTY
SLEEP
HDMI OUT
MUTE
AUDIO SEL
AUDIO
TV VOL
TV CH
TV
TV VOL
TV CH
TV
3D DSP
3D DSP
INPUT
INPUT
Notes
Notes
*1 2TV POWER can always turn on or off the power of the TV regardless
of the operation mode selector position.
*2 These buttons control your TV only when the operation mode selector is
*3 These buttons control your TV only when the operation mode selector is
set to FTV or FSOURCE.
*1 These buttons always control this unit regardless of the operation mode
selector position.
*2 These buttons control this unit only when the component operation mode
selector is set to FAMP.
Remote control
TV VOL +/–
TV CH +/–
Functions
Increases or decreases the volume level.
Changes the currently selected channel.
Mutes the audio output.
TV MUTE
Switches the input source.
TV INPUT
y
If no code has been set to the “TV” area, the remote control operates the component
that is set to the “DTV” area (see page 104).
102 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote control features
■ Controlling other components
[7]
LEVEL
TITLE
BAND
SRCH MODE VOLUME
MENU
PRESET/CH
ENTER
[ ]
1
[2]
[3]
[4]
POWER POWER
STANDBY
POWER
Set the operation mode selector to FSOURCE to control other
components selected with the input selector buttons or (3). You
must set the appropriate remote control code for each input source
of each control button used to control other components assigned to
each input selector button or (3). Be advised that some buttons
may not correctly operate the selected component.
TV
AV
A-E
MD
MULTI
V-AUX
DVD
PHONO
CD
TAPE
BD
CD-R
VCR
HD DVD
RETURN
MEMORY
DISPLAY
MUTE
[8]
CBL
SAT
DTV
DVR
PC/MCX
REC
NET
USB
TUNER
DOCK
NET RADIO
USB
[5]
[6]
AMP
TV
SOURCE
CLASSICAL
1
1
CLASSICAL
2
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
2
3
4
SELECT
MACRO
MODE
SETUP
ID
MOVIE
5
STEREO
6
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
ZONE
7
8
SYSTEM MEMORY
THX
9
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT EXTD SUR.
1
2
3
4
y
0
10
ENT
[9]
[10]
LEVEL
SRCH MODE VOLUME
PARTY
SLEEP
HDMI OUT
MUTE
AUDIO SEL
AUDIO
The remote control has 16 modes (control areas) to control components so that the
remote control can operate up to 16 different components.
TV VOL
TV CH
TV
3D DSP
INPUT
Set to SOURCE
Blu-ray Disc/
HD DVD player/ DVD player
recorder
DVD recorder/
Digital video VCR
recorder
Cable TV/
Satellite tuner
MD recorder/
CD recorder
LD player
TV
CD player
Tape deck
Tuner
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*2
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
[1] AV POWER
Power
Power
Power
Power
Power
DVR power
Title
Power
Power
Power
Power
Power
Band
[2] TITLE,
Title
Title
Title
BAND
[3] PRESET/CH
Menu up
Menu up
Menu up
Channel up
Menu up
Channel up
Menu up
k
PRESET/CH
n
Menu down
Menu left
Menu right
Menu enter
Return
Menu down
Menu left
Menu right
Menu enter
Return
Menu down
Menu left
Menu right
Menu enter
Return
Channel down Menu down
Menu left
Channel down
Menu down
Menu left
Menu right
Menu enter
Memory
A-E l
A-E h
ENTER
Direction
A/B
Menu right
Menu enter
[4] RETURN,
Return
MEMORY
[5] REC
Record
(recorder)
*2
*2
Disc skip
Record
Record
Disc skip
Record
Record
DVR record
DVR pause
DVR record
*2
*2
*2
e
Pause
Play
Pause
Play
Pause
Play
Pause
Play
Pause
Play
Pause
Play
Pause
Play
Pause
Play
DVR pause
*2
p
s
DVR play
DVR stop
DVR play
*2
*2
Stop
Stop
Stop
Stop
Stop
Stop
Stop
Stop
DVR stop
DVR search
backward
DVR search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward
ll
hh
b
*2
*2
DVR search
DVR search
Search
forward
Search
forward
Search forward Search forward Search forward Search forward
Search forward Search forward
*2
*2
forward
forward
DVR skip
backward
DVR skip
backward
Skip
backward
Skip backward
Skip forward
Numeric buttons
Menu
Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward
Skip backward Skip backward Direction A
Skip forward Skip forward Direction B
*2
*2
DVR skip
DVR skip
a
Skip forward
Skip forward
Skip forward
Skip forward
*2
*2
forward
forward
[6] 1-9, 0, +10
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons
Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons
Menu
[7] MENU,
Menu
Menu
Search mode
SRCH MODE
[8] DISPLAY
[9] ENT
Display
Index
Display
Index
Display
Display
Index
Display
Enter
Display
Enter
Display
Enter
Display
Index
Display
Index
Display
Enter
Chapter/time
Audio
[10] AUDIO
Audio
Audio
Audio
Notes
*1 This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button.
*2 These buttons operate your video recorder (DVD recorder etc.) only when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR (see page 104).
■ Selecting a component to be controlled
■ Controlling optional components (Option
mode)
“OPTN1” and “OPTN2” are optional component control areas that
can be programmed with remote control functions independently
from any input source. This areas are useful for programming
commands that are to be used only as a part of a macro function or
for components that do not have a valid remote control code.
You can select a component to be controlled independently of the
input source selected with the input selector buttons or
.
5
Press SELECT l/ hrepeatedly to select the desired
component.
The name of the component to be controlled appears in the display
window (4) on the remote control.
5
To select the option mode, press SELECT l/ h
repeatedly until “OPTN1” or “OPTN2” appears in the
display window (4) on the remote control.
DVD
Note
page 105 to program buttons operated within these component control areas.
103 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote control features
Customizing the remote control
Use the setup mode of the remote control to customize the remote
control.
3
4
Press 9k/ nto select the desired setting.
Choice
Descriptions
ON
Lights up the backlight when a button is pressed
or the remote control detects a motion.
1
2
Press GSETUP on the remote control using a
ballpoint pen or similar object.
“SETUP” appears in the display window on the remote control.
OFF
Lights up the backlight only when 6LIGHT is
pressed.
Press 9ENTER to confirm the setting.
“OK” appears in the display window (4).
Press 9k/ nrepeatedly to select the desired setup
mode.
Page
Setup mode
Descriptions
Top setup mode menu.
5
y
Press GSETUP again to exit from the setup mode.
SETUP
LEARN
–
You can light up the backlight by pressing 6LIGHT anytime.
Learning mode. Use this feature to program codes
from other remote controls.
—
Preset mode. Use this feature to change the remote
control code of each control area.
Setting remote control codes (P-SET)
You can control other components by setting the appropriate remote
control codes. Codes can be set up for each control area. For a
complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “List of
remote control codes” at the end of this manual.
P-SET
RNAME
MACRO
CLEAR
ERASE
EX-IR
Renaming mode. Use this feature to change the
name of each control area.
Macro programming mode. Use this feature to set
the macro program.
The following table shows the default component (Library:
component category) and the remote control code for each control
area.
Clearing mode. Use this feature to clear the
configurations of this unit.
Erase mode. Use this feature to erase the learned
functions of each button.
Remote control code default settings
Extended IR code mode. This feature is for the
authorized custom installers only.
Library
Default
Manufacturer
Control area
(component
category)
code
Backlight mode. Use this feature to set the light up
mode of the remote control.
LIGHT
MULTI
V-AUX
DVD
—
Yamaha
—
04306
—
3
After the configurations, press GSETUP again to
exit from the setup menu.
PHONO
MD TAPE
—
—
—
MD
Yamaha
00409
BD
HD DVD
Note
DVD
Yamaha
04306
If you do not complete each of the operations within 30 seconds, this unit
automatically exits from the setup menu.
DVD
CD
DVD
CD
Yamaha
Yamaha
Yamaha
04306
01105
01405
Setting the backlight mode of the remote
control (LIGHT)
CD-R
CD-R
CBL
SAT
—
—
—
You can set the backlight mode of the remote control.
DTV
DVR
—
DVR
—
—
Yamaha
—
00707
—
1
Press GSETUP on the remote control using a
ballpoint pen or similar object.
“SETUP” appears in the display window (4) on the remote
control.
VCR
—
TUNER
DOCK
SOURCE
SOURCE
Yamaha
Yamaha
00012
00012
NET
USB
SOURCE
Yamaha
00012
2
Press 9k/ nrepeatedly to select “LIGHT” and then
press 9ENTER.
“LIGHT” and the current “LIGHT” setting appears in the
display window (4) alternately.
TAPE
—
Yamaha
—
00311
—
(TAPE)
TV
Note
You may not be able to operate your Yamaha component even if a Yamaha remote
control code is preset as listed above. In this case, try setting another Yamaha remote
control code.
LIGHT
ON
Current “LIGHT” setting
104 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote control features
Notes
1
2
Press GSETUP on the remote control using a
ballpoint pen or similar object.
The remote control enters the setup menu. “SETUP” appears in
the display window (4) on the remote control.
• “ERROR” appears in the display window (4) on the remote control if you press a
button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button
simultaneously.
• The supplied remote control does not contain all possible codes for commercially
available audio and video components (including Yamaha components). If operation
is not possible with any of the remote control codes, program the new remote control
function using the learning feature (see “Programming codes from other remote
controls (LEARN)” on page 105) or use the remote control supplied with the
component.
• Functions programmed using the learning mode take priority over remote control
code functions.
• If you set “00012” as the remote control code of the selected control area, you can
operate the currently selected internal source (DOCK, or NET/USB).
Press 9k/ nrepeatedly to select “P-SET” and then
press 9ENTER.
The remote control enters the preset mode. “P-SET” and name
of the currently selected control area appears in the display
window (4) alternately.
3
Set the operation mode selector to GSOURCE and
then press an input selector button or (3) or
5SELECT l/ hrepeatedly to select the control
area you want to customize.
“P-SET” and name of the selected control area appears in the
display window (4) alternately.
Programming codes from other remote
controls (LEARN)
You can program remote control codes from other remote controls.
Use the learning feature if you want to program functions not
included in the basic operations covered by the remote control
codes, or an appropriate remote control code is not available. You
can program the function of other remote control to the buttons in
the highlighted areas in the following illustration. The buttons can
be programmed independently for each control area.
P-SET
DVD
y
If you want to select “TV”, set the operation mode selector to FTV.
1
2
3
4
POWER POWER
STANDBY
POWER
LEVEL
TITLE
BAND
SRCH MODE VOLUME
MENU
PRESET/CH
TV
AV
MD
MULTI
V-AUX
DVD
PHONO
CD
TAPE
4
Press 9ENTER.
The five-digit code set for the selected control area appears in
the display window (4).
A-E
ENTER
BD
CD-R
VCR
HD DVD
RETURN
MEMORY
DISPLAY
MUTE
CBL
SAT
DTV
DVR
NET
USB
PC/MCX
REC
TUNER
DOCK
NET RADIO
USB
AMP
TV
Set to
SOURCE
SOURCE
SELECT
MACRO
CLASSICAL
1
1
CLASSICAL
2
2
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
SETUP
ID
3
4
04306
MOVIE
5
STEREO
6
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
7
8
THX
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT EXTD SUR.
9
0
10
ENT
Note
PARTY
SLEEP
HDMI OUT
MUTE
AUDIO SEL
AUDIO
TV VOL
TV CH
TV
3D DSP
INPUT
“00000” appears in the display window (4) if no code has been set.
5
6
Press the numeric buttons (B) to enter the
five-digit remote control code for the component you
want to use.
For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to
“List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual.
Notes
• The remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote control also uses
infrared rays, this remote control can learn most of its functions. However, you may
not be able to program some special signals or extremely long transmissions. Refer to
the operating instructions for the other remote control.
• You cannot program the desired remote control code even if you select the buttons in
the highlighted area in the above illustration depending on the selected control area
and the assigned library.
y
You can also enter the desired number by pressing 9 k/ n/ l/ hrepeatedly.
Press 9ENTER to set the number.
“OK” appears in the display window (4) if setting was
successful.
“NG” appears in the display window (4) if the setting was
unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3.
1
Set the operation mode selector to FSOURCE and
then press an input selector button or (3) to select
the desired control area.
The name of the control area you want to customize appears in
the display window (4) on the remote control.
y
y
If you continuously want to set up another code for another control area, repeat
steps 3 through 6.
• You can also select the desired control area by pressing 5SELECT l/ h
repeatedly.
• If you want to select “TV”, set the operation mode selector to FTV.
G
Press SETUP again to exit from the setup mode.
7
8
Note
F
Make sure that the operation mode selector is set to SOURCE or FTV. When
A
Press por 2AV POWER to confirm whether you
can control your component using the remote
control.
you set the operation mode selector to FAMP and program a remote control
codes from other remote controls, the programmed key cannot operate the
amplifier function of this unit.
y
2
Press GSETUP using a ballpoint pen or similar
object.
If operation is not possible and the manufacturer of your component has more than one
code, try each of them until you find the correct one.
“SETUP” appears in the display window (4).
105 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote control features
Notes
3
Press 9k/ nrepeatedly to select “LEARN” and then
press 9ENTER.
The remote control enters the learning mode. “LEARN” and
the name of the selected control area appears in the display
window (4) alternately.
• “ERROR” appears in the display window (4) on the remote control if you press a
button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button
simultaneously.
• This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions. However, depending on
the signals learned, “FULL” may appear in the display before you program 200
functions. In this case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room for
further learning.
• Learning may not be possible in the following cases:
– when the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other components are weak.
– when the distance between the two remote controls is too great or too small.
– when the remote control infrared windows are not facing each other at the
appropriate angle.
START
DVD
– when the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight.
– when the function to be programmed is continuous or uncommon.
4
Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in)
apart from the other remote control on a flat surface
so that their infrared transmitters are aimed at each
other and then press 9ENTER.
Changing source names in the display
window (RNAME)
“L–KEY” appears in the display window (4).
Other remote control
You can change the name of the control area (input source) that
appears in the display window (4) on the remote control if you
want to use a different name than the factory preset. This feature is
useful when you have set an control area to control a different
component.
1
Set the operation mode selector to FSOURCE and
then press an input selector button or (3) to
select the desired control area.
5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in)
The name of the control area you want to customize appears in
the display window (4) on the remote control.
5
6
Press the button for which you want to program the
new function.
“START” appears in the display window (4).
BD/HD
2
3
Press GSETUP using a ballpoint pen or similar
object.
“SETUP” appears in the display window.
Press 9k/ nrepeatedly to select “RNAME” and then
press 9ENTER.
The remote control enters the renaming mode. “RNAME” and
the name of the selected control area appears in the display
window alternately.
Press and hold the button you want to program on
the other remote control until “OK” appears in the
display window (4).
“NG” appears in the display window (4) if learning was
unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4.
RNAME
BD/HD
y
You can change the renamed control area by pressing an input selector button or
(3) or 5SELECT l/ hrepeatedly.
Other remote control
4
Press 9k/ nrepeatedly to select 3-letter name or 5-
letter name you want to edit.
y
Each control area has both 3-letter name and 5-letter name.
You can rename the 3-letter name and 5-letter name
independently.
• When you want to program another function, repeat steps 4 and 6.
• When you continuously want to program another function for another control
area, set the operation mode selector to FSOURCE and then press
5SELECT l/ hrepeatedly and then repeat steps 4 through 6. If you want
to select “TV” as the control area, set the operation mode selector to FTV and
then repeat steps 4 through 6.
3-letter name
5-letter name
G
Press SETUP again to exit the setup menu.
7
BD
BD/HD
106 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote control features
Macro programming features
5
Press 9ENTER.
The edit screen of the name of the currently selected control
area appears in the display window (4).
The macro programming feature makes it possible to perform a
series of operations with the press of a single button. For example,
when you want to play a CD, normally you would turn on the
components, select the CD input, and press the play button to start
playback. The macro programming feature lets you perform all of
these operations simply by pressing the CD macro button. The
buttons listed as macro buttons below are factory set with macro
BD/HD
6
7
Press 9l/ hrepeatedly to move the cursor (_) to
the position you want to edit.
■ Recalling programmed macro-operations
Press 9k/ nrepeatedly to select and enter the
desired character.
POWER POWER
STANDBY
POWER
TV
AV
Pressing 9kchanges the character as follows:
A to Z, a to z, 0, 1 to 9, space, - (minus), + (plus), / (slash) and
: (colon).
MD
MULTI
V-AUX
DVD
PHONO
CD
TAPE
Macro buttons
MACRO
BD
CD-R
VCR
HD DVD
CBL
SAT
DTV
DVR
NET
USB
TUNER
DOCK
y
AMP
TV
Pressing 9nchanges the characters in reverse order.
SOURCE
SELECT
MACRO
MODE
SETUP
ID
ZONE
SYSTEM MEMORY
8
9
Repeat steps 6 and 7 until you change all the letters
you want.
1
2
3
4
1
2
Press HMACRO on the remote control.
Press 9ENTER to set the new name.
“OK” appears in the display window (4) on the remote
control if renaming was successful.
MACRO
y
When you want to rename the another name of the selected control area, press the
Press the desired macro button.
input selector button
(3) or 5SELECT l/ hrepeatedly to select the
desired control area and then press 9ENTER and then carry out the operations
of steps 4 through 9.
“M:the 3-letter name of the selected control area” (for
example, “M:DVD”) appears in the display window (4), and
this unit transmits the programmed functions. When you press
DSTANDBY or EPOWER, “M:STB” or “M:PWR” appears
in the display window (4), and this unit transmits the
programmed functions.
G
10 Press SETUP again to exit the setup menu.
The new name of the control area appears in the display
window (4).
3
Press HMACRO again to exit from the macro-
operation mode.
HDDVD
Notes
Note
• While the remote control is running a macro program, it does not accept any other
operation until it has completed running the program (the transmission indicator in
the display stops flashing).
“ERROR” appears in the display window (4) on the remote control if you press a
button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button
simultaneously.
• Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro is operating until the
macro operation is complete.
• If you do not complete each of the operations within 30 seconds, this unit
automatically exits from the macro-operation mode.
107 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote control features
■ Default macro functions
2
Press 9k/ nrepeatedly to select “MACRO” and then
press 9ENTER.
The remote control enters the macro-programming mode.
“MACRO” and “M:the three-letter name of the selected control
area” (for example, “M:DVD”) appears in the display window
(4) alternately.
Pressing
macro
To automatically transmit these signals
First
Second
STANDBY
STANDBY
—
POWER
POWER
(*1)
TV
MULTI
V-AUX
PHONO
MULTI
MACRO
M:DVD
V-AUX
PHONO
3
4
Press the desired macro button you want to assign
the macro program to and then press 9ENTER.
“M:the three-letter name of the selected macro button” (for
example, “M:DVD”) and the name of the currently selected
control area appears in the display window (4) alternately.
When you press DSTANDBY or EPOWER, “M:STB” or
“M:PWR” and the name of the currently selected control area
appears in the display window (4) alternately.
MD
MD
TAPE
TAPE
BD
BD
HD DVD
HD DVD
DVD
CD
DVD
CD
Press the buttons for the functions you want to
include in the macro operation in sequence.
POWER
CD-R
CD-R
Example
CBL
SAT
CBL
SAT
Set the input source to DVD → Turn on the DVD player →
Turn on the video monitor
DTV
DVR
DTV
DVR
Step 1 (“MCR1”): Press DVD.
Step 2 (“MCR2”): Press AV POWER.
Step 3 (“MCR3”): Press TV POWER.
VCR
VCR
POWER POWER
STANDBY
POWER
TV
AV
3
V-AUX
2
PHONO
TUNER
DOCK
TUNER
DOCK
MD
MULTI
TAPE
BD
DVD
CD
CD-R
VCR
HD DVD
1
CBL
SAT
DTV
VR
NET
USB
TUNER
DOCK
(*2)
NET
USB
NET
USB
Indicates the number of macro
steps entered
MCR 1
*2 This unit plays the last received station or selected contents before the
unit was set in the standby mode.
(Selected macro button)
M:DVD
■ Programming macro operations (MACRO)
You can program your own macro and use the macro programming
feature to transmit several remote control commands in sequence at
the press of a button. Be sure to set up remote control codes or
perform learning operations before programming the macro.
Flashes alternately so you can set the
next step
(Selected control area)
DVD
Notes
• The default macro is not cleared when a new macro is programmed for a button. The
default macro can be used again when the programmed macro is cleared.
• It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the default macro. Programming
a macro changes all macro contents.
• We do not recommend that you program continuous operations (for example, volume
control) in a macro.
Notes
5
• To change the selected input area, press SELECT l/ h. Pressing the
input selector buttons or
will program a macro step, whereas
5
SELECT l/ honly changes the selected input area.
• The position of the operation mode selector (AMP/TV/SOURCE) affects the
assigned function. When the operation mode selector is set to FAMP or
FTV, the input source selectors do not function.
1
Press GSETUP on the remote control using a
ballpoint pen or similar object.
5
Press HMACRO to confirm the program.
You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you have set 10
steps, “FULL” appears and the remote control automatically
exits from the macro programming mode.
“SETUP” appears in the display window (4).
108 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote control features
Notes
6
Press GSETUP again to exit from the setup mode.
• “NG” appears in the display window (4) if clearing was unsuccessful.
• “ERROR” appears in the display window (4) if you press a button not indicated in
the respective step, or if you press more than one button simultaneously.
Note
“ERROR” appears in the display window (B) if you press more than one button
simultaneously.
5
Press GSETUP again to exit from the setup mode.
Clearing configurations
■ Clearing a learned function (ERASE)
You can clear all changes made in each function set, such as learned
functions, macros, renamed control area names and setup remote
control ID.
1
2
Press GSETUP using a ballpoint pen or similar
object.
“SETUP” appears in the display window (4).
■ Clearing function sets (CLEAR)
Press 9k/ nrepeatedly to select “ERASE” and then
press 9ENTER.
The remote control enters the learning mode. “ERASE” and
the name of the currently selected control area appears in the
display window (4) alternately.
1
Press GSETUP on the remote control using a
ballpoint pen or similar object.
“SETUP” appears in the display window (4).
2
Press 9k/ nrepeatedly to select “CLEAR” and then
press 9ENTER.
The remote control enters the clear mode. “CLEAR” and
“L:the three-letter name of the selected control area” (for
example, “L:DVD”) appears in the display window (4)
alternately.
ERASE
DVD
F
3
Set the operation mode selector to SOURCE and
then press an input selector button or (3).
“ERASE” and the name of the selected control area appears in
the display window (4) alternately.
CLEAR
L:DVD
y
• You can also select the desired control area by pressing 5SELECT l/ h
repeatedly.
• If you want to erase the function learned in the AMP or TV control area, set the
operation mode selector to FAMP or FTV.
3
Press 9k/ nrepeatedly to select the desired clear
mode.
Clear mode
Descriptions
4
5
Press 9ENTER.
L:DVD (etc.)
(L:Three-digit name of the selected control area) Clears all
learned functions the respective control area. You can
change the control area to be cleared by pressing the desired
“E-KEY” appears in the display window (4).
input selector button or
repeatedly.
(3) or 5SELECT l/ h
Press and hold the button you want to clear for about
3 seconds.
If clearing is successful, “ERASE” and “OK” appears in the
display window (4).
L:AMP
L:TV
Sets all learned functions for controlling the amplifier
functions to the initial factory settings. Set the operation
mode selector to FAMP to select this clear mode.
Clears all learned functions for TV control area. Set the
operation mode selector to FTV to select this clear mode.
ERASE
OK
L:ALL
Clears all learned functions.
y
M:DVD (etc.)
(M:Name of the selected macro button) Clears the macro
The assigned macro to the selected macro button reverts to
the initial factory macro. Press the desired macro button if
you want to change the macro button you want to clear the
programmed functions of.
• If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat step 3.
• Once you clear a learned function, the button reverts to the factory setting (or to
the manufacturer setting if you have set remote control codes).
6
Press GSETUP again to exit from the setup mode.
M:ALL
Clears all programmed macros. The assigned macro to the
selected macro button reverts to the initial factory macro.
Notes
• “NG” appears in the display window (4) on the remote control if clearing was
unsuccessful.
• “ERROR” appears in the display window (4) if you press more than one button
simultaneously.
RNAME
FCTRY
Set all the name of the control areas to the default settings.
Set all settings of the remote control to the initial factory
settings.
4
Press and hold 9ENTER for about 3 seconds.
When the clearing is successful, “OK” appears in the display
window (4).
109 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote control features
Simplified remote control
Use the supplied simplified remote control to make basic controls of this unit.
POWER
STANDBY
STANDBY
POWER
Sets the selected zone to the
Turn on the power.
standby mode.
SYSTEM MEMORY
1
2
3
4
SYSTEM MEMORY
Save or recall the system settings.
INPUTl/ h
Select the input source.
INPUT
INT SOURCE
PRESET
VOLUME
PRESET +/–
Recall the preset network/USB
contents.
VOLUME +/–
Adjust the volume level.
MUTE
s(stop) / p(play) /
b(skip backward) /
a(skip forward)
Control playback of the iPod or
Network/USB contents.
MUTE
Mutes the audio output.
Remove the insulation sheet before using the remote
control.
Note
When you select “NET/USB” as the input source, this unit activates the last selected sub input source (see page 67).
■ Setting the controlling zone of the simplified
remote control
Use this feature to set the controlling zone (see page 116) and
■ Replacing the battery in the simplified remote
control
Change the battery when the operation range of the simplified
remote control decreases.
Setting the remote control ID
Press and hold bon the simplified remote control and then 1 or
2 for 3 seconds to select the desired remote control ID.
•
•
ID1: Press and hold band 1.
ID2: Press and hold band 2.
Setting the controlling zone
Press and hold aon the simplified remote control and then 1, 2,
3, or 4 to select the desired zone.
Use a straight
pin to remove
the cover.
Replace the battery
with a new CR2025
battery.
Close the cover.
•
•
•
•
Main zone: Press and hold aand then press 1.
Zone 2: Press and hold aand 2.
Zone 3: Press and hold aand 3.
Zone 4: Press and hold aand 4.
Notes
•
•
Insert the battery according to the polarity markings (+ and –).
If the batteries run out, immediately remove them from the simplified
remote control to prevent an explosion or acid leak.
•
If a battery starts leaking, dispose of it immediately. Be careful not to let
the leaking battery acid touch your skin or clothing.
•
•
Before inserting new batteries, wipe the compartment clean.
Dispose of batteries according to your regional regulations.
110 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using multi-zone configuration
Using multi-zone configuration
This unit allows you to configure a multi-zone audio/video system.
The multi-zone configuration feature enables you to set this unit to
reproduce separate input sources in the main zone, second zone
(Zone 2), third zone (Zone 3), and forth zone (Zone 4). You can
control this unit from the second, third, or forth zone using the
supplied remote control.
Step1: Planning the multi-zone system
This unit can control the audio and video system in the main zone
and up to 3 optional zone (Zone 2, Zone 3, and Zone 4), and you can
use the internal amplifiers or external amplifiers in Zone 2, Zone 3,
or Zone 4.
The multi-zone system configuration differs depending on your
requirements and equipment. Before connecting the speakers and/or
external amplifiers for the multi-zone configuration, plan the total
design of your multi-zone system.
When you plan the system, consider the following points:
1. Do you want to use the internal amplifiers of this unit or
external amplifiers?
Step 1: Planning the multi-zone system
First, plan the total multi-zone system with this unit
carefully.
2. How many zones do you want to use this unit for?
3. How many channels do you want to use in the main zone?
4. If you use the internal amplifiers for the other zones, you
cannot use some channels in the main zone in some cases.
5. How many speakers do you have?
6. Do you want to use the visual sources other than the main
zone?
Step 2: Connecting the speakers and/
or external amplifiers
y
Wire cables between rooms and connect the component
and speakers to this unit.
Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-zone
configuration, we recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized Yamaha
dealer or service center for the planning and setup of the multi-zone system that best
meet your requirements.
Pre-amplifier mode
If you want use the external amplifiers for the all channels in the
main zone, you can use all the speaker terminals on this unit for
Zone 2, Zone 3, and/or Zone 4 (Pre-amplifier mode). Set
“PREAMP MODE” to “ON” in the advanced setup (see
Step 3: Set the zone parameters
Once you have finished the connections, turn on this unit
and then set the parameters in “Multi Zone” menu (see
– Use “Zone SP Assign” to designate the speaker
terminals on this unit to each zone.
– Use “Zone2 Set”, “Zone3 Set”, or “Zone4 Set”
parameters to set the volume settings and other
functions in each zone.
In the following instruction, following system configuration is the
example. When you use this system configuration, you can enjoy
7.2-channel playback in the main zone and 2-channel playback in
the optional two zones. You can also enjoy 5.2-channel playback in
the main zone and 2-channel playback in the optional three zones.
This unit
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
P
U
R
E
D
I
R
E
C
T
ON
ON/OFF
OFF
INPUT
T
T
M
M
M
T
ROGRA
M
VOLUME
E
E
E
'
/
T
M
Z
2
L
Z
O
Z
Z
PS
ETE
IT E
O
A
O
E
M
☞ P. 91
Main zone
Zone 2
Zone 4
Zone 3
Speakers you can use simultaneously
Speakers you can use alternately. If you turn on
Zone 4, the surround back speakers in the main
zone do not output sounds.
111 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using multi-zone configuration
Step2: Connecting the speakers, external amplifiers, and/or other components
You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-room functions of this unit:
•
•
An infrared signal receiver in Zone 2, Zone 3, and/or Zone 4.
An infrared emitter in the main room. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in Zone 2, Zone 3, and/or Zone
4 to the main room (to a CD player or DVD player, for example).
•
•
An amplifier and speakers for Zone 2, Zone 3, and/or Zone 4.
A video monitor for the second room.
■ Using the internal amplifier of this unit
Important safety notice
The speaker terminals of this amplifier should not be connected to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or more than one loudspeaker per
channel.
Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or multiple speakers per channel could create an abnormally low impedance load
resulting in amplifier damage. See this owner’s manual for correct usage.
Compliance with minimum speaker impedance information for all channels must be maintained at all times. This information is found on
the back panel of your amplifier.
To make the system of the example, connect the speakers in the
main zone and other zones as follows:
You can assign the following speaker terminals to Zone 2, Zone 3,
and/or Zone 4 freely.
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
Right speaker
terminals
Left speaker
terminals
SPEAKERS
TAL OUT
L
+
+
RS-2
+
R
L
L
+
REAR
REAR
R
Zone 4
Zone 3
REAR
PRESENCE
/ZONE
PRESENCE
/ZONE
PRESENCE
/ZONE
REAR
PRESENCE
/ZONE
R
FRONT
FRONT
PRESENCE
/ZONE
PRESENCE
/ZONE
FRONT
L
PRESENCE
/ZONE
FRONT
E
PRESENCE
/ZONE
1
2
3
4
5
6
TRI
O
Main zone
surround
SURROUND
SURROUND
(SINGLE)
SURROUND
(SINGLE)
SURROUND
1
2
Main zone
surround
back
T
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
+12v
15mA
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
B
B
REM
FRONT B/
ZONE
FRONT B/
ZONE
Zone 2
IN
1
D
EXTRA SP
EXTRA SP
FRONT B
/ZONE
FRONT B
/ZONE
A
A
EXTRA SP
Main zone
front
EXTRA SP
OUT
FRONT
A
FRONT
A
FRONT A
SPEAKERS
IN
2
FRONT A
Main zone
center
CENTER
7
NETWORK
USB
HDMI
SPEAKERS
IN1
IN2
DVD
IN3
IN4
OUT
1
OUT
2
DVD
CBL/SAT
ZONE OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
PB
DVR
RS-232C
COMPONENT VIDEO
BD/
DVD
HD A
VIDEO IN
VIDEBOD/OHDUT
S
DVD
VIDEO
VIDEO
DOCK
DIGITAL OUT
Y
PB
PR
MONITOR
OUT
+
+
DTV
3
3
CBL/SAT
4
DVR
5
5
VCR
4
DVR
5
VCR
Y
PR
1
1
2
R
L
REAR
REAR
PRESENCE
/ZONE
PRESENCE
/ZONE
ZONE
COAXIAL
CD-R
DVD
B
FRONT
FRONT
VIDEO
2
OPTICAL
MD/TAPE
CBL/SAT
C
PRESENCE
/ZONE
PRESENCE
/ZONE
AUDIO IN
CBL/SAT
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN
MD/TAPE CD
DVD
DTV
4
DVR
VCR
4
DVR
5
VCR
CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD-R
TUNER
PHONO
L
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
3
4
5
6
L
DVR
D
DVD
R
SURROUND
(SINGLE)
SURROUND
R
L
1
2
CBL/SAT
DVR
FRONT (6CH)
CENTER
(FRONT)
(SINGLE)
SUR. BACK
AC IN
+12v
15mA MAX.
L
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
REMOTE
R
R
OPTICAL
CD
IN
1
(REAR)
FRONT
REAR
FRONT
/ZONE
B
SB (8CH)
MULTI CH INPUT
AC OUTLET
SURROUND SUBWOOFER ZONE
2
ZONE
ZONE OUT
3
ZONE
4
FRONT
SURROUND
CENTER
GND
FRONT
/ZONE
B
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
PRESENCE
PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
EXTRA SP
OUT
BD/
HD DVD
FRONT
A
IN
2
FRONT
A
DVD
7
COMPONENT VIDEO
PB PR
Y
OUT
1
CENTER
DTV
MONITOR
OUT
8
COAXIAL
DIGITAL IN
2
112 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using multi-zone configuration
■ Using external amplifiers
When you use the external amplifiers in the Zone 2, Zone 3, and/or Zone 4, connect the external amplifiers to the ZONE OUT jacks of this
unit with the analog audio cables.
Notes
• To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT use the Zone 2/Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS.
• Adjust the Zone 2/Zone 3 volume by using the amplifier in the second/third room when “Zone2 Volume”, “Zone3 Volume”, or “Zone4 Volume” are set to “Fixed” (see page 91).
This unit
USB
NETWORK
HDMI
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
OUT
1
OUT
2
DVD
DVD
CBL/SA
T
ZONE OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
PB
DV
RS-232C
COMPONENT VIDEO
BD/
DVD
VIDEO IN
VIDEBOD/OHDUT
S
DVD
VIDEO
DTV
Y
PB
PR
MONITOR
OUT
VIDEO
DOCK
DIGITAL OUT
+
+
1
2
3
CBL/SAT
4
DVR
5
VCR
4
DVR
5
VCR
Y
PR
R
HD A
L
REAR
PRESENCE
/ZONE
REAR
PRESENCE
/ZONE
ZONE
COAXIAL
CD-R
DVD
B
FRONT
FRONT
CBL/SA
C
T
VIDEO
2
OPTICAL
MD/TAPE
PRESENCE
/ZONE
PRESENCE
/ZONE
AUDIO IN
CBL/SA
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN
MD/TAPE CD
1
DVD
DTV
3
T
4
DVR
5
VCR
4
DVR
5
VCR
CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD-R
TUNER
PHONO
L
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
5
6
L
DVR
D
DVD
R
SURROUND
SURROUND
R
L
1
2
CBL/SAT
FRONT (6CH)
CENTER
(FRONT)
(SINGLE)
SUR. BACK
AC IN
L
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
S
-
REMOTE
R
R
OPTICAL
CD
IN
1
(REAR)
FRONT
REAR
FRONT
/ZONE
B
SB (8CH)
MULTI CH INPUT
AC OUTLET
S
U
R
R
O
U
N
D
S
U
B
W
O
O
F
E
R
Z
O
N
E
2
ZONE
ZONE OUT
3
ZONE
4
FRONT
SURROUND
CENTER
GND
FRONT
/ZONE
B
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
PRESENCE
PRESENCE
E
X
T
R
A
S
P
OUT
E
X
T
R
A
S
P
BD/
H
D
D
V
D
FRONT
A
IN
2
FRONT
A
DVD
7
COMPONENT VIDEO
PB PR
Y
OUT
1
CENTER
DTV
MONITOR
OUT
8
COAXIAL
DIGITAL IN
2
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
ZONE 4
ZONE OUT
L
R
L
R
L
R
Audio in
Audio in
Audio in
Other amplifier
Other amplifier
Other amplifier
Zone 2
Zone 3
Zone 4
Compatible audio signals in the Zone 2, Zone 3, and/or Zone 4
When you connect the external amplifiers in Zone 2, Zone 3, and/or Zone 4 to the ZONE OUT jacks on this unit, this unit can transmit the
analog audio signals only. In this setting, this unit cannot play back the digital audio sources input at the DIGITAL IN jacks and HDMI IN
jacks in Zone 2, Zone 3, and/or Zone 4.
y
When this unit is in the party mode (see page 118), this unit can output the audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks or DIGITAL IN jacks at the ZONE OUT jacks.
■ Using the ZONE DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack
When you connect an external amplifier in Zone 2 to the ZONE DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack, you can play back the digital and analog
audio sources in Zone 2.
Audio signal flow for Zone 2
SPEAKERS
USB
NETWORK
HDMI
SPEAKERS
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
OUT
VIDEO IN
1
OUT
2
D
CBL/S
ZONE OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
PB
DV
RS-232C
COMPONENT VIDEO
BD/
DVD
VIDEBOD/OHDUT
S
DVD
VIDEO
DTV
Y
PB
PR
MONITOR
OUT
VIDEO
DOCK
DIGITAL OUT
+
+
1
2
3
3
CBL/SAT
4
DVR
5
5
VCR
4
DVR
5
VCR
Y
PR
R
DIGITAL OUT
HD A
L
REAR
PRESENCE
Z
REAR
PRESENCE
/ZONE
ZONE
COAXIAL
CD-R
DVD
B
FRONT
CBL/SA
T
VIDEO
2
OPTICAL
MD/TAPE
PRESENCE
/ZONE
E
/ZONE
AUDIO IN
CBL/SA
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN
MD/TAPE CD
C
1
DVD
DTV
T
4
DVR
VCR
4
DVR
5
VCR
CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD-R
TUNER
PHONO
L
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
3
4
5
6
L
DVR
D
DVD
R
SURROUND
SURROUND
(SINGLE)
R
L
Input
Output
1
2
CBL/SA
T
FRONT (6CH)
CENTER
(FRONT)
(SINGLE)
SUR. BACK
AC IN
L
ZONE
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
DVR
REMOTE
R
R
OPTICAL
CD
IN
1
(REAR)
FRONT
REAR
FRONT
/ZONE
B
SB (8CH)
MULTI CH INPUT
AC OUTLET
S
U
R
R
O
U
N
D
S
U
B
W
O
O
F
E
R
Z
O
N
E
2
ZONE
ZONE OUT
3
ZONE
4
FRONT
SURROUND
CENTER
GND
FRONT
/ZONE
B
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
PRESENCE
PRESENCE
COAXIAL
E
X
T
R
A
S
P
OUT
E
X
T
R
A
S
P
BD/
H
D
D
V
D
DIGITAL IN
COAXIAL
FRONT
A
IN
2
FRONT
A
ZONE
(COAXIAL)
DVD
7
COMPONENT VIDEO
PB PR
Y
OUT
1
CENTER
DTV
MONITOR
OUT
8
COAXIAL
DIGITAL IN
2
DIGITAL IN
OPTICAL
C
Coaxial in
ZONE OUT
AUDIO IN
Notes
• Even if you set “Zone2 Volume” to “Variable” (see page 91), the volume control on this unit does not function to the output level of the ZONE DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack.
• When this unit plays back the copy-protected audio files, this unit does not output any audio signals at the ZONE DIGITAL OUT jack.
113 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using multi-zone configuration
■ Connecting Zone video monitor
Connect the video monitor(s) in Zone 2 to the ZONE OUT VIDEO and/or ZONE OUT COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. If you connect the
multiple zone video monitors to ZONE OUT VIDEO and/or ZONE OUT COMPONENT VIDEO jacks, the video monitors play back the
same source simultaneously.
This unit
ZONE OUT
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
PB
NETWORK
HDMI
SPEAKERS
USB
SPEAKERS
Y
PR
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
OUT
VIDEO IN
1
OUT
2
DVD
DVD
CBL/SA
T
ZONE OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
PB
DVR
RS-232C
COMPONENT VIDEO
BD/
DVD
VIDEBOD/OHDUT
S
DVD
VIDEO
DTV
Y
PB
PR
MONITOR
OUT
VIDEO
DOCK
DIGITAL OUT
+
+
1
2
3
CBL/SAT
4
DVR
5
VCR
4
DVR
5
VCR
Y
PR
R
HD A
L
REAR
PRESENCE
ZONE
REAR
PRESENCE
/ZONE
ZONE
COAXIAL
CD-R
DVD
B
FRONT
RT
CBL/SA
C
T
VIDEO
2
OPTICAL
MD/TAPE
PRESENCE
/ZONE
E
AUDIO IN
CBL/SA
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN
MD/TAPE CD
1
DVD
DTV
3
T
4
DVR
5
VCR
4
DVR
5
VCR
CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD-R
TUNER
PHONO
L
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
3
4
5
6
L
DVR
D
DVD
R
SURROUND
SURROUND
(SINGLE)
R
L
1
2
CBL/SAT
FRONT (6CH)
CENTER
(FRONT)
(SINGLE)
SUR. BACK
AC IN
L
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
DVR
REMOTE
R
R
OPTICAL
CD
IN
1
(REAR)
FRONT
REAR
FRONT
/ZONE
B
SB (8CH)
MULTI CH INPUT
AC OUTLET
S
U
R
R
O
U
N
D
S
U
B
W
O
O
F
E
R
Z
O
N
E
2
ZONE
ZONE OUT
3
ZONE
4
FRONT
SURROUND
CENTER
GND
FRONT
/ZONE
B
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
PRESENCE
PRESENCE
E
X
T
R
A
S
P
OUT
E
X
T
R
A
S
P
BD/
H
D
D
V
D
FRONT
A
IN
2
FRONT
A
DVD
7
COMPONENT VIDEO
PB PR
Y
OUT
1
CENTER
DTV
MONITOR
OUT
8
COAXIAL
DIGITAL IN
2
Source component
Component
in
Y
PB
PR
V
V
Video in
Video in
Zone monitor
Zone monitor
Zone monitor
Zone 2
Zone 3
Zone 4
■ Video signal up-conversion to the zone component video signals
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
Note
Low-quality video signals input at the VIDEO or S VIDEO jacks may not be output at the ZONE OUT COMPONENT VIDEO jacks correctly.
114 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using multi-zone configuration
■ Using REMOTE IN/OUT and TRIGGER OUT jacks for Zone 2, Zone 3, and Zone 4
You can use the REMOTE IN/OUT and TRIGGER OUT jacks on this unit for Zone 2, Zone 3, and Zone 4 as well as the main zone. Refer to
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
This unit is equipped with two REMOTE IN and REMOTE OUT jacks. You can use the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks to control this unit or other
component from Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4.
The following diagram shows an example of the connections.
This unit
Remote control
signal out
NETWORK
HDMI
SPEAKERS
USB
SPEAKERS
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
OUT
VIDEO IN
1
OUT
2
DVD
DVD
CBL/SA
T
ZONE OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
PB
DVR
RS-232C
COMPONENT VIDEO
BD/
VIDEBOD/OHDUT
S
DVD
VIDEO
DTV
Y
PB
PR
MONITOR
OUT
VIDEO
DOCK
DIGITAL OUT
+
+
1
2
3
3
CBL/SAT
4
DVR
5
5
VCR
4
DVR
5
VCR
Y
PR
R
DVD
HD A
L
REAR
REAR
PRESENCE
/ZONE
PRESENCE
/ZONE
ZONE
COAXIAL
CD-R
DVD
B
FRONT
FRONT
CBL/SA
C
T
VIDEO
2
OPTICAL
MD/TAPE
PRESENCE
/ZONE
PRESENCE
/ZONE
AUDIO IN
CBL/SA
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN
MD/TAPE CD
1
DVD
DTV
T
4
DVR
VCR
4
DVR
5
VCR
CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD-R
TUNER
PHONO
L
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
3
4
5
6
L
DVR
D
DVD
R
SURROUND
SURROUND
(SINGLE)
R
L
1
2
CBL/SA
T
FRONT (6CH)
CENTER
(FRONT)
(SINGLE)
SUR. BACK
AC IN
L
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
DVR
REMOTE
R
R
OPTICAL
CD
IN
1
(REAR)
FRONT
REAR
FRONT
/ZONE
B
SB (8CH)
MULTI CH INPUT
AC OUTLET
S
U
R
R
O
U
N
D
S
U
B
W
O
O
F
E
R
Z
O
N
E
2
ZONE
ZONE OUT
3
ZONE
4
FRONT
SURROUND
CENTER
GND
FRONT
/ZONE
B
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
PRESENCE
PRESENCE
E
X
T
R
A
S
P
OUT
E
X
T
R
A
S
P
BD/
H
D
D
V
D
FRONT
A
IN
2
FRONT
A
DVD
7
COMPONENT VIDEO
PB PR
Y
OUT
1
CENTER
DTV
MITOR
OUT
8
COAXIAL
DIGITAL IN
2
External amplifier
Remote control
signal in
REMOTE
DVD player (etc.)
IN
1
Remote control
OUT
Zone 2
IN
2
OUT
Remote control
signal in
CD player (etc.)
Remote
control
Remote control
signal out
Infrared signal
receiver
Zone 3
y
Some Yamaha models are able to connect directly to the REMOTE OUT jack on this unit. If you own these products, you may not need to use an infrared emitter. Up to six Yamaha
components can be connected as shown.
REMOTE
IN
REMOTE
IN
REMOTE
IN
OUT
REMOTE
OUT
OUT
Infrared signal
Yamaha component
Yamaha component
This unit
receiver
TRIGGER OUT jacks
This unit is equipped with two TRIGGER OUT jacks. You can turn on and off the component corresponding to the selection of the input
source of the desired zone or turning on and off the desired zone. Use “Trigger Output” in “Manual Setup” to set the functions of the
TRIGGER OUT jacks (see page 94).
This unit
SPEAKERS
USB
NETWORK
HDMI
SPEAKERS
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
OUT
VIDEO IN
1
OUT
2
DVD
DVD
CBL/SA
T
ZONE OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
PB
DVR
RS-232C
COMPONENT VIDEO
BD/
VIDEBOD/OHDUT
S
DVD
VIDEO
DTV
Y
PB
PR
MONITOR
OUT
VIDEO
DOCK
DIGITAL OUT
+
+
1
2
3
CBL/SAT
4
DVR
5
VCR
4
DVR
5
VCR
Y
PR
R
DVD
HD A
L
REAR
PRESENCE
/ZONE
REAR
PRESENCE
/ZONE
ZONE
COAXIAL
CD-R
DVD
B
FRONT
FRONT
CBL/SA
C
T
VIDEO
2
OPTICAL
MD/TAPE
PRESENCE
/ZONE
PRESENCE
/ZONE
AUDIO IN
CBL/SA
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN
MD/TAPE CD
1
DVD
DTV
3
T
4
DVR
5
VCR
4
DVR
5
VCR
CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD-R
TUNER
PHONO
L
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
3
4
5
6
L
DVR
D
DVD
R
SURROUND
SURROUND
(SINGLE)
R
L
1
2
CBL/SAT
FRONT (6CH)
CENTER
(FRONT)
(SINGLE)
SUR. BACK
AC IN
Trigger in
L
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
DVR
REMOTE
R
R
OPTICAL
CD
IN
1
(REAR)
FRONT
REAR
FRONT
/ZONE
B
SB (8CH)
MULTI CH INPUT
AC OUTLET
S
U
R
R
O
U
N
D
S
U
B
W
O
O
F
E
R
Z
O
N
E
2
ZONE
ZONE OUT
3
ZONE
4
FRONT
SURROUND
CENTER
GND
FRONT
/ZONE
B
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
PRESENCE
PRESENCE
E
X
T
R
A
S
P
OUT
E
X
T
R
A
S
P
BD/
H
D
D
V
D
FRONT
A
IN
2
FRONT
A
DVD
7
MPONENT VIDEO
PB PR
Y
OUT
1
CENTER
DTV
MONITOR
OUT
8
COAXIAL
DIGITAL IN
2
Power amplifier (etc.)
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
Trigger in
Zone 2 (etc.)
Projector (etc.) in the
main zone
115 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using multi-zone configuration
PREAMP MODE
Step3: Setting the zone parameter
After the connection, turn on this unit and then set the assignment of
the speaker terminals and other zone parameters.
When “PREAMP MODE” in the advanced setup is set to “ON”
(see page 120), you can assign all the speaker terminals of this
unit to Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4. The audio signals for the main
zone are only output at the PRE OUT jacks.
■ Assigning the zone speakers
Use “Zone SP Assign” to set the zone that each speaker terminal are
used for.
6
Once you have finished the settings of all the
speaker terminals, press 9ENTER to confirm the
setting and exit from the “Zone SP Assign” screen.
1
2
3
Press IMENU on the remote control.
The top GUI menu appears in the video monitor.
7
8
Set other zone parameters appropriately.
Press 9k/ nrepeatedly to select “Manual Setup”
and then 9h.
Once you have finished the settings of the zone
parameters, press IMENU to exit the GUI menu.
Press 9k/ nrepeatedly to select “Multi Zone” and
then 9h.
“Multi Zone” menu appears in the GUI screen.
Controlling Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4
You can select the zone you want to control by using the control
buttons on the front panel or on the remote control.
4
Press9k/ nrepeatedly to select “Zone SP Assign”
and then press 9h.
Following display appears in the GUI screen.
■ Basic operation
Front panel operations
M
2
3
4
F.PRNS
EXTRA
FRONT
CENTER
SUR.
Speaker B
K
K
K
1
Press ZONE 2, ZONE 3, or ZONE 4 on the
front panel to individually turn on or off Zone 2, Zone
3, or Zone 4.
Zone SP Assign
Party Mode Set
Zone2 Set
S.BACK
R.PRNS
Zone: ꢂ/ꢃ
SP terminal: ꢄ/ꢁ
Exit: ENTER
K
Press ZONE CONTROLS on the front panel
repeatedly to select the zone you want to control.
2
5
Press 9k/ nrepeatedly to select the desired
speaker terminals and then 9l/ hrepeatedly to
select the desired zone you want to use the speaker
connected to the selected speaker terminals.
When “PREAMP MODE” in the advanced setup is set to
“S.BACK” are fixed to “M” (the main zone).
K
Each time you press ZONE CONTROLS, the front panel
display changes as shown below, and the indicator for the
currently selected zone flashes for approximately 10 seconds.
However, no indicator flashes when the main zone is selected.
ZONE2
ZONE3
ZONE4
SP Assign” as follows:
No indicator flashes when the main zone is
selected.
Zone indications
M: Main zone
M 2 3 4
F.PRNS
ZONE2
Controls the Zone 2 functions.
2: Zone 2
3: Zone 3
4: Zone 4
EXTRA
FRONT
ZONE3
Controls the Zone 3 functions.
CENTER
SUR.
S.BACK
R.PRNS
ZONE4
Controls the Zone 4 functions.
Speaker terminal indications
y
• You must complete this step within 10 seconds while the selected zone flashes
in the front panel display. Otherwise, the currently selected zone mode is
automatically canceled. In this case, press KZONE CONTROLS again.
• The initial setting is ZONE2 when Zone 2, Zone 3, and Zone 4 are turned on.
F.PRNS: FRONT PRESENCE speaker terminals
EXTRA: EXTRA SP speaker terminals
FRONT: FRONT A speaker terminals
CENTER: CENTER speaker terminals
SUR.: SURROUND speaker terminals
S.BACK: SUR.BACK speaker terminals
R.PRNS: REAR PRESENCE speaker terminals
116 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using multi-zone configuration
Operate the following operations after activating the Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4
operation mode.
3
Perform the operations in the selected zone.
For further operations, refer to the following pages:
■ Selecting the input source Zone 2, Zone 3, or
Page
117
117
118
Descriptions
Zone 4
“Selecting the input source Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4”
“Adjusting the volume level of Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4”
“Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4”
D
Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or set
F
the operation mode selector to AMP and then press
3
one of the input selector buttons ( )) to select the input
y
source of the selected zone.
To turn off the desired zone, press KZONE 2, KZONE 3, or KZONE 4 again.
•
Select “DOCK” as the input source to use the iPod features in
the selected zone. For details about the iPod operations, see
Remote control operations
•
Select “NET/USB” as the input source to use the network/USB
operations features in the selected zone. For details about the
iPod operations, see “Using Network/USB features” on page 66.
H
Press ZONE repeatedly to select the zone you
want to control.
“MAIN”, “ZONE 2”, “ZONE 3”, or “ZONE 4” indicator
appears in the display window (4) on the remote control.
1
Notes
• The selected input sources are shared across all zones.
of Zone 2 is fixed to the source you set as the recording source.
ZONE 4
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
(Zone 2)
(Zone 3)
(Zone 4)
■ Adjusting the volume level of Zone 2, Zone 3, or
Zone 4
MAIN
(Main zone)
Rotate EVOLUME on the front panel (or press
JVOLUME +/–) to adjust the volume level of the
selected zone.
2
3
Press EPOWER to turn on the selected zone.
y
L
Press MUTE on the remote control to mute the sound output to the selected zone.
Perform the operations in the selected zone.
For further operations, refer to the following pages:
Note
J
When you use the external amplifiers in Zone 2 or Zone 3, VOLUME +/– can be
used only when “Zone2 Volume”, “Zone3 Volume”, or “Zone4 Volume” is set to
“Variable” in “Zone2 Set”, “Zone3 Set”, or “Zone4 Set” (see page 91).
Page
117
117
118
Descriptions
“Selecting the input source Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4”
“Adjusting the volume level of Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4”
“Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4”
■ Setting the sleep timer for Zone 2, Zone 3, or
Zone 4
Use this feature to turn off the desired zone to the standby mode
after a contain amount of time.
y
To turn off the desired zone, press DSTANDBY.
Set the operation mode selector to FAMP on the remote
control and then press CSLEEP repeatedly to set the
amount of time.
Each time you press CSLEEP, the sleep timer setting changes as
shown below.
120min.
OFF
90min.
60min.
30min.
117 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using multi-zone configuration
Operate the following operations after activating the Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4
operation mode.
Using the party mode
Use this feature to play the main zone sources in the other zones
simultaneously. This feature is useful to play back a back ground
music in multiple zone in a home party.
■ Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2, Zone 3, or
Zone 4
1
2
Press MTONE CONTROL on the front panel.
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
P
U
R
E
D
I
R
E
C
T
ON
ON/OFF
OFF
INPUT
G
G
M
O
O
M
TG
I
M
VOLUME
E
F
I
NLT
GO
SERC
E
O
O
O
F
T
L
LI
O
PH
ET
LI
E
ID
A
UDO
T
I
I
Press IPROGRAM repeatedly to select the high-
frequency response (TREBLE), the low-frequency
response (BASS).
3
Rotate IPROGRAM to adjust the high-frequency
response (BASS).
Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
1
4
2
3
■ Using the Zone OSD
You can browse and select the iPod or network/USB contents by
using the Zone OSD.
1
2
3
Set the operation mode selector to FSOURCE and
then press the desired input selector button (3).
1,2,3··· In the party mode, this unit distributes the same sources
to the zones which join the party mode.
Press KDISPLAY on the remote control to turn on
the Zone OSD.
4··· You can also operate the specific zone separately when
this unit is in the party mode.
Press 9k/ n/ l/ hand 9ENTER repeatedly to
navigate the menu on the Zone OSD.
Turning on the party mode
Before performing the following operations, set the operation mode selector on the
F
remote control to AMP.
TOP
PC/MCX
NET RADIO
USB
>
>
>
Press CPARTY on the remote control to turn on the
party mode.
“PARTY MODE ON” appears in the front panel display and then
the main zone and the zones which join the party mode are turned
on.
Notes
• The OSD menu appears in English even if you set “LANGUAGE” to “JAPANESE”
Turning off the party mode
• There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the front panel display or in the
OSD of this unit. Those characters are replaced with underscores “_”.
• You can set the time for which the Zone OSD is displayed in the Zone video monitor
Press CPARTY again to turn off the party mode.
“PARTY MODE OFF” appears in the front panel display and then
the main zone and the zones that joins the party mode are turned off.
y
• Short message displays are also appears in the Zone video monitor. Use “Zone OSD”
in “Manual Setup” to select that this unit displays the operational information of all
zones or Zone 2 only (see page 92).
y
When this unit is in the party mode, the audio signals that is input at the HDMI IN jacks
or DIGITAL IN jacks are output at the ZONE OUT jacks.
• You can display the status of the selected zone. Set the operation mode selector to
F
K
AMP and then press DISPLAY.
Notes
TOP
• If you select “MULTI CH” as the input source, this unit does not output any sounds
when this unit is in the party mode.
• When you change the input source of the zone that joins the party mode, the input
source of the main zone also changes same as the operated zone.
• When this unit is in the party mode, no signals are not output at the OUT (REC)
jacks.
PC/MCX
NET RADIO
USB
>
>
>
Selecting the zones joining the party mode
You can select the zone that joins the party mode by using the
“Party Mode Set” parameters. If a zone does not join the party
mode, you can play back a source in the zone independently
118 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced setup
Advanced setup
This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display.
The advanced setup menu offers additional operations to adjust and
customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in
bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening
environment.
Note
We recommend setting the parameter to “ON” in most cases.
■ Wake on RS-232C access RS-232C STANDBY
Use this feature to set this unit to transmit data via the RS-232C interface
when this unit is in the standby mode.
Notes
B
• The settings you make are reflected next time you press MASTER ON/OFF
inward to the ON position to turn on this unit (see page 39).
Choice
Functions
I
B
YES
• Only MASTER ON/OFF and PROGRAM are effective while you are using
the advanced setup menu.
Select this setting to set this unit to transmit data via the
RS-232C interface.
• All the other operations cannot be made while you are using the advanced setup
menu.
• The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display.
NO
Select this setting to set this unit not to transmit data via
the RS-232C interface.
■ Network standby NET STANDBY
Use this feature to select whether this unit accepts the commands via LAN
Using the advanced setup menu
Choice
Functions
B
1
Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to
release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this
unit.
YES
Accepts the operations via LAN network when this unit
is in the standby mode.
NO
Does not accept the operations via LAN network when
this unit is in the standby mode.
I
Press and hold PROGRAM and then press
2
B
MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to
Note
turn on this unit.
If you set “NET STANDBY” to “YES”, the amount of power consumption in the
standby mode is increased.
I
Press and hold PROGRAM until “ADVANCED SETUP” appears
in the front panel display.
■ Remote control ID setting REMOTE CON AMP
Use this feature to set the remote control ID of this unit for remote control
recognition.
I
Rotate the PROGRAM to select the parameter you
want to adjust.
3
Choice
Descriptions
The name of the selected parameter appears in the front panel display.
ID1
Select this setting when the ID of the remote control is set
to “ID1”.
I
Push PROGRAM repeatedly to change the
4
5
ID2
Select this setting when the ID of the remote control is set
to “ID2”.
selected parameter setting.
Setting remote control ID
B
Press MASTER ON/OFF to release it outward to
the OFF position to save the new setting and turn off
this unit.
Use this feature to set the remote control ID. This feature is useful when you
control multiple Yamaha AV receiver or amplifier with using the remote
control.
y
The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on this unit.
Press GID repeatedly using a ballpoint pen or similar
object on the remote control to select the desired remote
control ID.
■ Speaker impedance SPEAKER IMP.
Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit so that it matches
that of your speakers.
Each time you press GID, the remote control ID indicator changes as shown
below.
Choice
Descriptions
8ΩMIN
Select this setting to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω.
The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher.
ID1
ID
6ΩMIN
Select this setting to set the speaker impedance to 6 Ω.
The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher.
ID2
■ Remote sensor REMOTE SENSOR
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the signal-receiving capability of
the remote control sensor on the front panel of this unit.
y
Choice
Descriptions
ON
Select this setting if you want to activate the signal-
receiving capability of the remote control sensor.
OFF
Select this setting if you want to deactivate the signal-
receiving capability of the remote control sensor.
119 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced setup
See page 119 for the operation of the advanced setup.
Notes
• Use “Initialize” in the sound field program menu to initialize the parameters of the
desired program (see page 81).
• When the network settings are reset, “DHCP” in “Network” is automatically set to
■ Cooling fan operation mode FAN MODE
Use this feature to set the operation of the cooling fan of this unit.
Choice
Descriptions
AUTO
Select this setting to set the fan to operate automatically
according to the temperature of this unit.
■ MAC address filter MAC FILTER
Use this feature to filter the access to this unit via LAN to control this unit
CONT.
Select this setting to set the fan to activate continuously
regardless of the temperature of this unit.
Choice
Descriptions
■ Bi-amplifier mode BI-AMP
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the bi-amplifier function.
ON
Only allows to accept the access from the PC whose
MAC address is registered to this unit.
OFF
Choice
Descriptions
Allows to accept the access from any PC.
ON
Select this setting if you want to activate the bi-amplifier
function.
y
You can register the MAC address that is allowed to access when “MAC FILTER” is set
to “ON” by using the Web browser (see page 101).
OFF
Select this setting if you want to deactivate the bi-
amplifier function.
■ TV format TV FORMAT
Use this feature to set the color encoding format of your television.
Choices: NTSC, PAL
Note
Initial setting:
[General and Korea models]: NTSC
[Other models]: PAL
When “BI-AMP” is set to “ON”, the SUR.BACK/BI-AMP terminals cannot be used to
connect surround back speakers in that the SUR.BACK/BI-AMP terminals are already
■ Pre-amplifier mode PREAMP MODE
Use this feature to select whether you use this unit as the pre-amplifier in the
main zone and use all the internal amplifiers for the other zones.
Note
This setting is applied to the video monitor in the main zone, Zone 2, Zone 3, and Zone
4.
Choice
Descriptions
■ HDMI monitor check MONITOR CHECK
ON
Select this setting when you use this unit as the pre-
amplifier in the main zone. The audio signals for the
main zone are only output at the PRE OUT jacks of this
unit. You can assign all speaker terminals for the other
zones.
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the monitor check function of this
unit.
Choice
Descriptions
YES
This unit receives the information of the available video
signal resolutions from the video monitor connected via
HDMI and you can only select the resolutions supported
by the video monitor in “HDMI Resolution” (see
page 90).
OFF
Select this setting to use the internal amplifiers of this
unit for the main zone, Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4.
■ Recovery and backup of the system settings
RECOV./BACKUP
Use this feature to save and restore the settings of this unit.
SKIP
You can select any resolution in “HDMI Resolution”.
■ Language LANGUAGE
Use this feature to select the language of your choice that appears in the GUI
(graphical user interface) menu, OSD display in the zone monitor and the
messages that appear in the front panel display.
Choice
RECOVERY
BACKUP
Select
Restoring the saved setting of this unit.
Saves the current settings of this unit.
Choices: ENGLISH (English), JAPANESE (Japanese), FRENCH
(French), GERMAN (German), SPANISH (Spanish), RUSSIAN
(Russian)
CANCEL
Cancels the recovery or backup of the settings of this
unit.
Notes
Note
• This unit does not save the preset network/USB items, and system memory settings.
• If no settings are saved, you cannot select “RECOVERY”.
Front panel
display
■ Parameter initialization INITIALIZE
LANGUAGE
GUI menu
Zone OSD
Use this feature to reset the parameters of this unit to the initial factory
settings. You can select the category of parameters to be initialized.
RUSSIAN
—
—
JAPANESE
Other languages
—
Choice
Descriptions
DSP PARAM
Select this setting to initialize all the parameters of
··· The selected language is displayed.
VIDEO
Select this setting except “Short Message” and “On
Screen” (see page 90).
— ··· The selected language is not displayed. The menu items and
messages are displayed in English.
NETWORK
ALL
Select this setting except “Short Message” and “On
Screen” (see page 90).
Select this setting to initialize all the parameters of
this unit.
CANCEL
Select this setting to cancel the initialization
procedure.
120 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Information
THX information ................................................................................................... 130
Sound field program information .......................................................................... 131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction
below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
■ General
Problem
Cause
Remedy
See page
This unit fails to turn on or The power cable is not connected or the plug is not Connect the power cable firmly.
—
enters the standby mode
soon after the power is
turned on.
completely inserted.
The speaker impedance setting is incorrect.
The protection circuitry has been activated.
Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers.
Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this unit and on
all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection
does not touch anything other than its respective connection.
This unit has been exposed to a strong external
electric shock (such as lightning or strong static
electricity).
Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cable,
plug it back in after 30 seconds and then use it normally.
—
No sound.
Incorrect input or output cable connections.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables
may be defective.
Audio input jack select is set to “HDMI”, “Coax/ Set the audio input jack select to “Auto”.
Opt” or “Analog”.
Audio input jack select is set to “Analog” while
the input source component outputs digital audio
signals.
Set the audio input jack select to “Auto” or
“Coax/Opt”.
No appropriate input source has been selected.
D
Select an appropriate input source with the INPUT selector
on the front panel (or the input selector buttons (3) on the
remote control).
Speaker connections are not secure.
The volume is turned down.
Secure the connections.
Turn up the volume.
—
The front speakers to be used have not been
selected properly.
Select the front speakers by pressing GSPEAKER A or
GSPEAKER B on the front panel.
The sound is muted.
L
J
—
Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote control to
resume audio output and then adjust the volume.
Signals this unit cannot reproduce are being input Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this unit.
from a source component, such as a CD-ROM.
The HDMI components connected to this unit do Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP copy
not support the HDCP copy protection standards. protection standards.
“Support Audio” is set to “Other” and HDMI
audio signals are not being played back on this
unit.
Set “Support Audio” in “Option” to “DSP-Z11”.
No picture.
The output and input for the picture are connected Set “Conversion” to “On” or connect your source components
to different types of video jacks.
in the same way as you connect your video monitor to this unit.
This unit outputs the video signals are not
supported in the video monitor connected to the
HDMI OUT jack.
Set the “INITIALIZE” to “VIDEO” to reset the video
parameters.
Set “MONITOR CHECK” to “YES”.
—
Input selector setting of the video monitor is
incorrect.
Set the input source selector setting of the video monitor
appropriately.
Pure Direct mode is active.
Turn off the Pure Direct mode.
—
Set “Pure Direct” in “Sound” to “Video On”.
Non-standard video signals are input.
The HDMI OUT jack that the video monitor is
connected is not selected.
Press CHDMI OUT on the remote control repeatedly.
Short message displays in “Short Message” is set to “Off”.
the main zone do not
“Conversion” is set to “Off”.
appear in the video
Set “Short Message” to “On”.
Set “Conversion” to “On”.
monitor.
The signals input at the HDMI input jacks are
being output at the HDMI OUT jack.
The sound suddenly goes The protection circuitry has been activated because Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct.
—
off.
of a short circuit, etc.
Check that the speaker wires are not touching each other and
then turn this unit back on.
The sleep timer has turned off this unit.
The sound is muted.
Turn on this unit, and play the source again.
—
L
J
Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote control to
resume audio output.
122 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause
Remedy
See page
Sound is heard from the
speaker on one side only.
Incorrect cable connections.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables
may be defective.
Incorrect settings in “Speaker Level”.
Adjust the “Speaker Level” settings.
Only the center speaker
When playing a monaural source with a CINEMA
outputs substantial sound. DSP program, the source signal is directed to the
center channel, and the front and surround
speakers output effect sounds.
No sound is heard from the
center speaker.
“Center” in “Speaker Set” is set to “None”.
Set “Center” to “Small” or “Large”.
One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for “11ch Try another sound field program if you want to output sound
Stereo”) has been selected and analog 2-channel
source is being input.
from the center speaker.
No sound is heard from the The sound field programs are turned off.
H
Press STRAIGHT to turn them on.
presence speakers.
You are using a source or program combination
Try another sound field program.
that does not output sound from all channels.
No sound is heard from the
surround speakers.
“
Surround” in “Speaker Set” is set to “None”.
Set “Surround” to “Small” or “Large”.
This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode and a
source which does not contain the surround
channel signals is being played back.
H
Press STRAIGHT on the front panel so that “STRAIGHT”
disappears from the front panel display.
No sound is heard from the “Bass Out” in “Speaker Set” is set to “Front” when Set “Bass Out” to “SWFR” or “Front & SWFR”.
subwoofer.
a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played.
“Bass Out” in “Speaker Set” is set to “SWFR” or Set “Bass Out” to “Front & SWFR”.
“Front” when a 2-channel source is being played.
The source does not contain low-frequency
signals.
No sound is heard from the “Surround” in “Speaker Set” is set to “None” and Set “Surround” and “Surround Back” to a setting other than
—
surround back speakers.
“Surround Back” is automatically set to “None”.
“None”.
“Surround Back” in “Speaker Set” is set to
“None”.
Set “Surround Back” to a setting other than “None”.
The audio input sources
cannot be played in the
desired digital audio signal
format. (Desired input
source indicator or
The connected component is not set to output
Dolby Digital or DTS digital signals.
Make an appropriate setting following the operating instructions
for your component.
Audio input jack select is set to “Analog”.
Set the audio input jack select to “Auto”.
decoder indicator in the
front panel display does
not light up.)
A humming sound is
heard.
Incorrect cable connections.
Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem persists, the
cables may be defective.
—
No connection from the turntable to the GND
terminal.
Connect the grounding cable of the turntable to the GND
terminal on this unit.
The volume level is low
while a record is being
played.
The record is being played on a turntable with an Connect the turntable to this unit through an MC-head amplifier.
MC cartridge.
The volume level cannot
The component connected to the AUDIO OUT
Turn on the power of the component.
—
be increased, or the sound jacks of this unit is turned off.
is distorted.
The sound effect cannot
be recorded.
It is not possible to record the sound effect with a
recording component.
A source cannot be
recorded by a digital
recording component
connected to the DIGITAL
OUTPUT jack.
The source component is not connected to the
DIGITAL INPUT jacks on this unit.
Connect the source component to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks.
Some components cannot record Dolby Digital or
DTS sources.
A source cannot be
The source component is not connected to the
analog AUDIO IN jacks on this unit.
Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO IN jacks.
Set “Memory Guard” to “Off”.
—
recorded by an analog
component connected to
the AUDIO OUT jacks.
The sound field
“Memory Guard” in “Option” is set to “On”.
parameters and some
other settings of this unit
cannot be changed.
This unit does not operate The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and then
properly.
external electric shock (such as lightning or
excessive static electricity) or by a power supply
with low voltage.
plug it in again after about 30 seconds.
123 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause
Remedy
See page
“CHECK SP WIRES”
appears in the front panel
display.
Speaker cables are short-circuited.
Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly.
There is noise interference This unit is too close to the digital or high-
Move this unit further away from such equipment.
—
—
from digital or radio
frequency equipment.
frequency equipment.
The picture is disturbed.
The video source uses scrambled or encoded
signals to prevent dubbing.
This unit suddenly enters
the standby mode.
The internal temperature becomes too high and the Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then turn it
overheat protection circuitry has been activated.
back on.
■ Remote control
Problem
Cause
Remedy
See page
The remote control does
not work or function
properly.
Wrong distance or angle.
The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6
m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees off-axis from the front
panel.
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of Reposition this unit.
fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote
control sensor of this unit.
—
The batteries are weak.
Replace all batteries.
—
The batteries do not last long and get quickly
exhausted.
Using alkaline batteries is strongly recommended.
Set the backlight mode to “OFF”.
Set the operation mode selector correctly.
When operating this unit, set it to the AMP position.When
operating the component selected by the input selector button,
—
The operation mode selector is set incorrectly.
The remote control code was not correctly set.
F
F
set it to the SOURCE position. When operating the TV, set it
F
to the TV position.
Set the remote control code correctly using
“List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual.
Try setting another code of the same manufacturer using “List
of remote control codes” at the end of this manual.
The remote control ID of the remote control and
this unit do not match.
Match the remote control ID of this unit and the remote control.
The remote control does
not work or function
properly.
Even if the remote control code is correctly set,
there are some models that do not respond to the
remote control.
Program the necessary functions independently into the
programmable buttons using the Learn feature.
The remote control does
not learn new functions.
The batteries of this remote control and/or the
other remote control are too weak.
Replace the batteries.
—
The distance between the two remote controls is
too much or too little.
Place the remote controls at the proper distance.
Learning is not possible.
The signal coding or modulation of the other
remote control is not compatible with this remote
control.
Memory capacity is full.
Delete other unnecessary functions to make room for the new
functions.
■ HDMI
Problem
Cause
Remedy
See page
The number of the connected HDMI components Reduce the number of the connected HDMI components.
is over the limit.
No picture or sound
—
HDCP authentication failed.
Check that the connected HDMI components support the HDCP
copy protection standards.
—
■ Network and USB
Problem
Cause
Remedy
See page
The PC server/MCX-2000/
Internet Radio does not
function properly.
The IP address is not set properly.
Set the DHCP server function of the router to ON.
Alternately, perform manual configuration according to the
current operating environment.
The network cable is not connected.
Connect it properly.
124 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause
Remedy
See page
The music in the PC server
cannot be played back.
The PC does not have Windows Media Player 11 Install Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media
or Windows Media Connect 2.0 installed in it. Connect 2.0 in the PC.
—
The music is recorded in a format that cannot be Play music recorded in a format that this unit is compatible
—
played on this unit. This unit cannot play music
formats other than WMA, MP3, MPEG-4 AAC,
and WAV (PCM format). Also note that it cannot
play certain music files even if these are recorded
in the WMA, MP3, MPEG-4 AAC, or WAV
format.
with.
The MusicCAST server cannot You are attempting to connect to MCX-1000. The Use MCX-2000 or the PC server.
—
be connected.
MusicCAST server that can be connected by this
unit is MCX-2000.
Auto Configuration is not executed.
Execute “Auto Configure”.
This unit recognized the USB storage device as
an illegal device.
Turn this unit off then on again.
“Disconnected” is displayed
even when a USB device is
present.
The Internet Radio cannot be
played.
The firewall of the network device is activated.
The Internet Radio can be played only when it
passes through the port designated by each radio
station. The port number is variable depending on
radio station.
Check the firewall setting of the network device.
—
Connection to the Internet is disconnected.
Check the configuration of the network device, and then
contact the network connection provider.
—
—
—
The music files and directories The music files and directories are placed in
Place music files and directories in the FAT area.
in the USB device cannot be
viewed.
locations other than the FAT area.
You are attempting to browse directory
hierarchies of over 8 levels or a directory with
more than 500 files.
Modify the data structure on your USB device.
The USB device cannot be
recognized.
The connected USB device is USB portable audio Some devices may become easier to recognize when they
player.
are inserted before turning this unit on.
This unit does not recall the
correct item by using numeric
buttons (1-8).
The connected USB device is incorrect.
Connect the USB device that stores the preset item.
Preset the desired item to the numeric button (1-8) again.
The directory that stores the selected item is
changed.
This unit does not recall the
selected item by using numeric
buttons (1-8).
The USB device is not connected correctly.
Connect the correct USB device properly.
Turn on the PC or MCX-2000.
The PC or MCX-2000 that stores the selected
item is turned off.
The selected Internet Radio station is temporary Try again when the selected Internet Radio is providing the
unavailable or out of service.
service.
Preset other Internet Radio stations.
Status message
Cause
Remedy
See page
This unit is in the middle of waking up MCX-2000 Wait for approximately 20 seconds.
that has been set to the standby mode.
Please wait
(Starting Server)
—
There is a problem with the signal path from your Check the connection between this unit and the LAN port on
Connect error
network to this unit.
your router or hub.
Make sure your router is properly connected and turned on.
Also, make sure your modem is properly connected and turned
on when you are attempting to listen to Internet Radio.
Your USB storage device or USB portable audio
player has been disconnected from the USB port
on this unit.
Check the connection between this unit and your USB storage
device or USB portable audio player.
Disconnected
—
The PC server or MCX-2000 previously connected Connect this unit to the available PC server or MCX-2000.
to this unit no longer exists.
—
—
—
There is a problem with the signal path from your Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB storage device or
USB storage device or USB portable audio player USB portable audio player to the USB port on this unit.
to this unit.
Try resetting your USB storage device or USB portable audio
player.
This unit cannot access your USB storage device
or USB portable audio player.
Try another USB storage device or USB portable audio player.
Access error
There is a problem with the signal path from your Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB storage device or
USB storage device or USB portable audio player USB portable audio player to the USB port on this unit.
to this unit.
Try resetting your USB storage device or USB portable audio
player.
125 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Status message
Cause
Remedy
See page
This unit cannot play back the songs currently
stored on your PC.
Make sure Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media
Connect 2.0 is installed on your PC.
Unable to play
—
Check that the songs currently stored on your PC are playable
(MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC, and WAV).
—
—
—
—
Store some other playable music files (MP3, WMA, MPEG-4
AAC, and WAV) on your PC.
The network may be overloaded with heavy traffic, Try preparing a network exclusively for use with this unit to
and playback is interrupted.
separate it from general network traffic.
This unit cannot find the license key of the file.
Acquire the license key of the file. For details, consult with the
supplier of the file.
License Unavailable
List updated
The list of the contents stored on your PC server or
MCX-2000 has been updated.
The desired Internet Radio station has been added
(removed) to the “Bookmarks” list.
Bookmark ON
(Bookmark OFF)
No items are assigned to the selected numeric
button.
Assign the desired item to the numeric button.
Empty Memory!
This unit cannot find the assigned item for the
selected numeric button.
Connect the USB device that stores the preset item.
Turn on the PC or MCX-2000.
Not found!
—
Try again when the selected Internet Radio is providing the
service.
Preset the desired item to the numeric button (1-8) again.
—
Over current passes through the connected USB
device.
Turn off this unit and then disconnect the USB device. If the
message appears when you connect the USB device again, this
unit may not compatible with the USB device.
USB Overloaded
■ iPod
Note
In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing in the front panel and in the video monitor, check the connection to your iPod (see page 36).
Status message
Loading...
Cause
Remedy
See page
This unit is in the middle of recognizing the
connection with your iPod.
This unit is in the middle of acquiring song lists
from your iPod.
Connect error
There is a problem with the signal path from your Turn off this unit and reconnect the Yamaha iPod universal dock
iPod to this unit.
to the DOCK terminal on this unit.
Try resetting your iPod.
—
—
Unknown iPod
iPod connected
The iPod being used is not supported by this unit. Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are
supported.
Your iPod is properly stationed in a Yamaha iPod
universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold
separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of
this unit, and the connection between your iPod
and this unit is complete.
Disconnected
Unable to play
Your iPod was removed from a Yamaha iPod
universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately)
connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit.
Station your iPod back in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such
as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal on
this unit.
This unit cannot play back the songs currently
stored on your iPod.
Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod are playable.
Store some other playable music files on your iPod.
—
—
■ Auto Setup
Before Auto Setup
Error message
Cause
Remedy
See page
Connect MIC!
Optimizer microphone is not connected.
Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the
OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel.
Unplug Phones!
No Setup Menu!
Headphones are connected.
Unplug the headphones.
—
No check items are selected as the measurement
items.
Select the desired check item.
Memory Guard!
“Memory Guard” is set to “On”.
Set “Memory Guard” to “Off”.
126 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
During Auto Setup
Error message
Cause
Remedy
See page
E01:No Front SP
E02:No Sur. SP
Front L/R channel signals are not detected.
A surround channel signal is not detected.
A front presence channel signal is not detected.
Check the front L/R speaker connections.
Check the surround speaker connections.
Check the front presence speaker connections.
E03:No F. PRNS SP
E04:SBR → SBL
Only right surround back channel signal is detected. Connect the surround back speaker to the
SUR.BACK/BI-AMP (SINGLE) terminal if you
only have one surround back speaker.
E05:Noisy
Background noise is too loud.
Try running “Auto Setup” in a quiet environment.
—
—
Turn off noisy electric equipment like air
conditioners or move them away from the optimizer
microphone.
E06:Check Sur.
E07:No MIC
Surround back speakers are connected, though
surround L/R speakers are not.
Connect surround speakers when you use surround
back speakers.
The optimizer microphone was unplugged during
the “Auto Setup” procedure.
Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the
OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel.
E08:No R.PRNS SP
E09:User Cancel
A rear presence channel signal is not detected.
Check the rear presence speaker connections.
Run “Auto Setup” again.
The “Auto Setup” procedure was cancelled due to
user activity.
E10:Internal Err.
An internal error occurred.
Run “Auto Setup” again.
After Auto Setup
Warning message
Cause
Remedy
See page
W1:Out of Phase
Speaker polarity is not correct. This message may
appear depending on the speakers even when the
speakers are connected correctly.
Check the speaker connections for proper polarity
(+ or –).
W2:Over Distance
W3:Level Error
The distance between the speaker and the listening Bring the speaker closer to the listening position.
position is over 24 m (80 ft).
—
—
The difference of volume level among speakers is
excessive.
Readjust the speaker installation so that all speakers
are set in locations with similar conditions.
Check the speaker connections.
—
Use speakers of similar quality.
Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer.
W4:SP Mismatch
The result of the wiring check of “Auto Setup” is
different from “Speaker Set” in “Manual Setup”.
Use “Speaker Set” in “Manual Setup” to adjust the
speaker settings manually.
“Wiring” check procedure is skipped.
Select “Wiring” in “Setup Menu”.
Notes
• If the “ERROR” or “WARNING” screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then run “Auto Setup” again.
• If warning “W2” or “W3” appears, the adjustment are made, however the adjustments may not be optimal.
• Depending on the speakers, warning “W1” may appears even if the speakers connections are correct.
• If error “E10” occurs repeatedly, please contact a qualified Yamaha service center.
■ Resetting the system
Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial
factory settings.
I
Press and hold PROGRAM and then press
2
B
MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to
turn on this unit.
Press and hold IPROGRAM until “ADVANCED SETUP”
appears in the front panel display (see page 119).
Notes
• This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit including
the GUI menu parameters.
• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit.
I
Rotate PROGRAM to select “INITIALIZE”.
3
4
y
To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making any
I
Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “ALL”.
B
changes, press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it
outward to the OFF position.
y
• Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization procedure without
making any changes.
• You can initialize the video parameters or sound field program
B
1
Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to
release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this
unit.
B
Press MASTER ON/OFF to release it outward to
the OFF position to confirm your selection and turn
off this unit.
5
127 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
Glossary
■ Audio and video synchronization (lip sync)
■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Lip sync, an abbreviation for lip synchronization, is a technical term that involves both
a problem and a capability of maintaining audio and video signals synchronized during
post-production and transmission. Whereas the audio and video latency requires
complex end-user adjustments, HDMI version 1.3 incorporates an automatic audio and
video syncing capability that allows devices to perform this synchronization
automatically and accurately without user interaction.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete multi-channel playback
from 2-channel or multi-channel sources. There are three modes available: “Music
mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources (for 2-channel sources
only) and “Game mode” for game sources.
■ Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and
dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for
dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The
surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround
is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable
broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital
signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to
enhance moving sound effects and directionality.
■ Bi-amplification connection
A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. One amplifier is
connected to the woofer section of a loudspeaker while the other is connected to the
combined mid and tweeter section. With this arrangement each amplifier operates over
a restricted frequency range. This restricted range presents each amplifier with a much
simpler job and each amplifier is less likely to influence the sound in some way. The
internal crossover of the speaker consists of a LPF (low pass filter) and a HPF (high
pass filter). As its name implies, the LPF passes frequencies below a cutoff and rejects
frequencies above the cutoff frequency. Likewise, the HPF passes frequencies above its
cutoff.
■ Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for high-definition
disc-based media including HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as a mandatory audio
standard for HD DVD and as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this
technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a
high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps, Dolby
TrueHD can carry up to 8 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously.
Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc players and AV
receivers/amplifiers of the future, Dolby TrueHD also remains fully compatible with
the existing multichannel audio systems and retains the metadata capability of Dolby
Digital, allowing dialog normalization and dynamic range control.
■ Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal
for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be
reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is
independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because
the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component
input jacks is required in order to output component signals.
■ Composite video signal
■ DSD
With the composite video signal system, the video signal is composed of three basic
elements of a video picture: color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite
video jack on a video component transmits these three elements combined.
Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media,
such as Super Audio CDs. Using DSD, signals are stored as single bit values at a high-
frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz, while noise shaping and oversampling are
used to reduce distortion, a common occurrence with very high quantization of audio
signals. Due to the high sampling rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that
offered by the PCM format used for normal audio CDs.
■ Deep Color
Deep Color refers to the use of various color depths in displays, up from the 24-bit
depths in previous versions of the HDMI specification. This extra bit depth allows
HDTVs and other displays go from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate
on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between
colors. The increased contrast ratio can represent many times more shades of gray
between black and white. Also Deep Color increases the number of available colors
within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space.
■ DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multi-channel sound on
DVD video, and is fully backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a
96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-
bit word length.
DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-
channel sound with full-quality full-motion video for music programs and motion
picture soundtracks on DVD video.
■ Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent
multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround
stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional
channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the system has
a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for
the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound
environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range from
maximum to minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise
sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with
unprecedented excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from
monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.
■ DTS Digital Surround
DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a
6.1-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters
around the world. DTS, Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy
the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your
home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically,
front left and right, center, surround left and right, and LFE 0.1 (subwoofer) channels
for a total of 5.1 channels). This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-
channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel to the existing 5.1-channel
format.
■ Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1-channel sources.
This is done using a matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the 2 in the
original recording. For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie
sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this additional channel,
you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving sound especially with scenes
with “fly-over” and “fly-around” effects.
■ DTS Express
DTS Express is an advanced audio technology for the optional feature on Blu-ray Disc
or HD DVD, which offers high-quality, low bit rate audio optimized for network
streaming, and Internet applications. DTS Express is used for the Secondary Audio
feature of Blu-ray Disc or the Sub Audio feature of HD DVD. These features deliver
audio commentaries (for example, the additional commentaries made by the director of
a film) on demand by the users via the Internet, etc. DTS Express signals are mixed
down with the main audio stream on the player component, and the component sends
the mixed audio stream to the AV receivers/amplifiers via digital coaxial, digital
optical, or analog connections.
■ Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is an advanced audio technology developed for high-definition
programming and media including HD broadcasts, HD DVD, and Blu-ray Disc.
Selected as a mandatory audio standard for HD DVD and as an optional audio standard
for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers multichannel sound with discrete channel
output. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps, Dolby Digital Plus can carry up to 7.1
discreet audio channels simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed
for the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, Dolby Digital Plus
also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that
incorporate Dolby Digital.
■ DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for high-
definition disc-based media including HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as a
mandatory audio standard for both HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers
sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition home
theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps for HD DVD and up to 24.5
Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of
24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for
the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, DTS-HD Master
Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that
incorporate DTS Digital Surround.
■ Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing
Dolby Surround sources. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback
with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right
channels instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology.
There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for
movie sources and “Game mode” for game sources.
128 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
■ DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
■ WMA
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an high resolution audio technology developed for
high-definition disc-based media including HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an
optional audio standard for both HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers
sound that is virtually indistinguishable from the original, offering a high-definition
home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 3.0 Mbps for HD DVD and 6.0
Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete
channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and
designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, DTS-HD
High Resolution Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel
audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital Surround.
An audio compression method developed by Microsoft Corporation. It employs the
irreversible compression method, which achieves a high compression rate by thinning
out the data of hardly audible part to the human ears. It is said to be capable of
compressing the data quantity by about 1/22 (64 kbps) while maintaining a similar
audio quality to music CD.
■ xvYCC
A color space standard supported by HDMI version 1.3. It is a more extensive color
space than sRGB, and allows the expression of colors that could not be expressed
before. While remaining compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, xvYCC
expands the color space and can thus produce more vivid, natural images. It is
particularly effective for still pictures and computer graphics.
■ HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industry-supported,
uncompressed, all-digital audio/video interface. Providing an interface between any
source (such as a set-top box or AV receiver) and an audio/video monitor (such as a
digital television), HDMI supports standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well
as multi-channel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV
standards and supports 8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to
accommodate future enhancements and requirements.
When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection),
HDMI provides a secure audio/video interface that meets the security requirements of
content providers and system operators. For further information on HDMI, visit the
HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”.
■ LFE 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The frequency range of this channel is
from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low-
frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in
Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.
■ MP3
One of the audio compression methods used by MPEG. It employs the irreversible
compression method, which achieves a high compression rate by thinning out the data
of hardly audible part to the human ears. It is said to be capable of compressing the data
quantity by about 1/11 (128 kbps) while maintaining a similar audio quality to music
CD.
■ MPEG-4 AAC
An MPEG-4 audio standard. As it allows compression of data at a bit rate lower than
that of MPEG-2 AAC, it is used among others for mobile telephones, portable audio
players and other low-capacity devices requiring high sound quality.
In addition to the above types of devices, MPEG-4 AAC is also used to distribute
contents on the Internet, and as such is supported by computers, media servers and
many other devices.
■ Neo:6
Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6- channel playback by the
specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-range channels with higher
separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There are two modes available:
“Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources.
■ PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized,
recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of
recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the
size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code
Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording.
■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized
bits
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per
second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting
the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range
of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the
dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of
quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of
frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the
more finely the sound level can be reproduced.
■ S-video signal
With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable
is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the
chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video
signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful
images.
■ WAV
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital
data obtained by converting audio signals. It does not specify the compression (coding)
method so a desired compression method can be used with it. By default, it is
compatible with the PCM method (no compression) and some compression methods
including the ADPCM method.
129 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
THX Cinema mode
In this mode, THX Loudness Plus is designed around the industry-standard reference
mixing level as well as adding other proprietary THX technologies such as Adaptive
Decorrelation, Re-EQ, and Timbre Matching to recreate the theatrical experience at
home.
THX information
■ THX Music mode
THX Music modes provide the appropriate THX processing to enhance music
listening. THX Music applies a dedicated music profile of THX Loudness Plus,
designed around the varying mix levels in music sources which are often very different
than film or television sources. Additionally, THX Music applies Timbre Matching to
the surround speaker channels.
■ THX Games mode
THX Games mode gives the benefit of THX Loudness Plus, as well as other THX
proprietary features which provide the gamer with a more accurate listening experience
at lower levels, while maintaining all of the directional cues critical to gameplay.
■ THX Surround EX
Dolby Digital Surround EX is a joint development of Dolby Laboratories and the THX
Ltd.
In a movie theater, film soundtracks that have been encoded with Dolby Digital
Surround EX technology are able to reproduce an extra channel which has been added
during the mixing of the program. This channel, called Surround Back, places sounds
behind the listener in addition to the currently available front left, front center, front
right, surround right, surround left and subwoofer channels. This additional channel
provides the opportunity for more detailed imaging behind the listener and brings more
depth, spacious ambience and sound localization than ever before.
Movies that were created using the Dolby Digital Surround EX technology, when
released into the home consumer market may exhibit wording to that effect on the
packaging. A list of movies created using this technology can be found on the Dolby
web site at www.dolby.com.
Only receiver and controller products bearing the THX Surround EX logo, when in the
THX Surround EX mode, faithfully reproduce this new technology in the home.
This product may also engage the “THX Surround EX” mode during the playback of
5.1 channel material that is not Dolby Digital Surround EX encoded. In such case the
information delivered to the Surround Back channel will be program dependent and
may or may not be very pleasing depending on the particular soundtrack and the tastes
of the individual listener.
■ THX Ultra2 Cinema mode
THX Ultra2 Cinema mode plays 5.1 movies using all 8 speakers giving you the best
possible movie watching experience. In this mode, ASA processing blends the side
surround speakers and back surround speakers providing the optimal mix of ambient
and directional surround sounds. This mode permits the playback of a non Surround
EX/ES encoded 5.1 movie to be played back over a 7.1 system. DTS-ES (Matrix and
6.1 Discrete) and Dolby Digital Surround EX encoded soundtracks will be
automatically detected, if the appropriate flag has been encoded. Some Dolby Digital
Surround EX soundtracks are missing the digital flag that allows automatic switching.
If you know that the movie that you are watching is encoded in Surround EX, you can
manually select the THX Surround EX playback mode, otherwise THX Ultra2 Cinema
mode will apply ASA processing to provide optimum replay.
■ THX Ultra2 Music mode
For the playback of multi-channel music the THX Ultra2 Music mode should be
selected. In this mode THX ASA processing is applied to the surround channels of all
5.1 encoded music sources such as DTS, Dolby Digital and DVD-Audio to provide a
wide stable rear soundstage.
■ THX Ultra2 Games mode
For the playback of stereo and multi-channel game audio the THX Ultra2 Games mode
should be selected. In this mode THX ASA processing is applied to the surround
channels of all 5.1 and 2.0 encoded game sources such as analog, PCM, DTS and
Dolby Digital. This accurately places all game audio surround information, providing a
full 360 degree playback environment. THX Ultra2 Games mode is unique as it gives
you a smooth transition of audio in all points of the surround field.
■ THX Ultra2
Before any home theatre component can be THX Ultra2 certified, it must incorporate
all the features above and also pass a rigorous series of quality and performance tests.
Only then can a product feature the THX Ultra logo, which is your guarantee that the
Home Theatre products you purchase will give you superb performance for many years
to come. THX Ultra2 requirements cover every aspect of the product including pre-
amplifier performance and operation, and hundreds of other parameters in both the
digital and analog domain.
■ THX Loudness Plus
THX Loudness Plus is a new volume control technology featured in THX Ultra2
Plus™ and THX Select2 Plus™ Certified receivers. With THX Loudness Plus, home
theater audiences can now experience the rich details in a surround mix at any volume
level. A consequence of turning the volume below Reference Level is that certain sound
elements can be lost or perceived differently by the listener. THX Loudness Plus
compensates for the tonal and spatial shifts that occur when the volume is reduced by
intelligently adjusting ambient surround channel levels and frequency response. This
enables users to experience the true impact of soundtracks regardless of the volume
setting. THX Loudness Plus is automatically applied when listening in any THX
listening mode. The new THX Cinema, THX Music, and THX Games modes are
tailored to apply the proper THX Loudness Plus settings for each type of content.
■ THX Cinema processing
THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies established by the world-
renowned film production company, Lucasfilm Ltd. THX grew from George Lucas’
personal desire to make your experience of the film soundtrack, in both movie theatres
and in your home theatre, as faithful as possible to what the director intended. Movie
soundtracks are mixed in special movie theatres called dubbing stages and are designed
to be played back in movie theatres with similar equipment and conditions. This same
soundtrack is then transferred directly onto Laserdisc, VHS tape, DVD, etc., and is not
changed for playback in a small home theatre environment. THX engineers developed
patented technologies to accurately translate the sound from the movie theatre
environment into the home, correcting the tonal and spatial errors that occur. On this
product, when “THX” appears in the front panel display, THX features are
automatically added in Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema, THX Surround EX).
130 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
■ Re-Equalization
The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively bright and harsh when
played back over audio equipment in the home because film soundtracks were designed
to be played back in large movie theatres using very different professional equipment.
Re-Equalization restores the correct tonal balance for watching a movie soundtrack in a
small home environment.
Sound field program information
■ Elements of a sound field
What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections
from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound live, these reflections
enable us to tell where the player is situated as well as the size and shape of the room in
which we are sitting.
■ Adaptive Decorrelation
In a movie theatre, a large number of surround speakers help create an enveloping
surround sound experience, but in a home theatre there are usually only two speakers.
This can make the surround speakers sound like headphones that lack spaciousness and
envelopment. The surround sounds will also collapse into the closest speaker as you
move away from the middle seating position. Adaptive Decorrelation slightly changes
one surround channel’s time and phase relationship with respect to the other surround
channel. This expands the listening position and creates – with only two speakers – the
same spacious surround experience as in a movie theatre.
There are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound
field in addition to the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s
instrument.
Early reflections
Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms to 100 ms after the direct
sound), after reflecting from one surface only (for example, from a wall or the ceiling).
Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound.
■ Timbre Matching
Reverberations
The human ear changes our perception of a sound depending on the direction from
which the sound is coming. In a movie theatre, there is an array of surround speakers so
that the surround information is all around you. In a home theatre, you use only two
speakers located to the side of your head. The Timbre Matching feature filters the
information going to the surround speakers so that they more closely match the tonal
characteristics of the sound coming from the front speakers. This ensures seamless
panning between the front and surround speakers.
These are caused by reflections from more than one surface (for example, from the
walls, and the ceiling) so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic
afterglow. They are non-directional and lessen the clarity of the direct sound.
Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberations taken together help us to
determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the
digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound fields.
If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in
your listening room, you would be able to create your own listening environment. The
acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or a
room with virtually any size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly
what Yamaha has done with the digital sound field processor.
■ BGC (Boundary Gain Compensation)
If your chosen listening room layout (for practical or aesthetic reasons) results in the
most of the listeners being close to the rear wall, the resulting bass level can be
sufficiently reinforced by the boundary that the overall sound quality becomes
“boomy”. THX Ultra2 receivers and controllers contain the BGC (Boundary Gain
Compensation) feature to provide an improved bass balance. “Bndry Gain Comp” can
be selected by setting “THX Ultra2 SWFR” to “Yes” in “THX Set” of “Manual Setup”.
■ CINEMA DSP
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie
theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for acoustic
effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers,
and so on, can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound
heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP provides
the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in the listening room of your own home
by using the Yamaha original sound field technology combined with various digital
audio systems.
■ ASA (Advanced Speaker Array)
ASA is a proprietary THX technology which processes the sound fed to 2 side and 2
back surround speakers to provide the optimal surround sound experience. When you
set up your home theater system using all eight speaker outputs (Left, Center, Right,
Surround Right, Surround Back Right, Surround Back Left, Surround Left and
Subwoofer), be sure to go to the “THX Set” screen and choose the setting that most
closely corresponds to the speaker spacing, which will re-optimize the surround sound-
field.
■ CINEMA DSP HD³
The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the
sound images. CINEMA DSP HD³ feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate
height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate and intensive stereoscopic
sound fields in a listening room.
ASA is used in three modes; THX Ultra2 Cinema, THX Ultra2 Music and THX Ultra2
Games.
■ Dialogue normalization
Dialogue Normalization (Dial Norm) is a feature of Dolby Digital, which is used to
keep the programs at the same average listening level so the user does not have to
change the volume control between Dolby Digital programs.
When playing back software which has been encoded in Dolby Digital, sometimes you
may see a brief message in the front panel display which will read “Dial Norm X dB”
(X being a numeric value). The display is showing how the program level relates with
THX calibration level. If you want to play the program at calibrated theatrical levels,
you may wish to adjust the volume. For example, if you see the following message:
“Dial Norm + 4 dB” in the front panel display, to keep the overall output level at THX
calibrated loudness, just turn down the volume control by 4 dB. However, unlike a
movie theater where the playback loudness is preset, you can choose your preferred
volume setting for best enjoyment.
■ SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones.
Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate
representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
■ Virtual CINEMA DSP
Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP
sound field surround effects even without any surround speakers by using virtual
surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal
two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker.
■ Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances your listening
experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in a compression artifact. As a result,
flattened complexity due to the loss of high-frequency fidelity as well as lack of bass
due to the loss of low-frequency bass is compensated, providing improved performance
of the overall sound system.
131 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
■ Sound output in each sound field program
Sound output from each speaker depends on the type of audio signals being input. Refer to the diagrams in the table below to understand the
speaker layout for each sound field program.
Note
Be advised that there may be no or not enough sound output from speakers depending on the type of input source being played back. Furthermore, there may
be some channels that can only be used partially when they are adjusted to specific aspects of movies, such as special sound effects, etc.
L
SR
SBL
SBR
FPL
FPR
RPL
RPR
Front left speaker
Center speaker
Surround right speaker
Front presence right speaker
Rear presence left speaker
Rear presence right speaker
C
Surround back left speaker
Surround back right speaker
Front presence left speaker
R
Front right speaker
Surround left speaker
SL
Speaker from which no sound is being output
Speaker from which sound is being output
Speaker settings
Speaker settings
11-channel
5-channel
11-channel
5-channel
FPL
FPR
FPL
FPR
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
L
R
L
R
L
R
—
7
8
9
0
A
1
2
3
4
5
6
SL
SR
SL
SR
SL
SR
SBL SBR
SBL SBR
RPL
RPR
RPL
RPR
FPL
FPR
FPL
FPR
C
C
C
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
SL
SR
SL
SR
SL
SR
SL
SR
SBL SBR
SBL SBR
RPL
FPL
RPR
RPL
FPL
RPR
FPR
FPR
C
C
C
C
C
C
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
SL
SR
SL
SR
SL
SR
SL
SR
SBL SBR
SBL SBR
RPL
RPR
RPL
RPR
FPL
FPR
FPL
FPR
C
C
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
SL
SR
SL
SR
SL
SR
SL
SR
SBL SBR
SBL SBR
RPL
FPL
RPR
RPL
FPL
RPR
FPR
FPR
C
C
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
SL
SR
SL
SR
SL
SR
SL
SR
SBL SBR
SBL SBR
RPL
RPR
RPL
RPR
FPL
FPR
C
L
R
L
R
SL
SR
SL
SR
SBL SBR
RPL
RPR
132 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
qEX
qEX
qPL x
qPL x
*1
*2
/
/
/
/
: OFF
: ON or discrete 6.1/7.1-channel audio signals are input.
Input audio source
2-channel (stereo)
Program
HD³
5.1-channel*1
6.1/7.1-channel*2
2-channel (monaural)
CLASSICAL1
Hall in Munich A
Hall in Munich B
Hall in Frankfurt
Hall in Stuttgart
Hall in Vienna
ON
1
1
3
4
Hall in Amsterdam
CLASSICAL2
Hall in USA A
Hall in USA B
Chamber
Church in Tokyo
Church in Freiburg
Church in Royaumont
LIVE/CLUB
Village Gate
Village Vanguard
The Bottom Line
Cellar Club
OFF
2
2
3
4
The Roxy Theatre
Warehouse Loft
Arena
ENTERTAINMENT
Sports
Music Video
Recital/Opera
Pavilion
ON
3
5
4
4
3
3
4
4
Disco
Action Game
Roleplaying Game
MOVIE
Standard
Spectacle
Sci-Fi
OFF
Adventure
Drama
MOVIE
Mono Movie
ON
3
5
3
6
3
3
4
4
OFF
STEREO
2ch Stereo
––
7
7
7
7
STEREO
11ch Stereo
––
4
4
4
4
MUSIC ENHANCER
11ch Enhancer
SUR.DECODE
Surround Decoder
(Pro Logic)
––
––
8
8
9
0
9
9
0
0
SUR.DECODE
Surround Decoder
(PLIIx Movie/PLII Movie)
(PLIIx Game/PLII Game)
(Neo:6 Cinema)
SUR.DECODE
Surround Decoder
(PLIIx Music/PLII Music)
(Neo:6 Music)
––
A
0
9
0
THX
––
––
8
8
9
0
0
0
0
0
Cinema (Pro Logic)
THX
Cinema (PLIIx Movie/PLII Movie/
Neo: 6 Cinema)
THX
––
––
A
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
Music
THX
Games
STRAIGHT
Pure Direct
MUSIC ENHANCER
Straight Enhancer
––
7
7
9
0
133 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
■ Available parameters for each sound field program
Note
Available sound field parameter may differ depending on the speaker settings.
CLASSICAL1
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Hall in Munich A
Hall in Munich B
Hall in Frankfurt
Hall in Stuttgart
Hall in Vienna
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Hall in Amsterdam
CLASSICAL2
Hall in USA A
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Hall in USA B
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Chamber
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Church in Tokyo
Church in Freiburg
Church in Royaumont
LIVE/CLUB
Village Gate
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Village Vanguard
The Bottom Line
Cellar Club
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
The Roxy Theatre
Warehouse Loft
Arena
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ENTERTAINMENT
Sports
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Music Video
Recital/Opera
Pavilion
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Disco
ꢀ
Action Game
Roleplaying Game
ꢀ
ꢀ
MOVIE
Standard
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Spectacle
Sci-Fi
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Adventure
Drama
Mono Movie
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
STEREO
2ch Stereo
ꢀ
11ch Stereo
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
SUR. DECODE
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Surround Decoder
THX
Cinema/Ultra2
Cinema/Surround EX
MUSIC ENHANCER
Straight Enhancer/
11ch Enhancer
ꢀ
134 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parametric equalizer information
Parametric equalizer information
This unit employs Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer
(YPAO) technology, together with the Parametric EQ settings (see
page 87), to optimize the frequency characteristics of its parametric
equalizer to match your listening environment. YPAO uses a
combination of the following three parameters (Frequency, Gain
and Q factor) to provide highly precise adjustment of the frequency
characteristics.
YPAO adjusts frequency characteristics to suit your listening
requirements using a combination of the above three parameters
(Frequency, Gain and Q factor) for each equalizer band in this unit’s
parametric equalizer. This unit has 7 equalizer bands for each
channel.
The use of multiple equalizer bands enables more precise
adjustments of frequency characteristics (as in Figure 2). This is not
possible using only a single equalizer band (as in Figure 1).
■ Frequency
This parameter is adjustable in one-third octave increments between
32 Hz and 16 kHz.
Figure 1
Gain
Frequency
characteristic after
correction
Band 1
Frequency
Original frequency
characteristic
Figure 2
Gain
Frequency
characteristic after
correction
Band 1
■ Gain
This parameter is adjustable in increments of 0.5 dB between –20
and +6 dB.
Frequency
Original frequency
characteristic
Band 2
■ Standing wave
A wave generated when two waves of the same length, frequency
and speed but traveling in opposite directions overlap. Standing
waves appear to be stationary and simply oscillating in a fixed
position without progressing.
Under certain conditions, the sound leaving a speaker and the sound
reflecting off a wall, etc., in a room resonate. When this happens, it
has a major effect on the frequency response in the room, and
depending on the listening position sounds of specific frequencies
may sound loud or inversely may be hard to hear. As a result, this
hampers accurate reproduction of the sound source.
This unit is equipped with a parametric equalizer to reduce the
effect of standing waves. The equalizer’s settings can be optimized
through automatic measurements. Even more accurate settings can
be made by taking measurements at other positions.
■ Q factor
The width of the specified frequency band is referred to as the Q
factor. This parameter is adjustable between the values 0.5 and 10.
135 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Block diagrams
Block diagrams
■ Audio section
COAXIAL DIGITAL IN
ZONE2/REC OUT (COAXIAL DIGITAL)
ZONE OUT/DVR
CD
HD/BD DVD
DVD
REC OUT (OPTICAL DIGITAL)
CD-R
REC/Zone
Selector
DTV
DSP
INPUT
Selector
OPTICAL DIGITAL IN
MD /TAPE
DVD
DIR
Main
Cinema
DSP
YPAO,
etc.
Decoder
Zone
CBL/SAT
DIT
HDMI
DVR
HDMI IN
IN (Front)
IN 1
HDMI OUT
HDMI
HDMI
Selector
HDMI
Rx
HDMI
OUT 1
Tx
IN 2
IN 3
IN 4
HDMI
OUT 2
Tx
HEAD PHONES
PHONES
Main
Zone
PRE OUT
SUR BACK
NET
NET
REAR PRES
SURROUND
FRONT
PHY
NET/USB
USB
USB (Front)
USB (Rear)
USB
Selector
FRONT PRES
CENTER (Mono)
SUB WOOFER
MULTI CH INPUT
SURR
Audio ADC
SPEAKER OUT
FRONT
Power Amplifier
Multi-ch
Main
SB/FRONT
C, SW
CENTER (Mono)
SURROUND
SUR BACK
AUDIO IN
PHONO
CD-R
PHONO EQ
FRONT PRES
REAR PRES
SUR BACK
CD
NET
MD/TAPE
TUNER
AUDIO IN with Video
DVD
INPUT
Selector
Main/Source
REC/Zone
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2
DTV/LD
DVR
REC/Zone
Selector
ZONE 3
ZONE 4
VCR
Zone
CBL/SAT
V-AUX
REC OUT
VCR
DOCK
Source
REC
Source/REC
Selector
DVR
MD/TAPE
CD-R
136 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Block diagrams
■ Video section
HDMI IN
IN (Front)
IN 1
HDMI OUT
OUT 1
HDMI
HDMI
Selector
HDMI
Tx
HDMI
Rx
IN 2
HDMI
Tx
OUT 2
IN 3
Video
I/P Converter
Video
Selector
IN 4
MONITOR OUT
(COMPONENT VIDEO)
COMPONENT VIDEO IN
YPbPr
Video
I/P Converter
S
E
L
Video
Decoder
GUI
Processor
BD/HD DVD
DVD
MONITOR OUT 1
MONITOR OUT 2
Video
Encoder
CBL/SAT
DVR
ZONE2 OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO)
ZONE2 OUT
S
E
L
S VIDEO IN
MONITOR OUT (S VIDEO)
MONITOR OUT
Y/C
S
E
L
V-AUX
DVD
Source/Main
INPUT
Selector
REC/Zone
REC/Zone
Selector
DTV
Video
Decoder
Video
Encoder
CBL/SAT
DVR
REC OUT (S VIDEO)
Source/REC
Selector
VCR
DVR
VCR
DOCK
VIDEO IN
MONITOR OUT (VIDEO)
MONITOR OUT
CVBS
S
E
L
V-AUX
DVD
Source/Main
INPUT
Selector
ZONE2 OUT (VIDEO)
ZONE2 OUT 1
DTV
REC/Zone
REC/Zone
Selector
S
E
L
CBL/SAT
DVR
ZONE2 OUT 2
Zone
OSD
VCR
REC OUT (VIDEO)
DOCK
Source/REC
Selector
DVR
VCR
137 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Specifications
AUDIO SECTION
VIDEO SECTION
• Minimum RMS Output Power (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω)
Front, Center, Surround, Surround back ............................................... 140 W
Front presence, Rear presence ................................................................. 50 W
• Video Format [MONITOR OUT] (Wall Paper)
[Korea and General models] ......................................................... NTSC/PAL
[U.K., Europe, China and Asia models] ....................................... PAL/NTSC
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
[Asia, General, China and Korea models]
• Video Format (Video Conversion) .................................................... NTSC/PAL
• Signal Level
Front L/R 8/6/4/2 Ω ........................................................ 185/230/290/385 W
Composite ................................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
S-video .................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.286 or 0.3 Vp-p/75 Ω (C)
Component ..................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (PB/PR)
Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off) ................... 1.5 Vp-p or more
• Maximum Useful Output power (JEITA) (1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω)
[Asia, General, China and Korea models]
Front, Center, Surround, Surround back ............................................... 200 W
Front presence, Rear presence ................................................................. 75 W
• Maximum Output Power (1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (Video Conversion Off) ........................... 70 dB or more
[U.K. and Europe models]
Front, Center, Surround, Surround back ............................................... 240 W
Front presence, Rear presence ................................................................. 90 W
• Frequency Response [MONITOR OUT]
Component (Video Conversion Off)
............................................................................... 5 Hz to 100 MHz, 3 dB
• Dynamic Headroom
• Video Format [ZONE OUT] (Gray Back)
8 Ω ......................................................................................................... 1.2 dB
[Korea and General models] ......................................................... NTSC/PAL
[U.K., Europe, China and Asia models] ....................................... PAL/NTSC
• IEC Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]
1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ......................................................................... 155 W
• Video signal type [ZONE COMPONENT OUT]
(Video conversion) ............................................................................ NTSC/PAL
• Damping Factor (IHF)
Front L/R 1 kHz, 8 Ω ................................................................... 150 or more
GENERAL
• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance
• Power Supply
PHONO .................................................................................... 3.5 mV/47 kΩ
CD, etc. ................................................................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ
MULTI CH INPUT ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ
[General and Asia models] ................ AC 110/120/220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz
[China model] ...................................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz
[Korea model] ...................................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[U.K. and Europe models] ................................................... AC 230 V, 50 Hz
• Maximum Input Voltage
PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD) .................................................. 60 mV or more
CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ..................................................... 2.4 V or more
• Power Consumption ................................................................. 800 W/1000 VA
• Standby Power Consumption ......................................................... 0.1 W or less
• Maximum Power Consumption [General model only] .......................... 1500 W
• Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance
AUDIO OUT ........................................................................... 200 mV/900 Ω
PRE OUT .................................................................................... 1.0 V/500 Ω
SUBWOOFER ............................................................................ 2.0 V/500 Ω
ZONE OUT ................................................................................ 1.0 V/1.4 kΩ
• AC Outlets
[Asia, General and China models] .......................... 2 (Total 50 W maximum)
[U.K. model] ........................................................ 1 (100 W/0.4 A maximum)
[Europe model] ........................................... 2 (Total 100 W/0.4 A maximum)
• Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance
CD, etc. (1 kHz, 40 mV, 8 Ω) .................................................. 150 mV/100 Ω
• Dimensions (W x H x D) .................................................. 435 x 210 x 497 mm
(17-1/8 x 8-1/4 x 19-9/16 in)
• Frequency Response
CD to Front L/R, Pure Direct ............................. 10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/–3 dB
• Weight .............................................................................. 34.0 kg (74 lbs 15 oz)
• RIAA Equalization Deviation
PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) ............................................................ 0 0.5 dB
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
• Total Harmonic Distortion
PHONO to AUDIO OUT (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) ..................... 0.02% or less
CD, etc. to Front L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 70 W, 8 Ω) ................. 0.02% or less
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
PHONO (5 mV) to Front L/R .................................................. 81 dB or more
CD, etc. (250 mV) to Front L/R ............................................. 100 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front L/R .................................................................................... 70 µV or less
• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)
PHONO (shortened) to Front L/R ................................. 70 dB/60 dB or more
CD, etc. (5.1 kΩ shortened) to Front L/R ..................... 70 dB/60 dB or more
• Tone Control (Front L/R, Center, Subwoofer)
BASS Boost/Cut .......................................................................... 6 dB/50 Hz
BASS Turnover Frequency .................................................................. 350 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut .................................................................. 6 dB/20 kHz
TREBLE Turnover Frequency ............................................................ 3.5 kHz
• Zone 2/Zone 3 Tone Control
BASS Boost/Cut ...................................................................... 10 dB/100 Hz
BASS Turnover Frequency .................................................................. 380 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut ................................................................ 10 dB/10 kHz
TREBLE Turnover Frequency ............................................................ 1.6 kHz
• Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back: Small) ................ 12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .......................................................................... 24 dB/oct.
138 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Compatibility with Deep Color and xvYCC video signals
This unit accepts 30 or 36 bit Deep Color video signals. Set “HDMI
Resolution” to “Through” or “HDMI Processing” to “Off” (see
page 90) to output the Deep Color and xvYCC video signals from
set “HDMI Processing” to “On”and “HDMI Resolution” to other
than “Through”, this unit converts the Deep Color and xvYCC
video signals to the video signals with normal color depth and color
space. If the video monitor is not compatible with the Deep Color or
xvYCC video signals, the video source may not play back correctly.
■ HDMI signal compatibility
Audio signals
Audio signal
Audio signal types
Compatible media
formats
2ch Linear
PCM
2ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/
20/24 bit
CD, DVD-Video,
DVD-Audio, etc.
Multi-ch
Linear PCM
8ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/
20/24 bit
DVD-Audio, etc.
DSD
2/5.1ch,
2.8224 MHz, 1 bit
SACD, etc.
Default input assignment of HDMI input jacks
HDMI input jack
IN1
Assigned input source
Bitstream
Dolby Digital,
DTS
DVD-Video, etc.
BD/HD DVD
DVD
IN2
Bitstream (High
definition audio)
Dolby TrueHD,
Blu-ray Disc,
HD DVD, etc.
Dolby Digital Plus,
DTS-HD Master
Audio, DTS-HD High
Resolution Audio
IN3
CBL/SAT
DVR
IN4
Front HDMI IN jack
V-AUX
y
• If the input source component can decode the bitstream audio signals of
audio commentaries, you can play back the audio sources with the audio
commentaries mixed down by using the following connections:
– multi-channel analog audio input (see page 35)
– DIGITAL INPUT OPTICAL (or COAXIAL)
• Refer to the supplied instruction manuals of the input source component,
and set the component appropriately.
The HDMI interface of this unit is based on the following
standards:
•
HDMI Version 1.3a (High-Definition Multimedia Interface
Specification Version 1.3a) licensed by HDMI Licensing,
LLC.
•
HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection
System) licensed by Digital Content Protection, LLC.
Notes
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD audio is played back, video and audio
signals may not be output depending on the type of the DVD player.
• This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI
components.
• To decode audio bitstream signals on this unit, set the input source
component appropriately so that the component outputs the bitstream
audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the
component). Refer to the supplied instruction manuals for details.
• This unit is not compatible with the audio commentary features (for
example, the special audio contents downloaded via Internet) of Blu-ray
Disc or HD DVD. This unit does not play back the audio commentaries of
the Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD contents.
Video signals
This unit is compatible with the video signals of the following
resolutions:
Video signal format
– 480i/60 Hz
– 576i/50 Hz
– 480p/60 Hz
– 576p/50 Hz
– 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
– 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
– 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz
139 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Index
Dimension ........................................................81
■
Numerics
■
C
Center Image ....................................................81
Center Width ....................................................80
CINEMA DSP indicator,
Component interlace/progressive
COMPONENT
Controlling other components,
■
A
■
E
Effect sound level
■
F
Front/rear USB port indicator,
■
G
■
B
Battery charge indicator,
■
D
■
H
140 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Presence speaker indicators,
■
M
Manual parametric equalizer configuration
Multi-channel sources playback
■
I
Input channel indicators,
Input signal indicators,
Input source indicators,
Multi-information display,
■
N
Network features
■
Q
■
R
■
J
■
L
■
O
■
P
Panorama ..........................................................80
141 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Turning on the main zone
■
S
Selecting the
SILENT CINEMA indicator,
Sound field programs
■
U
■
V
VOLUME level indicator,
■
T
■
W
■
Y
■
Z
142 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
ZONE2/ZONE3/ZONE4 indicators,
A
“
3
MAIN ZONE ON/OFF” or “ DVD”
(example) indicates the name of the parts on
the front panel or the remote control. Refer to
the cover pages at the top of this manual for
the information about each position of the
parts.
143 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of remote control codes
CURTIS MATHES
HELLO KITTY 05601
MITSUBISHI
MIVAR
00301, 01301, 01601,
01901, 02001, 02601,
02701, 03101, 03401,
06701, 11201, 11901
03901, 04001, 06801,
07601
01301
00301, 00901, 06701
00101, 02701
07001
02101, 02601, 04601,
11301
00101, 00301, 00601,
02001, 02101, 02401,
02601, 05701, 06501,
13201
TV
00301, 00501, 00801,
00901, 01301, 01801,
02001, 02301, 05601,
08901, 11801, 12201
02701
00101, 00301, 00401,
01201, 01601, 02001,
02401, 02601, 02701,
04901, 05601, 07901,
08201, 13101
00401
HINARI
HISAWA
HITACHI
00101, 00401
05701
ACURA
ADDISON
ADMIRAL
ADVENT
AGB
00101
00101, 00301, 01201,
01501, 01701, 01801,
02201, 02601, 03001,
04501, 06101, 06901,
07301, 11701, 12101
00101
01201, 01601, 08401
01301, 02201, 05801
09601
06801
01201
00101, 00301, 02901,
04601, 06801, 08901,
10501
03701
00101, 00401, 04801,
08501
CXC
DAEWOO
MOTOROLA
MTC
MULTITECH
MYRYAD
NAD
AIKO
AKAI
HUA TUN
HUANYU
HYPSON
ICE
IMPERIAL
INDIANA
INFINITY
INGELEN
INNO HIT
INNOVA
INTEQ
04901
00401, 03701
03701, 04801
03301, 04701, 05201
00401
00801
02201
06801
00401
00201
DANSAI
DAYTON
DE GRAAF
DECCA
DENON
DIGATRON
DIXI
DUMONT
DWIN
ECE
AKURA
ALBA
00101
NEC
02901, 06901
00401, 06801
01801
00401
00101, 00401
00201
09201, 10101
00401
03501
AMERICA ACTION
02701,
AMPRO
NECKERMANN
09401
00401, 07001
00401
00401
00101, 01201, 01301,
02601
00401, 03701
00301, 01201, 02601
04601, 05901, 06001,
06901, 08101
09301, 10801
AMSTRAD
00101, 00401, 02501,
04801, 05101, 05301,
06801
NEI
NETSAT
NEWAVE
INTERFUNK
00401, 02201, 03301,
04601, 06701
00401, 03701, 05001
04801
ANAM
00101, 02701, 03401
ELBE
ELECTROBAND
INTERVISION
ITS
ANAM NATIONAL
03401, 08301
ANITECH
AOC
NIKKAI
NIKKO
NOKIA
00001
00401, 06901
04101
ITT
02201, 04601, 06901
00801
00001
00101, 00601, 01201,
02101, 03101
09601
00701, 04801, 05801,
08401, 08701
00101
00101
ELIN
ELITE
ELTA
JBL
JCB
JEAN
00101, 00301, 00901,
01201, 01301, 01601,
02601, 02701, 05601
00101
NORCENT
NORDMENDE 01701, 03801, 07101
NTC
OCEANIC
ONWA
EMERSON
02001, 02601, 02701,
03101, 04601, 05801,
07901
00301, 10601
11001
00401
00101, 00301
00101
APEX DIGITAL
JENSEN
JVC
01201
09301, 09701, 09901
01401
00401, 01701
00101
02201, 04601
02701, 05301
02001, 02301, 03401,
08301
ASA
AUDIOSONIC
AWA
BANG & OLUFSEN
07201
BASIC
ENVISION
EPSON
ERRES
ETHER
ETRON
KAISUI
OPTIMUS
KAPSCH
KARCHER
KATHREIN
KEC
02201
07701
07001
02701
OPTONICA
ORION
01301
00401, 03101, 04101,
05801, 06801
03701, 05101
00101
00401, 04601, 06701
02701
02601
04701, 06201, 09001,
09101
EUROPHON
FERGUSON
06801
BAUR
00401, 01001, 01701,
03201, 03801, 04201,
07101
KENDO
KENWOOD
KNEISSEL
KOLIN
KORPEL
KOYODA
KTV
00401
00301
03501, 05401
00701, 01601, 02701
00401
OSAKI
OTTO VERSAND
BAYSONIC
BEAUMARK
BEKO
00401, 04101, 06701,
07001
04701, 05201
03701
00401, 00601, 00801,
02201, 03401, 08301,
12401
FIDELITY
FINLANDIA
FINLUX
04601
02901, 04401
00401, 01401, 01501,
04401, i06801
00101, 03101
00101, 03301, 08501
01401, 02001, 02901,
04701
05701
00401, 04101
01301
PALLADIUM
PANAMA
PANASONIC
BELL & HOWELL
00101
00301, 02701
02001
00401
02801
08501, 11401
03301
BEON
FIRSTAR
FIRSTLINE
FISHER
L&S ELECTRONIC
10301
BLAUPUNKT
BLUE SKY
BONDSTEC
BRADFORD
BRANDT
LEYCO
LG
00401, 03701
00301, 00401, 00901,
01601, 02601, 09001
PATHE CINEMA
03201, 04101
00101
00301, 00501, 00601,
00901, 02101, 02601,
12201
02701
FLINT
PAUSA
PENNEY
01701, 04201
03101, 05801
00101, 00101, 00401,
04801, 04901, 08501,
11401
14301, 14401, 14501,
14601
00301
00301
00801, 02401
00101
00401
00401
FORMENTI
FORTRESS
FRONTECH
FUJITSU
FUNAI
FUTURETECH 02701
GATEWAY
GE
LIESENK & TTER
BROKSONIC
BUSH
00401
02201, 03301, 03701
08701, 10401
02501, 02701, 03701
LOEWE
LUXOR
LXI
06701
04501, 04601
00501, 00801, 02001,
02101, 02601
PERDIO
PHILCO
04101
00301, 00401, 00801,
01801, 02601, 02701,
03301, 05801, 13101
00001, 00301, 00401,
00601, 00801, 01201,
01601, 02601, 04901,
07001, 08801, 12601
00401
BYDESIGN
13301, 13401
M ELECTRONIC
CANDLE
CARNIVALE
CARVER
CASCADE
CATHAY
CCE
CELEBRITY
CELERA
CENTURION
CGE
00301, 00501, 00601,
01201, 02601, 02701,
05601, 07101, 11801,
12201, 12601
00401, 06801
00101
00101, 00401, 01401,
01501, 01701, 02201,
03801, 04401, 04901,
06001
PHILIPS
GEC
MAGNADYNE 03301, 06801
PHONOLA
PILOT
PIONEER
GELOSO
GENEXXA
GIBRALTER
GOLDSTAR
MAGNAFON
MAGNAVOX
06801
00301, 00801, 12001,
12601
00301
00001
09701
00401
03301
02201
01701, 02201, 02301,
03801, 08601, 09501,
11301
00201, 00301
00301, 00401, 01701,
02001, 02601, 05001
00401, 04801, 04901,
08201
MANESTH
MARANTZ
03701, 04101
00301, 00401, 00801,
07001
PORTLAND
PRANDONI-PRINCE
06801
PRIMA
PRISM
PROFEX
PROSCAN
PROTECH
01201
CHANGHONG 09701
CHING TAI
CHUN YUN
GOODMANS
00101, 01201
00001, 00101, 01201,
02701
00701, 01601, 02701
00101
01201, 05601
00301, 00901, 01201
02701
MARK
00401
GOREMJE
GRADIENTE
GRAETZ
04701
MATSUI
00101, 00401, 02901,
04801, 06301, 06801
03401, 08301
00401
08501, 10301, 11401
01801, 02601
00101, 01901, 02001,
02601, 03401, 05801,
11401
09601
00601
00701, 02401
02201, 04601
00401, 02901, 04301,
06801
CHUNG HSIN
CIMLINE
CINERAL
CITIZEN
CLARION
CLARIVOX
CLATRONIC
CONDOR
CONRAC
CONTEC
MATSUSHITA
MEDIATOR
MEDION
MEGATRON
MEMOREX
00101, 04601
00501
00101, 00401, 03301,
03701, 05201, 08501
00101, 00301, 02601
00201
00601, 03401, 08301
00401, 01401, 04601,
06701
GRANADA
GRANDIN
GRUNDIG
07701
00401, 02801, 06301,
07001, 07401
02701
PROTON
PULSAR
QUASAR
QUELLE
00401
03301, 04701
04101, 04701
10301
00101, 02701
02701
GRUNPY
HALLMARK
HANKOOK
HANSEATIC
02601
METZ
05501
00301, 02601, 02701
00401, 04101, 04601,
05201, 07001
06801
MGA
00301, 01901, 02601
10301
10301
00201, 00501, 00601
06301
05101
MICROMAXX
MICROSTAR
MIDLAND
MINERVA
MINOKA
RADIOLA
RADIOMARELLI
00401
CRAIG
CROSLEY
CROWN
00801
HANTAREX
HARMAN/KARDON
00801
HARVARD
HAVERMY
HCM
06801
00101, 00401, 02701,
04701, 05201
03301
RADIOSHACK 00301, 00501, 02001,
02601, 02701
CTC
02701
01301
00101, 05101
144 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of remote control codes
RCA
00001, 00301, 00501,
01101, 01201, 02601,
08601, 11501, 11801,
13901, 12201, 12501,
12601, 12801
TCM
TEAC
10301
BASIC LINE
BEAUMARK
BELL & HOWELL
01402, 02102
02002
IMPERIAL
INTERFUNK
ITT
ITV
JENSEN
JVC
KAISUI
KEC
KENWOOD
KLH
KODAK
KOLIN
KORPEL
LENCO
LEYCO
LG
00002
01502
00101, 00401, 03701,
05101, 05201, 05701,
08501, 11401
03301
04101
00601, 03401, 08301
00601
00101, 00601, 01201,
01301, 02601, 03701,
08401
00801, 00901, 01201,
01901, 02701
00602, 01602, 02002
00402, 02102
00602
00602, 00902, 01302
01402
00402, 02102
00602, 01302
01402
00302, 00402
00602, 00802
01402
02102
01402
00402, 00702, 00902,
02902
00002
01602
01902
02402
TEC
BLAUPUNKT
BRANDT
BRANDT ELECTRONIC
00602
BROKSONIC
BUSH
CALIX
CANON
CARVER
CCE
REALISTIC
00301, 02001, 02601,
02701
TECHNEMA
TECHNICS
TECHWOOD
TECO
REDIFFUSION 04601
REOC
REVOX
REX
RFT
R-LINE
ROADSTAR
RUNCO
09001
00401
02201, 03501, 03701
05201
00401
00101, 03701, 05201
00201, 00301, 06501,
07501
01701, 02201, 03801,
04201
03201
07701
00101, 03701, 06801
02201, 04601, 06901
06801
00101, 00301, 01201,
01301, 02001, 02501,
02601, 08301, 13301
00101, 00301, 00401,
00901, 01101, 01201,
02001, 02601, 03701,
04701, 07001, 07401,
07801, 08901, 09801,
10501, 10701
05601
01702, 02602, 04402
01402, 02102, 02702
00402
00302
01502
01402, 02102
00002
01402
02102
00402, 02102, 04302
01402
TEKNIKA
TELEFUNKEN 01701, 03601, 04201,
08001, 08901
TELEMEISTER
CGE
CIMLINE
CINERAL
CITIZEN
COLT
COMBITECH
CRAIG
SABA
04101
00101
04101
00301
01701, 03801, 07101,
08001, 12501
00401, 01401, 04601,
06701
02601
00201
00901, 02001, 02101,
06601, 07801, 08301,
10901, 12101, 12301,
13001, 13201
06801
00101, 00301, 01201
05801
04101
TELETECH
TENSAI
TERA
LLOYD’S
LOEWE
LOGIK
LUXOR
LXI
SACCS
00402, 01502, 04502
01402, 02002
00802, 01102, 01602
00402
SAGEM
SAISHO
SALORA
SAMBERS
SAMPO
02702
00402, 01002, 01402,
02002
THOMSON
THORN
CROWN
CURTIS MATHES
01402, 02102
M ELECTRONIC
00002
TMK
TNCI
TOSHIBA
00302, 00602, 01202,
03702
02002
MAGNASONIC 04302
MAGNAVOX
00002, 00302, 00502,
01502
02002
00902, 01402
00302, 01502
00402
02602, 02702
00302
SAMSUNG
CYBERNEX
CYRUS
DAEWOO
01502
MAGNIN
MANESTH
MARANTZ
MARTA
00902, 01602, 02102,
03402, 04302
01402
00702
00002, 01502
00702
00602
00002, 01502, 01602
00002
TRIUMPH
TUNTEX
TVS
UHER
UNIVERSUM
DANSAI
DE GRAAF
DECCA
DENON
DUAL
DUMONT
DYNATECH
ELCATECH
ELECTROHOME
MATSUI
SANSEI
SANSUI
SANYO
MATSUSHITA
MEDION
MEI
05801
02602
00302
01401, 02001, 02701,
02901, 04301, 10201
00401
00401, 01401, 01501,
03701, 04401, 04701,
06401
MEMOREX
00002, 00302, 00402,
00502, 01002, 01102,
01602, 02002, 02202,
02602, 04202
01402
SBR
SCHAUB LORENZ
04601
SCHNEIDER
VECTOR RESEARCH
00301
VESTEL
VICTOR
01402
00401, 03301, 04801,
08501
02601
02601, 02701, 03101
00501, 00801, 02001,
02101, 02501, 02601
03701, 08501
06801
02201, 03501
02701
02101
00301, 01301, 08301
00101, 01201
00101, 01301, 03101
06801
00401, 02801
06801
04501
00401
02701
00401
02201
02901
00101, 00401
02201, 02901
00401
00001, 08301, 11101,
11601, 12701, 12901
00401
00701, 03401, 08301,
08401
03301
00801
02601
13301
04101
02201
04501
00301, 00801, 02601,
11301
00401, 04101
02101
00402
MEMPHIS
METZ
MGA
MGN TECHNOLOGY
02002
MINOLTA
ELECTROPHONIC
00402, 02502, 04502
00802, 02002
SCOTCH
SCOTT
SEARS
00402
00102
VIDEOSAT
VIDIKRON
VIDTECH
VIEWSONIC
VISION
VOXSON
WALTHAM
WARDS
EMEREX
EMERSON
00002, 00302, 00402,
00802, 00902, 01702,
02002, 02102, 04302,
04402
02002, 02102
00602, 02402
00002
01502, 01602
00002, 00702, 01502,
01602
00402, 00802, 00902,
01402
00702
SEG
SEI
SELECO
SEMIVOX
SEMP
MITSUBISHI
00602, 00802, 01302,
01502, 03502
00302, 01102
00002, 02002
00002, 01402
00002
01502
01602
01902
00302, 00402, 00602,
01102, 01302, 01602
ESC
MOTOROLA
MTC
MULTITECH
MURPHY
MYRYAD
NAD
FERGUSON
FIDELITY
FINLANDIA
FINLUX
SHARP
SHEN YING
SHENG CHIA
SIAREM
SIEMENS
SINUDYNE
SKANTIC
SKY
SKYGIANT
SKYWORTH
SOLAVOX
SONITRON
SONOKO
SONOLOR
SONTEC
SONY
WATSON
WAYCON
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
00401, 04101, 05801,
FIRSTLINE
NATIONAL
NEC
07901
FISHER
FUJI
FUJITSU
FUNAI
GARRARD
GE
01002, 01602
00202, 00302
00002, 00902
00002
Yamaha
00301, 01801, 08301,
10001, 11001, 13501,
13601, 13701, 13801,
14001, 14101, 14201
03401
00401, 03701
00201, 01201, 02601,
05801
NECKERMANN
01502
01402
00402
00402
02002
00602, 01602, 02002
NESCO
NEWAVE
NIKKO
NOBLEX
NOKIA
NORDMENDE 00602, 02402
OCEANIC
OKANO
00002
YAPSHE
YOKO
ZENITH
00302, 01202, 02002,
03502, 03702, 03802
01502
00902
02802
01402
00402, 01802, 02902,
04202
00002, 00402, 01402,
02102
00002
00602, 01602, 02002
01502, 01602
00002, 00402, 01402
01402, 01502, 01902,
02502
GEC
GENERAL
GO VIDEO
GOLDHAND
GOLDSTAR
00002, 00602
02302, 02602
00302, 01902
00402, 01102, 01602,
02802
01702, 02602, 02702,
04402
00002, 00402, 01402
VCR
ADMIRAL
ADVENTURA
AIKO
OLYMPUS
OPTIMUS
01102
00002
02102
00002, 00402, 02202,
02602, 02702
00602, 02302
01402
01402, 02102, 02302,
02702
SOUNDESIGN 02601, 02701
SOUNDWAVE
SOWA
00401, 05201
00601, 00901, 01201,
02101, 02601
GOODMANS
ORION
AIWA
GRADIENTE
GRAETZ
GRANADA
GRANDIN
GRUNDIG
SQUAREVIEW 02501
SSS
OSAKI
OTTO VERSAND
AKAI
AKIBA
ALBA
02701
00101
02701
02201, 03501
00001
00301, 00801, 02501
02501, 02701
00001, 00901, 01201,
01301, 02601, 05601
00401
05501
00101, 01201, 02601
00101
STANDARD
STARLITE
STERN
SUPREME
SYLVANIA
SYMPHONIC
SYNCO
01502
PALLADIUM
PANASONIC
00402, 00602, 01402
00302, 01802, 01902,
03102, 03702, 04502
AMERICA ACTION
02102
AMERICAN HIGH
00302
AMSTRAD
ANAM
HANSEATIC
00402
HARLEY DAVIDSON
00002
HARMAN/KARDON
01502
HARWOOD
HCM
HINARI
HI-Q
HITACHI
PATHE MARCONI
PENNEY
00602
00302, 00402, 00702,
02002, 03702, 04202
00702
00002
00302
00302, 01502, 03202,
03902, 04002
01502
00402
00702, 01302, 01502
01502
00002
00402, 01902, 02002,
02102, 02902
SYSLINE
T + A
TACICO
TAI YI
TANDY
TASHIKO
TATUNG
01402
01402
01402, 02002, 02702
01002
00002, 00402, 00602,
00702, 02002
PENTAX
PERDIO
PHILCO
PHILIPS
ANAM NATIONAL
01902, 04502
ANITECH
ASA
01402
00402, 01502
02002
00402
00402, 02102
00002, 00602, 01602
01301, 02201
01201, 08301
00101, 00401, 00601,
00801, 00901, 02001,
02101, 06801
PHONOLA
PILOT
PIONEER
POLK AUDIO
ASHA
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS
00702
HYPSON
ASUKA
AUDIOVOX
BAIRD
01402
145 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of remote control codes
PROFITRONIC 02002
VIDEO CONCEPTS
00902
VIDEOMAGIC 00402
CANAL+
CHAPARRAL
CITYCOM
CONNEXIONS 01304
CROSSDIGITAL 04604
CYRUS
DAERYUNG
DAEWOO
D-BOX
DIGENIUS
DIRECTV
03104
00804
05304
SAGEM
SAMSUNG
02904, 04804, 05904
03804, 04604, 06004,
06204
PROLINE
PROSCAN
PROTEC
PULSAR
PYE
00002
01202, 03802
01402
00502
01502
VIDEOSONIC
VILLAIN
02002
00002
SAT CONTROL 06404
SATSTATION
SCHWAIGER
SEEMANN
SIEMENS
SKY
SM ELECTRONIC
04204
04704
01304
00604
WARDS
00002, 00302, 00702,
01002, 01102, 01202,
01402, 01502, 02002
00704
01304
06304
02104, 04904
01104
00904, 01204, 01504,
01704, 02204, 02304,
02804, 04104, 04604,
05104, 06904
QUASAR
QUELLE
RADIOLA
00302, 03702
01502
01502
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
01402
03004, 03304, 05204
RADIOSHACK 00002
RADIX
RANDEX
RCA
00402
00402
00302, 00702, 01202,
02002, 03502, 03702,
03802
XR-1000
Yamaha
YAMISHI
YOKAN
YOKO
00002, 00302, 01402
00602
01402
01402
05404
01704, 03004, 06704
SONY
STAR CHOICE 03504
STRONG
TANTEC
TECHNISAT
TELESTAR
THOMSON
06404
01404
04404, 04504
04504
01404, 03104, 03904,
06104
02002
DISH NETWORK SYSTEM
02604, 03704
DISHPRO
DISTRATEL
DMT
REALISTIC
00002, 00302, 00402,
01002, 01102, 01602
02602
ZENITH
00002, 00202, 00502,
04402
02604, 03704
00004
04004
REOC
REPLAYTV
REX
03002, 03102
00602
CABLE
DNT
00704, 01304
TOPFIELD
TOSHIBA
TPS
ULTIMATETV
UNIDEN
UNIVERSUM
VENTANA
WISI
05504
ROADSTAR
00402, 01402, 02002,
02102
DREAM MULTIMEDIA
05804
ECHOSTAR
02304, 02704, 06904
02904, 05904
01204, 01704
02004, 02204
00604
00704
00604, 01304, 01404
00104
ABC
AMERICAST
BELL SOUTH
00103, 00203
02003
02003
RUNCO
SABA
00502
00602, 02402
00802
00402, 01102
00902, 02002, 02802
00502, 01102
00002, 00602, 01302,
04402
00504, 01304, 01604,
02604, 03104, 03604,
03704, 04304
03804
02604
01404
07004, 07104, 07204,
07304, 07404
03604
03404
01304
BIRMINGHAM CABLE
COMMUNICATIONS
00803
BRITISH TELECOM
00103
SALORA
SAMPO
SAMSUNG
SANKY
SANSUI
ENGEL
EXPRESSVU
FINLUX
XSAT
ZEHNDER
ZENITH
FOXTEL
04004
03304
DAERYUNG
DIRECTOR
FILMNET
00203, 01403, 01903
01303
01203
SANYO
SAVILLE
SBR
01002, 01602, 02002
02702
01502
FRACARRO
FTE
FUBA
GALAXIS
GE
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
03504
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
00103, 00803, 01303,
CD PLAYER
AIWA
ARCAM
AUDIO RESEARCH
00605
AUDIO TON
AUDIOLAB
AUDIOMECA
CAIRN
CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS
00205
CARVER
CYRUS
DENON
DKK
DMX ELECTRONICS
00605
SCHAUB LORENZ
03404, 04704
01504
01703
00605
00605
00002, 00602, 01602
00002, 01402, 01502
00802, 00902, 01702
00002, 00302, 00402,
00702, 01002, 01602,
04202
GOLDSTAR
HAMLIN
JERROLD
00503
SCHNEIDER
SCOTT
SEARS
00303, 00703
00103, 00803, 01303,
01703
GOI
02604
03104
00604, 03004
00605
00605
00605
00605
GOLD BOX
GRUNDIG
HIRSCHMANN
LG
00503
MEMOREX
MNET
00003
01203
SEG
02002
SEI
01502
00604, 01304
01404, 02804
02604
MOTOROLA
00803, 01303, 01703,
02303
SELECO
SEMP
00602
00902
HITACHI
HTS
NOOS
01803
00605, 00805
00605
01005
SHARP
SHINTOM
SIEMENS
SILVA
01102, 03502
01402, 01602
00402, 01502, 01602
00402
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEM
02304, 05104, 06904
03404, 05304
PACE
00603, 02203
00003, 00203, 00403
00003
01003, 01103
00503, 01603, 01903
00003
PANASONIC
PARAGON
PHILIPS
PIONEER
PULSAR
HUMAX
INVIDEO
JVC
00005
03604
02604
00104, 00604, 00704,
01004, 01804, 05604
SINGER
SINUDYNE
SONIC BLUE
SONTEC
SONY
00902, 01402
01502
03002, 03102
00402
00002, 00102, 00202,
00302, 03302, 04102
00702
KATHREIN
DYNAMIC BASS
PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX
00103
00805
00905
00805
00305, 00905
00905
KREISELMEYER
EMERSON
FISHER
GENEXXA
GOODMANS
GRUNDIG
HARMAN/KARDON
00605, 00705
HITACHI
JVC
00604
06304
03804
01104
02004, 02204
01404, 03804, 04204
00704
03104
02204
00004
02304
03504
00704
QUASAR
RCA
REGAL
RUNCO
SAGEM
SAMSUNG
00003
LABGEAR
LOGIX
02403, 02503
00703, 00903
00003
01803
00003, 00503
STS
SUNKAI
SUNSTAR
SUNTRONIC
SYLVANIA
02602
00002
00002
00002, 00302, 00802,
01502
LORENZEN
MAGNAVOX
MANHATTAN
MARANTZ
MEDIASAT
MEMOREX
METRONIC
MITSUBISHI
MOTOROLA
MYRYAD
00605
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA
00203, 01403, 01903
02103
00103
00305
00505
00105, 00405
00605
00605
SYMPHONIC
TANDY
TASHIKO
TATUNG
00002
SONY
KENWOOD
KRELL
LINN
00002, 01602
00002, 00402
00002, 00602, 00902,
01302, 01502
00002, 00602, 02102,
02202, 03402
00302, 01902
00302, 00402, 00602,
01102
STARCOM
SUPERCABLE 00803
TELE+1
TORX
TOSHIBA
TRANS PX
TS
01203
00103
00003
00803
00103
LXI
00905
MAGNAVOX
MARANTZ
MATSUI
MCS
MEMOREX
MERIDIAN
MICROMEGA
MIRO
MISSION
MYRYAD
NAD
NAIM
NSM
00605, 00905
00205, 00605
00605
00205
00905
00605
00605
00005
00605
00605
00005
00605
00605
00005, 00305, 00405,
00805, 00905
00205
00605
00305, 00905
00605
TEAC
NEXT LEVEL
NOKIA
03504
01404, 02104, 02404,
04904, 05704, 06804
03704
04504
01404, 03004, 05204,
06604
00904, 01904, 03004,
06504
01404
TECHNICS
TECO
OCTALTV
ORBITECH
PACE
UNITED CABLE
00103
TEKNIKA
TELEAVIA
00002, 00302, 00402
00602
ZENITH
00003, 01503, 02003
TELEFUNKEN 00602, 02402
PANASONIC
SATELLITE TUNER
TENOSAL
TENSAI
01402
00002
PANDA
PAYSAT
PHILIPS
@SAT
06404
THOMAS
THOMSON
00002
00602, 01202, 01302,
02402
02204
ABSAT
00104
00204, 00704, 01404,
02004, 02204, 02304,
03104, 04104, 05104,
06904
03104
01404
ALBA
01404
OPTIMUS
ALPHASTAR
AMSTRAD
ASTON
02504
03004
00304, 05004
00604
THORN
TIVO
TMK
00602, 01602
03202, 03302
02002
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
PIONEER
POLK AUDIO
PROTON
QED
QUAD
QUASAR
RCA
PIONEER
PROMAX
PROSCAN
RADIOLA
RADIOSHACK 03504
RADIX
RCA
ASTRO
TOSHIBA
00602, 00802, 00902,
01302, 01502, 03602
00402, 02002
02002
ATSAT
06404
01204, 01504
00704
AVALON
BLAUPUNKT
01304
00604
TOTEVISION
UHER
00605
00605
00605
00205
00305, 00805, 00905
00805
00605
BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING
03004, 05204
CANAL DIGITAL
03104
CANAL SATELLITE
03104
UNITECH
UNIVERSUM
02002
00002, 00402, 01502,
02002
01304
00404, 01204, 01504,
03204
00704
01404
VECTOR
VICTOR
00902
00602, 01302
RFT
SABRE
REALISTIC
REVOX
146 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of remote control codes
ROTEL
SAE
00605
00605
RCA
ROTEL
00306, 01006, 02606
01306
JVC
00110, 00710, 03410,
04110
SANSUI
SANYO
SCOTT
SEARS
SHARP
SIMAUDIO
00605, 00905
00805
00905
00905
00405
SAMSUNG
SANYO
SHARP
SHERWOOD
SHINSONIC
SLIM ART
SM ELECTRONIC
01106, 04506
02006
01406
03206
00506
KENWOOD
KLH
MAGNAVOX
01010, 03010
03810, 04010
00710, 01210, 01510,
02110
00010, 01210, 01510,
02410
MARANTZ
00605
03306
SONIC FRONTIERS
00605
MCS
MICROMEGA
00010
01510
02806
SONY
SYMPHONIC
TAG MCLAREN
00005
00905
SONY
SYLVANIA
TATUNG
00506, 04006
02206
03206
MUSICMAGIC 01210
MYRYAD
NAD
01510
00610
00605
00305
00205
00605
00605
00605
00505
00605
TEAC
TECHNICS
THETA DIGITAL
01006, 02606
00006
NORCENT
ONKYO
OPTIMUS
PANASONIC
03710
TANDY
00310, 00810, 02510
00710, 00910
00010, 02310, 04210,
04710
01210, 01510, 01910,
02010, 02110, 02210,
02410
TECHNICS
THORENS
THULE
UNIVERSUM
VICTOR
WARDS
01006
00306
00106, 04606
THOMSON
TOSHIBA
URBAN CONCEPTS
00106
PHILIPS
Yamaha
01105, 01205
XBOX
Yamaha
00306
PIONEER
POLK AUDIO
PROSCAN
QUASAR
RCA
00710, 00910, 03510
02410
01710
00006, 00706, 00806,
04306, 04406
00106, 01206, 02906
03306
CD RECORDER
KENWOOD
MARANTZ
PHILIPS
ZENITH
ZEUS
00010
00710, 00910, 01710,
03810, 04310
00710
01210
00710
01305
01305
01305
01405
SABA
DVD RECORDER
SANSUI
SCHNEIDER
SONY
Yamaha
HITACHI
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
PIONEER
SHARP
01507
00007, 00107, 00207
00807
00407, 00507, 00607
01207, 01307
00907, 01007, 01107
00307
00410, 01110, 01310,
04510, 04610
DVD PLAYER
ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS
02806
ALBA
AMSTRAD
APEX DIGITAL
STEREOPHONICS
00910
03010
03810
00010, 02810, 02910,
04210
SUNFIRE
TEAC
TECHNICS
SONY
02606
02306
TOSHIBA
VICTOR
Yamaha
01407
00707
02106, 02606, 03006,
03506, 03606, 03706,
04106
TELEFUNKEN 00710
THOMSON
THORENS
UHER
VENTURER
VICTOR
WARDS
01710
01510
00710
03810
00110
00410
00510, 01410, 03110,
04810, 05510, 05610,
05710, 05810
LD PLAYER
CARVER
DENON
BLAUPINKT
BLUE PARADE 01006
BUSH
CENTREX
CLATRONIC
CYBERHOME
DAEWOO
DANSAI
02606
00108
00008
00108
00008
00008
00008
00008
00108
00008
00108
00208
02306
02106
03406
02406
03206, 03306
03206
03206
00006
03106
02106
00206
01206
01206
02006
00306, 02606
02506
02906
01806
MARANTZ
MITSUBISHI
NAD
NAGSMI
OPTIMUS
PHILIPS
PIONEER
SALORA
SONY
Yamaha
Yamaha (iPod)
Yamaha (NET)
DECCA
DENON
05310
05410
DIAMOND
DIGITREX
DVD2000
EMERSON
ENTERPRISE
FISHER
TELEFUNKEN 00008
Yamaha 00308
TAPE DECK
AIWA
CARVER
GRUNDIG
HARMAN/KARDON
00111
MAGNAVOX
MARANTZ
MYRYAD
OPTIMUS
PHILIPS
PIONEER
POLK AUDIO
RCA
00111
00111
00111
MD RECORDER
KENWOOD
ONKYO
SHARP
SONY
Yamaha
GE
GO VIDEO
GOLDSTAR
GRADIENTE
GREENHILL
GRUNDIG
HITACHI
HITEKER
JVC
KENWOOD
KLH
KOSS
LG
LIMIT
MAGNAVOX
MARANTZ
MEMOREX
MICO
MICROSOFT
MINTEK
MITSUBISHI
MUSTEK
NESA
00109
00309
00209
00009
00111
00111
00111
00011
00111
00011
00111
00011
00111
00111
00211
00111
00011
00311, 00411
02606
00706
00409, 00509, 00609
01106, 01906
02106
00906, 01306
00006, 00606
02606
01806
02906
03106
00106, 02206
00706
03806
02706
00306
02606
00206
02806
02606
00106
RECEIVER (TUNER)
ADC
AIWA
00710
00410, 01210, 03610,
03910, 04410
03810
REVOX
SANSUI
SONY
THORENS
WARDS
ALCO
ANAM
APEX DIGITAL
04310
01810
01510
Yamaha
AUDIOLAB
AUDIOTRONIC 01510
AUDIOVOX
BOSE
CAMBRIDGE SOUNDWORKS
03310
CAPETRONIC
CARVER
CENTREX
DENON
FERGUSON
FINE ARTS
GRUNDIG
HARMAN/KARDON
00210, 02610
03810
01610
00710
01210, 01510
01810
03210
00710
ONKYO
ORITRON
PALSONIC
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
01806
02106
00006, 01606, 04206
00106, 00706, 01706,
03906
00406, 01006, 01506,
01606
00706
00306
01806
01510
01510
PIONEER
POLK AUDIO
PROSCAN
QWESTAR
INTEGRA
JBL
00310, 02510
00210, 02710
147 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|